OSA5548C-200 rev-k4

OSA 5548C SSU-E200

USER MANUAL for OSA SSU-E200

OSA 5548C SSU-E200 - User Manual - Revision K - October 2012

This page has been intentionally left blank


ii

What's new in this edition

 Update step 5 in Grounding & Power Connection procedure in section 4.4

 Upgrade drawings for Adobe compatibility

 Add a warning note for output terminations in section 4.5.2


iii



iv

Contents

Page Table of Contents

1.

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1

About this Manual .................................................................................................... 1-3

1.1.1 Copyright Notice ........................................................................................... 1-3

1.2

Reading Guide .......................................................................................................... 1-4

1.3

Safety Instructions ................................................................................................... 1-5

1.4

Warranty .................................................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

Certification .............................................................................................................. 1-9

2.

PRODUCT OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2-3

2.2

Main Applications .................................................................................................... 2-9

2.2.1 Synchronous Network Technologies Requiring Synchronization ................. 2-9

2.2.2 Synchronization Distribution Methods ........................................................ 2-13

2.2.3 Use Cases .................................................................................................. 2-16

2.3

Main Functions ....................................................................................................... 2-20

2.3.1 Input reference selection ............................................................................ 2-20

2.3.2 Jitter attenuation ......................................................................................... 2-20

2.3.3 Holdover/Freerun mode ............................................................................. 2-20

2.3.4 Signal distribution ....................................................................................... 2-20

2.3.5 Time Distribution ........................................................................................ 2-21

2.3.6 Re-timing .................................................................................................... 2-21

2.3.7 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) ................................................. 2-21

2.3.8 Pass-through .............................................................................................. 2-22

2.3.9 Performance Measurement ........................................................................ 2-23

2.3.10 Redundancy ............................................................................................... 2-24

2.3.11 Firmware download .................................................................................... 2-24

2.3.12 TL1 Protocol ............................................................................................... 2-24

2.4

System Description ................................................................................................ 2-25

2.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2-25

2.4.2

A:

Input Lines (IL) ....................................................................................... 2-25

2.4.3

C:

INput Cards (INC) .................................................................................. 2-26

2.4.4

B:

GPS Inputs ............................................................................................ 2-26

2.4.5

D:

GPS cards (GPS) .................................................................................. 2-26

2.4.6

D:

GNSS cards (GPS/GLONASS) ............................................................. 2-26

2.4.7

E:

Tracking & Holdover Cards (THC) ......................................................... 2-27

2.4.8

F:

Signal Generator Cards (SGC) .............................................................. 2-27

2.4.9

G:

OUtput Section ...................................................................................... 2-27

2.4.10 H: Expansion Shelves* ............................................................................... 2-30

2.4.11 I: Power Supply .......................................................................................... 2-30

2.4.12 J: MAnagament Cards (MAC) .................................................................... 2-30

2.5

System Components & Operation ........................................................................ 2-31

2.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................... 2-31

2.5.2 Card Description ........................................................................................ 2-34


v

Contents

2.5.3 INput Card (INC) ........................................................................................ 2-36

2.5.4 GPS Card (GPS) ........................................................................................ 2-39

2.5.5 GNSS Card ................................................................................................ 2-42

2.5.6 Tracking Holdover Card (THC) .................................................................. 2-45

2.5.7 Signal Generator Card (SGC) .................................................................... 2-48

2.5.8 OUtput Card (OUC) .................................................................................... 2-51

2.5.9 Time Code Card – NTP (TCC-NTP) .......................................................... 2-54

2.5.10 Time Code Card – PTP (TCC-PTP) ........................................................... 2-58

2.5.11 MAnagement Card (MAC) .......................................................................... 2-61

2.5.12 POWER A & POWER B Cards .................................................................. 2-64

2.5.13 Connectors Panel Layout ........................................................................... 2-66

2.5.14 Connector Tile Description ......................................................................... 2-68

2.5.15 POWER Connectors Tile ........................................................................... 2-69

2.5.16 MANAGEMENT Tile ................................................................................... 2-70

2.5.17 INPUT Tile .................................................................................................. 2-75

2.5.18 Input, Management & Power Remote Panel .............................................. 2-76

2.5.19 OUTPUT Tiles ............................................................................................ 2-77

2.5.20 Time Code Card - NTP Tile ........................................................................ 2-81

2.5.21 100x BNC Outputs Ports Remote Panel .................................................... 2-82

2.6

Communication ...................................................................................................... 2-83

2.6.1 SyncView PLUS ......................................................................................... 2-83

2.6.2 SyncTerminal ............................................................................................. 2-86

2.7

Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) .......................................................... 2-87

2.7.1 SSM Inputs ................................................................................................. 2-87

2.7.2 SSM Input Selection ................................................................................... 2-87

2.7.3 SSM Outputs .............................................................................................. 2-88

2.8

Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 2-88

3.

PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................................... 3-1

3.1

Overview ................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2

Site Survey ................................................................................................................ 3-3

3.3

ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) Prevention .................................................... 3-4

3.4

Rack Preparation ...................................................................................................... 3-4

3.4.1 Shelf Preparation ......................................................................................... 3-4

3.4.2 Power, Input and Management Remote Panel ............................................ 3-6

3.4.3 Remote Output Panel Preparation ............................................................... 3-7

3.4.4 Power supply cables .................................................................................... 3-8

3.5

GPS Antenna Mounting ........................................................................................... 3-8

3.6

Remote Communication .......................................................................................... 3-8

3.7

Required Tools & Material ....................................................................................... 3-9

4.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1

Overview ................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.2

Unpacking ................................................................................................................. 4-4

4.3

Rack Mounting ......................................................................................................... 4-5


vi

Contents

4.3.1 Mounting the Shelf in the Rack .................................................................... 4-5

4.3.2 Remote Power, Input and Management Panel Mounting............................. 4-7

4.3.3 Remote Output Panel Mounting ................................................................... 4-9

4.4

Grounding & Power Connection ........................................................................... 4-11

4.5

Connections ........................................................................................................... 4-15

4.5.1 Input and GPS Connectors ........................................................................ 4-15

4.5.2 Output Connectors ..................................................................................... 4-20

4.6

Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 4-30

4.6.1 External Input Alarms ................................................................................. 4-31

4.6.2 Output Alarm Groups ................................................................................. 4-33

4.7

Cabling Communication Ports .............................................................................. 4-35

4.7.1 Local Connection ....................................................................................... 4-35

4.7.2 Ethernet/LAN Connection .......................................................................... 4-37

4.8

Installation Check List ........................................................................................... 4-38

5.

TURN-UP PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1

Overview ................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.2

Power-up ................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.3

Card Start-up Sequences ........................................................................................ 5-5

5.3.1 PWR-Power Card ......................................................................................... 5-5

5.3.2 MAC - MAnagement Card ............................................................................ 5-6

5.3.3 INC - INput Card .......................................................................................... 5-6

5.3.4 GPS – GPS card .......................................................................................... 5-8

5.3.5 THC - Tracking Holdover Card ..................................................................... 5-9

5.3.6 SGC - Signal Generator Card .................................................................... 5-11

5.3.7 OUC – OUtput Card ................................................................................... 5-12

6.

OPERATING & PROVISIONING .......................................................................................... 6-1

6.1

Overview ................................................................................................................... 6-3

6.2

Communication ........................................................................................................ 6-3

6.2.1 TL-1 Protocol ................................................................................................ 6-3

6.2.2 Establishing Communication with the 5548C SSU .................................... 6-12

6.2.3 Serial Port Communication ........................................................................ 6-12

6.2.4 Ethernet Communication ............................................................................ 6-17

6.2.5 Communication Ports ................................................................................. 6-20

6.2.6 Using the SyncTerminal Software .............................................................. 6-23

6.3

Security Management ............................................................................................ 6-39

6.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 6-39

6.3.2 Default Username (UID) and Password (PID) ........................................... 6-39

6.3.3 Login to the 5548C ..................................................................................... 6-39

6.3.4 Logout the 5548C ....................................................................................... 6-40

6.3.5 Password Modification ............................................................................... 6-41

6.3.6 User Account Management ........................................................................ 6-42

6.4

General Parameters and Information ................................................................... 6-49

6.4.1 Set the 5548C’s Name ............................................................................... 6-49


vii

Contents

6.4.2 Time & Date ............................................................................................... 6-50

6.4.3 5548C Type Information and Inventory ...................................................... 6-51

6.4.4 Checking the Card Operation States ......................................................... 6-55

6.4.5 Card Deleting for Empty Slot ...................................................................... 6-57

6.4.6 Switching the Active Card within a Card Group ......................................... 6-58

6.4.7 Card Firmware Initialization ........................................................................ 6-60

6.4.8 Testing all the Cards' LEDs ........................................................................ 6-61

6.5

Input Line (IL) Properties & INput Card (INC) Configurations ........................... 6-63

6.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 6-63

6.5.2 Input connector to Input Line (IL) description ............................................. 6-64

6.5.3 Retrieving Current Input Configuration ....................................................... 6-65

6.5.4 Input Connector Assignment ...................................................................... 6-71

6.5.5 Enabling, Disabling or Monitoring an Input Line ......................................... 6-73

6.5.6 Input Line Termination ............................................................................... 6-74

6.5.7 E1 Input Line Configuration ........................................................................ 6-75

6.5.8 Wait-To-Restore Time (WTR) .................................................................... 6-80

6.6

GPS Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-83

6.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 6-83

6.6.2 GPS Card (GPS) Group State ................................................................... 6-83

6.6.3 GPS Input Properties ................................................................................. 6-84

6.6.4 Retrieving GPS Position ............................................................................. 6-94

6.6.5 GPS Time ................................................................................................... 6-96

6.7

GNSS Configuration .............................................................................................. 6-97

6.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 6-97

6.7.2 GNSS Card (GNSS) Group State .............................................................. 6-97

6.7.3 GNSS Input Properties ............................................................................... 6-98

6.7.4 Retrieving GNSS Position ........................................................................ 6-108

6.7.5 GPS Time ................................................................................................. 6-110

6.8

Line Switching, Tracking & Holdover (THC), Signal Filtering and Processing6-111

6.8.1 THC Group State ..................................................................................... 6-111

6.8.2 Switching Mode ........................................................................................ 6-112

6.8.3 Priorities Configuration ............................................................................. 6-115

6.8.4 Manual & Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis (MADDS) ........................... 6-117

6.8.5 Pass-through Mode .................................................................................. 6-119

6.9

Signal Generation & Output Properties ............................................................. 6-121

6.9.1 The Basics of SGC & OUC Operation ..................................................... 6-121

6.9.2 Signal Generation Card (SGC) Group Parameters and State.................. 6-125

6.9.3 OUtput Card Group State (OUC) ............................................................. 6-128

6.9.4 Output Signal Type and Configuration ..................................................... 6-130

6.9.5 Time Code Card - NTP (TCC-NTP) State ................................................ 6-140

6.9.6 Time Code Card - PTP (TCC-PTP) State ................................................ 6-144

6.10

Synchronization Status Message - SSM ............................................................ 6-151

6.10.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 6-151

6.10.2 SSM Configuration ................................................................................... 6-152

6.11

Alarms & Events ................................................................................................... 6-158

6.11.1 Buzzer, Alarm Cutoff (ACO) and MAC State............................................ 6-159

6.11.2 Retrieving Current Active Alarms with Software....................................... 6-164

6.11.3 Alarm Condition ........................................................................................ 6-167


viii

Contents

6.11.4 Alarm History ............................................................................................ 6-169

6.11.5 Autonomous Messages ............................................................................ 6-172

6.12

Performance Measurement (PM) ........................................................................ 6-178

6.12.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 6-178

6.12.2 Turn-on/off and resetting PM ................................................................... 6-179

6.12.3 Delays to Retrieve the 1 st

Result and Time Intervals for Updates ............ 6-180

6.12.4 Retrieving PM Results .............................................................................. 6-182

6.12.5 Receiving Spontaneous Measurement Results ....................................... 6-184

6.12.6 Performance Threshold Parameters ........................................................ 6-185

6.13

Firmware Download ............................................................................................. 6-189

6.13.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 6-189

6.13.2 Prerequisites ............................................................................................ 6-190

6.13.3 Firmware Download and Installation ........................................................ 6-190

7.

COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 7-3

7.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 7-3

7.1.2 Prerequisites ................................................................................................ 7-3

7.1.3 Requirements ............................................................................................... 7-3

7.2

Configuration & Provisioning Procedures ............................................................ 7-4

7.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 7-4

7.2.2 Establishing Communication ........................................................................ 7-4

7.2.3 Firmware Upgrade Procedure .................................................................... 7-11

7.2.4 General Configuration ................................................................................ 7-13

7.2.5 Input Lines .................................................................................................. 7-15

7.2.6 Input Line Switching, Selection & Priorities ................................................ 7-19

7.2.7 Output Line Configuration .......................................................................... 7-21

7.2.8 SSM Configuration ..................................................................................... 7-23

7.2.9 Restoring Factory Parameters ................................................................... 7-27

7.3

Test and Verification Procedure ........................................................................... 7-28

7.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 7-28

7.3.2 Serial Connection Test Procedure ............................................................. 7-28

7.3.3 Ethernet Connection Test Procedure ......................................................... 7-29

7.3.4 Verifying Shelf Inventory ............................................................................ 7-30

7.3.5 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode ........................................................... 7-31

7.3.6 LEDs Operation Test Procedure ................................................................ 7-31

7.3.7 Input Line Priority Configuration Testing Procedure................................... 7-32

7.3.8 Redundant Card (Stand-by) Test Procedure.............................................. 7-33

7.3.9 Testing Alarm Levels .................................................................................. 7-34

7.3.10 Testing Output Ports .................................................................................. 7-35

7.3.11 Commissioning Completion ....................................................................... 7-40

8.

MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................... 8-1

8.1

Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 8-3

8.1.1 LEDs Test .................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.2 Stand-by Cards Test .................................................................................... 8-4

8.2

Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 8-5

8.2.1 Alarm Behavior - Visible on Front LEDs ....................................................... 8-5


ix

Contents

8.2.2 Alarm Behavior - Visible with Software ...................................................... 8-29

8.3

Cards & Tiles Replacement or Addition ............................................................... 8-41

8.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................... 8-41

8.3.2 Card Insertion ............................................................................................. 8-41

8.3.3 Connector Tile Insertion ............................................................................. 8-44

8.4

Fuse Replacement ................................................................................................. 8-45

8.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 8-45

8.4.2 Conditions for Replacing the Fuse ............................................................. 8-45

8.4.3 Fuse Location ............................................................................................. 8-46

8.4.4 Fuse Replacement Procedure ................................................................... 8-47

8.5

Repair & Return ...................................................................................................... 8-49

8.6

Oscilloquartz Contact Information ....................................................................... 8-51

8.6.1 Technical Assistance ................................................................................. 8-51

8.6.2 Sales .......................................................................................................... 8-51

9.

SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1

Communication ........................................................................................................ 9-3

9.2

Input Specification ................................................................................................... 9-4

9.3

Tracking & Holdover ................................................................................................ 9-5

9.4

Performance Measurement (PM) ............................................................................ 9-6

9.5

Outputs ..................................................................................................................... 9-6

9.5.1 NTP .............................................................................................................. 9-7

9.5.2 PTP .............................................................................................................. 9-7

9.6

Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 9-8

9.6.1 General ........................................................................................................ 9-8

9.6.2 Input Alarms ................................................................................................. 9-8

9.6.3 Output Alarms Relays .................................................................................. 9-9

9.7

Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 9-9

9.8

Mechanical .............................................................................................................. 9-10

9.9

General .................................................................................................................... 9-10

SHELF SPARES & REPLACEMENT PARTS .................................................................................. 1

GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................................ I

DOCUMENT HISTORY ..................................................................................................................... V

FRONT VIEW DRAWING ................................................................................................................ VII

REAR VIEW DRAWING ................................................................................................................. VIII


x

List of Figures

List of Figures Page

Figure 2-1 : 5548C SSU-E200 Front View ..................................................................................... 2-5

Figure 2-2: 5548C SSU-E200 Rear View ...................................................................................... 2-6

Figure 2-3 : 5548C SSU-E200 Simplified Block Diagram .............................................................. 2-7

Figure 2-4 : Logical View of SyncView PLUS ................................................................................ 2-8

Figure 2-5 : Physical View of SyncView PLUS .............................................................................. 2-8

Figure 2-6 : Synchronization reference chain for SDH (ITU-T Rec. G.803) ................................. 2-10

Figure 2-7 : Synchronization reference chain for SDH over OTN (ITU-T Rec. G.8251) .............. 2-11

Figure 2-8 : GPS .......................................................................................................................... 2-13

Figure 2-9 : Synchronization transfer in SDH & SONET .............................................................. 2-14

Figure 2-10 : Synchronization transfer in PDH ............................................................................ 2-14

Figure 2-11 : Synchronization transfer in WDM ........................................................................... 2-15

Figure 2-12 : The 5548C with internal GPS cards ....................................................................... 2-16

Figure 2-13 : The 5548C with an external Cesium clock ............................................................. 2-16

Figure 2-14 : The 5548C as Synchronization Supply Unit ........................................................... 2-17

Figure 2-15 : The 5548C configured as an Expansion Shelf ....................................................... 2-17

Figure 2-16 : The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Shelf ................................................................. 2-18

Figure 2-17 : The 5548C as a Time-of-Day (TOD) server ........................................................... 2-19

Figure 2-18 : System Description Diagram .................................................................................. 2-25

Figure 2-19 : 5548C SSU-E200 Front Panel Layout .................................................................... 2-31

Figure 2-20 : Physical Card Description ...................................................................................... 2-34

Figure 2-21 : INput Card (INC) ..................................................................................................... 2-36

Figure 2-22 : Input Card - Block Diagram .................................................................................... 2-38

Figure 2-23 : GPS Card (GPS) .................................................................................................... 2-39

Figure 2-24 : GPS Card - Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 2-41

Figure 2-20 : GNSS Card (GLN) .................................................................................................. 2-42

Figure 2-26 : GNSS Card - Block Diagram .................................................................................. 2-44

Figure 2-27 : Tracking Holdover Card (THC) ............................................................................... 2-45

Figure 2-28 : Tracking Holdover Card - Block Diagram ............................................................... 2-47

Figure 2-29 : Signal Generator Card (SGC) ................................................................................ 2-48

Figure 2-30 : Signal Generator Card - Block Diagram ................................................................. 2-50

Figure 2-31 : OUtput Card (OUC) ................................................................................................ 2-51

Figure 2-32 : Output Card - Block Diagram ................................................................................. 2-53

Figure 2-33 : Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) .......................................................................... 2-54

Figure 2-34 : Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) .......................................................................... 2-55

Figure 2-35 : NTP Card - Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 2-57

Figure 2-36 : Time Code Card-PTP (TCC-PTP) .......................................................................... 2-58

Figure 2-37 : LOAD SHARING (TCC-PTP) ................................................................................ 2-60

Figure 2-38 : MAnagement Card (MAC) ...................................................................................... 2-61

Figure 2-39 : MAnagement Card - Block Diagram ....................................................................... 2-63

Figure 2-40 : Power Cards (PWR) ............................................................................................... 2-64

Figure 2-41: 5548C SSU-E200 Rear View .................................................................................. 2-66

Figure 2-42 : Connector Tile Description ..................................................................................... 2-68

Figure 2-43 : Power Connector Tile ............................................................................................. 2-69

Figure 2-44 : Management Connectors Tile ................................................................................ 2-70

Figure 2-45 : Alarm Out Connectors ............................................................................................ 2-73

Figure 2-46 : Master & Expansion Rotary Switch ........................................................................ 2-74

Figure 2-47 : Input Tile ................................................................................................................. 2-75

Figure 2-48 : 100. Outputs Ports Remote Panel .......................................................................... 2-77


xi

List of Figures

Figure 2-49 : ASYM Output Connectors Tiles .............................................................................. 2-78

Figure 2-50 : SUB-D Output Connectors Tiles ............................................................................. 2-79

Figure 2-51 : IDC Output Connectors Tiles .................................................................................. 2-80

Figure 2-52 : TCC-NTP Output Tile ............................................................................................. 2-81

Figure 2-50 : Remote BNC panel - Front View ............................................................................ 2-82

Figure 2-51 : Remote BNC panel - Top View .............................................................................. 2-82

Figure 2-55 : SyncView PLUS - Logical View (example) ............................................................. 2-84

Figure 2-56 : SyncView PLUS - Physical View (example) ........................................................... 2-85

Figure 2-57 : SyncView PLUS Network Manager version – Synchronization Network General View

(example) ............................................................................................................................. 2-85

Figure 2-58 : SyncTerminal (example) ......................................................................................... 2-86

Figure 3-1 : Dimensional View ....................................................................................................... 3-5

Figure 3-2 : Remote BNC panel - Front View ................................................................................ 3-7

Figure 3-3 : Remote BNC panel - Top View .................................................................................. 3-7

Figure 4-1 : Rack Mounting ............................................................................................................ 4-6

Figure 4-2: Mounting Remote PWR, IN and MGMT Panel in the rack ........................................... 4-7

Figure 4-3: Cabling Remote Panel to OSA 5548C SSU ................................................................ 4-8

Figure 4-4: Mounting Remote Output Panel in the rack ................................................................. 4-9

Figure 4-5: Power Tiles Location on rear 5548C side .................................................................. 4-11

Figure 4-6: Power Tiles Location on Remote Power, Input, and Management Panel ................. 4-11

Figure 4-7: Fuses Location .......................................................................................................... 4-12

Figure 4-8 : Grounding & Power Connections on Power Tiles .................................................... 4-14

Figure 4-9: Grounding and power connection on PWR, IN & MGMT Remote panel ................... 4-14

Figure 4-10: Input Tile location on the 5548C shelf ..................................................................... 4-15

Figure 4-11: Input Tile on the Remote Panel ............................................................................... 4-15

Figure 4-12: Input and GPS Cards Location ................................................................................ 4-16

Figure 4-13: Input Tile on 5548C shelf ......................................................................................... 4-17

Figure 4-14: Input Tile on Remote Panel ..................................................................................... 4-17

Figure 4-15: Output cards and tiles location ................................................................................ 4-20

Figure 4-16 : Output Connectors PPS location (slot A102) ......................................................... 4-28

Figure 4-17 : Output Connectors PPS ......................................................................................... 4-28

Figure 4-18: Output PPS on Remote Panel ................................................................................. 4-29

Figure 4-20 : Alarms - Management Tile ..................................................................................... 4-30

Figure 4-19: Alarams - Remote panel .......................................................................................... 4-30

Figure 4-21 : External Input Alarm Connector ............................................................................. 4-31

Figure 4-22 : External Input Alarm Application ............................................................................ 4-31

Figure 4-23 : Output Alarm Connection ....................................................................................... 4-33

Figure 4-24 : Output Alarm Application ........................................................................................ 4-34

Figure 4-25: Local management Port location on the shelf ......................................................... 4-35

Figure 4-26: Local management port location on Remote Panel ................................................. 4-36

Figure 4-27 : LAN Comm. Port Location on 5548C shelf ............................................................. 4-37

Figure 4-28: LAN Com Port location on Remote panel ................................................................ 4-37

Figure 5-1 : Power Card Turn-up ................................................................................................... 5-5

Figure 5-2 : Management Card Turn-up ........................................................................................ 5-6

Figure 5-3 : Input Card Turn-up ..................................................................................................... 5-7

Figure 5-4 : GPS card Turn-up ...................................................................................................... 5-8

Figure 5-5 : Tracking Holdover Card Turn-up ................................................................................ 5-9

Figure 5-6 : Signal Generator Card Turn-up ................................................................................ 5-11

Figure 5-7 : Output Card Turn-up ................................................................................................ 5-12

Figure 6-1 : Local Comm. Port Connection .................................................................................. 6-12

Figure 6-2 : SyncTerminal Main Window ..................................................................................... 6-24


xii

List of Figures

Figure 6-3 : SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu ................................................................................. 6-25

Figure 6-4 : SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu ................................................................................. 6-26

Figure 6-5 : SyncTerminal Main or Command Menu ................................................................... 6-27

Figure 6-6: SyncView PLUS: time and date ................................................................................. 6-50

Figure 6-7 : 5548C - SSU Physical Type Information .................................................................. 6-51

Figure 6-8 : Article Number & Card Type Location ...................................................................... 6-52

Figure 6-9: SyncView - Inventory ................................................................................................. 6-54

Figure 6-10 : Physical Lamp Test ................................................................................................ 6-61

Figure 6-11 : Input Connector Assignment .................................................................................. 6-64

Figure 6-12: SyncView: Input Configuration Window ................................................................... 6-69

Figure 6-13: SyncView: Input Type configuration Window .......................................................... 6-72

Figure 6-14: SyncView - WTR time .............................................................................................. 6-82

Figure 6-15: SyncView - THC Details ........................................................................................ 6-114

Figure 6-16: SyncView - Priority Setting .................................................................................... 6-117

Figure 6-17 : Pass-through Mode .............................................................................................. 6-119

Figure 6-18 : SGC and OUC Operation ..................................................................................... 6-121

Figure 6-19 : Output Cards and Tiles Location .......................................................................... 6-122

Figure 6-20 : Default MTIE Threshold ........................................................................................ 6-185

Figure 6-21 : Default TDEV Threshold ....................................................................................... 6-186

Figure 6-22 : Default Ym Threshold ........................................................................................... 6-187

Figure 6-23 : Firmware Download Overview .............................................................................. 6-189

Figure 7-1 : E1 Pulse Template ................................................................................................... 7-36

Figure 7-2 : Wave shape at a Frequency output port .................................................................. 7-37

Figure 7-3 : PTP set-up testing .................................................................................................... 7-39

Figure 8-1 : Input Connector Tile Insertion .................................................................................. 8-44

Figure 8-2 : Single Card Fuse Location ....................................................................................... 8-46


xiii

List of Tables

List of Tables Page

Table 2-1 Card Locations ............................................................................................................. 2-34

TaTable 2-2 INput Card (INC) LED Description ........................................................................... 2-36

Table 2-3 GPS Card (GPS) LED Description .............................................................................. 2-39

Table 2-4 GNSS Card LED Description ...................................................................................... 2-42

Table 2-5 Tracking Holdover Card (THC) LED Description ......................................................... 2-45

Table 2-6 Signal Generator Card (SGC) LED Description ........................................................... 2-48

Table 2-7 OUput Card (OUC) LED Description ........................................................................... 2-51

Table 2-8 Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) LED Description ................................................... 2-54

Table 2-9 Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) LED Description .................................................... 2-55

Table 2-10 Time Code Card-PTP (TCC-PTP) LED Description .................................................. 2-58

Table 2-11 MAnagement Card (MAC) LED Description .............................................................. 2-61

Table 2-12 Power Card (PWR) LED Description ......................................................................... 2-64

Table 2-13 RS-232 - Local COMM Port Connector Description .................................................. 2-65

Table 2-14 Connector Tile Locations ........................................................................................... 2-67

Table 2-15 Expansion Link Connector Description ...................................................................... 2-71

Table 2-16 LAN COMM Port Connector Description ................................................................... 2-71

Table 2-17 RS-232 - Local COMM Port Connector Description .................................................. 2-72

Table 2-18 Ext. Alarm Inputs Connector Description ................................................................... 2-72

Table 2-19 Master & Expansion Selection ................................................................................... 2-74

Table 2-20 TCC-NTP Ethernet COMM Port Connector Description ............................................ 2-81

Table 2-21 SSM Levels ................................................................................................................ 2-87

Table 4-1: Reference between OUC cards and Output tiles ........................................................ 4-21

Table 4-2 SUB-D 9 Pole pin description ...................................................................................... 4-27

Table 4-3 Serial AT-LINK Cable PIN assignment - Local Comm. ................................................ 4-36

Table 4-4 Installation Check List .................................................................................................. 4-38

Table 5-1 Power Card Turn-up Status ........................................................................................... 5-5

Table 5-2 MAC Card Turn-up Status ............................................................................................. 5-6

Table 5-3 Input Card Turn-up Status ............................................................................................. 5-7

Table 5-4 Input Card Turn-up Status ............................................................................................. 5-8

Table 5-5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn-up Status ...................................................................... 5-10

Table 5-6 Signal Generator Card Turn-up Status ........................................................................ 5-11

Table 5-7 Output Card Turn-up Status ........................................................................................ 5-12

Table 6-1 TL1 Command Format Types ........................................................................................ 6-5

Table 6-2 TL1 Command Block Verbs ........................................................................................... 6-6

Table 6-3 Card Names & Abbreviations within TL1 ..................................................................... 6-11

Table 6-4 Ethernet Parameters .................................................................................................... 6-18

Table 6-5 Default Communication Ports ...................................................................................... 6-20

Table 6-6 Ethernet Ports .............................................................................................................. 6-20

Table 6-7 Communication Parameter Names .............................................................................. 6-22

Table 6-8 Keyboard Shortcuts for Typing TL1 Commands .......................................................... 6-36

Table 6-9 5548C Type Information .............................................................................................. 6-51

Table 6-10 Lamp Test Sequence ................................................................................................. 6-62

Table 6-11 Possible Input Configurations .................................................................................... 6-65

Table 6-12 Input Line Editing Setting ........................................................................................... 6-71

Table 6-13 Output GroupTL1 Abbreviations .............................................................................. 6-124

Table 6-14 Output Line TL1 Abbreviation .................................................................................. 6-124

Table 6-15 SSM & Quality Levels .............................................................................................. 6-151

Table 6-16 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results ................................................. 6-181

Table 6-17 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results ................................................ 6-181


xiv

List of Tables

Table 6-18 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM Results .......................................................................... 6-181

Table 6-19 Default MTIE Threshold ........................................................................................... 6-185

Table 6-20 Default TDEV Threshold .......................................................................................... 6-186

Table 6-21 Default Ym Threshold .............................................................................................. 6-187

Table 6-22 Not retrievable with TL1 commands for evident security reason ............................. 6-191

Table 7-1 End of Commissioning Check List ............................................................................... 7-42

Table 8-1 Input Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs .................................................................... 8-8

Table 8-2 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ............................................. 8-10

Table 8-3 GNSS Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ................................................................ 8-12

Table 8-4 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ............................................. 8-14

Table 8-5 OUtput Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ............................................................... 8-20

Table 8-6 Time Code Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ......................................................... 8-21

Table 8-7 Time Code Card Turn-up Status ................................................................................. 8-22

Table 8-8 MAnangement Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs ................................................... 8-25

Table 8-9 Time Code Card NTP Troubleshooting - visible LEDs................................................. 8-26

Table 8-10 Time Code Card NTPTurn-up Status ........................................................................ 8-27

Table 8-11 Power Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs .............................................................. 8-28

Table 8-12 Troubleshooting - visible with Software ..................................................................... 8-39

Table 9-1 Communication Specifications ....................................................................................... 9-3

Table 9-2 Input Specifications ........................................................................................................ 9-5

Table 9-3 Tracking Holdover Specifications .................................................................................. 9-5

Table 9-4 Performance Measurement (PM) Specifications ........................................................... 9-6

Table 9-5 Output Specifications ..................................................................................................... 9-7

Table 9-6 NTP Specifications ........................................................................................................ 9-7

Table 9-7 PTP Specifications ......................................................................................................... 9-7

Table 9-8 General Alarms Specifications ....................................................................................... 9-8

Table 9-9 Input Alarms Specifications ........................................................................................... 9-8

Table 9-10 Output Alarms Relays Specifications ........................................................................... 9-9

Table 9-11 Power Supply Specifications ....................................................................................... 9-9

Table 9-12 Mechanical Specifications ......................................................................................... 9-10

Table 9-13 General Specifications ............................................................................................... 9-11


xv

List of Procedures

List of Procedures Page

Procedure 4-1 Rack Mounting ....................................................................................................... 4-5

Procedure 4-2 Remote Panel Mounting ......................................................................................... 4-8

Procedure 4-3 Grounding & Power connection ........................................................................... 4-13

Procedure 4-4 Cabling a Frequency Input Connector ................................................................. 4-18

Procedure 4-5 Cabling an E1 Input Connector ............................................................................ 4-19

Procedure 4-6 Cabling a GPS Input Connector ........................................................................... 4-19

Procedure 4-7 Cabling an E1 or Freq. port from an Asym. Output Tile with CEI connectors ...... 4-22

Procedure 4-8 Cabling Output port from Output Tile with SUB-D 25pins connectors ................. 4-23

Procedure 4-9 Cabling the BNC Remote panel ........................................................................... 4-25

Procedure 4-10 Cabling the SUB-D Remote panel ..................................................................... 4-27

Procedure 4-11 Cabling a PPS Output Connector ...................................................................... 4-29

Procedure 4-12 External Alarm Input Connection ....................................................................... 4-32

Procedure 4-13 Output Alarm Connection ................................................................................... 4-34

Procedure 5-1 Power-up ................................................................................................................ 5-4

Procedure 6-1 Serial Connection ................................................................................................. 6-16

Procedure 6-2 Serial Connection with SyncView PLUS .............................................................. 6-17

Procedure 6-3 Ethernet Connection ............................................................................................ 6-19

Procedure 6-4 Ethernet Connection with SyncView PLUS .......................................................... 6-20

Procedure 6-5 SyncTerminal Communication Configuration and Set-up .................................... 6-32

Procedure 6-6 Typing TL1 Commands ........................................................................................ 6-35

Procedure 7-1 Serial Connection ................................................................................................... 7-5

Procedure 7-2 Ethernet Configuration ........................................................................................... 7-5

Procedure 7-3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration ...................................................................... 7-6

Procedure 7-4 Ethernet Connection .............................................................................................. 7-7

Procedure 7-5 NTP Connection ................................................................................................... 7-10

Procedure 7-6 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................... 7-12

Procedure 7-7 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name (SID) ........................................................... 7-13

Procedure 7-8 Setting the Date and Time ................................................................................... 7-14

Procedure 7-9 Disabling Empty (unused) Slots ........................................................................... 7-15

Procedure 7-10 E1 Input Line Configuration ................................................................................ 7-16

Procedure 7-11 Frequency Input Line Configuration ................................................................... 7-18

Procedure 7-12 Disabling an Unused Input Line ......................................................................... 7-18

Procedure 7-13 Switching and Selection Mode Configuration ..................................................... 7-19

Procedure 7-14 Input Line Priorities Configuration ...................................................................... 7-20

Procedure 7-15 E1 Output Signal Type Configuration ................................................................. 7-21

Procedure 7-16 Frequency Output Signal Configuration ............................................................. 7-22

Procedure 7-17 NTP Output Signal Configuration ....................................................................... 7-22

Procedure 7-18 Enabling SSM Configuration .............................................................................. 7-23

Procedure 7-19 Forcing SSM Quality Level on Input Line ........................................................... 7-24

Procedure 7-20 Sa bit Configuration on Input .............................................................................. 7-26

Procedure 7-21 Sa bit configuration on Output Line .................................................................... 7-27

Procedure 7-22 Restoring Factory Parameters ........................................................................... 7-27

Procedure 7-23 Serial Connection Test ....................................................................................... 7-28

Procedure 7-24 Ethernet Connection Test .................................................................................. 7-29

Procedure 7-25 Verifying Shelf Inventory .................................................................................... 7-30

Procedure 7-26 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode ................................................................... 7-31

Procedure 7-27 LEDs Operation Test .......................................................................................... 7-31

Procedure 7-28 Input Line Priority Configuration Test ................................................................. 7-32

Procedure 7-29 Redundant Card (stand-by) Test ........................................................................ 7-33


xvi


Procedure 7-30 Minor Alarm (MN) Test ....................................................................................... 7-34

Procedure 7-31 Major Alarm (MJ) Test ........................................................................................ 7-34

Procedure 7-32 Critical Alarm (CR) Test ..................................................................................... 7-35

Procedure 7-33 NTP Output Test ................................................................................................ 7-38

Procedure 7-34 Alarm and History Flushing ................................................................................ 7-40

Procedure 8-1 LEDs Maintenance Test ......................................................................................... 8-3

Procedure 8-2 Stand-by Cards Maintenance Test ......................................................................... 8-4

Procedure 8-3 Card Addition or Replacement ............................................................................. 8-43

Procedure 8-4 Connector Tile Insertion ....................................................................................... 8-44

Procedure 8-5 Power Card Fuse Replacement ........................................................................... 8-47

Procedure 8-6 Single Card Fuse Replacement ........................................................................... 8-48

Procedure 8-7 Repair & Return ................................................................................................... 8-49


xvii




xviii

Chapter

1. Introduction

Including :

 About this Manual

 Reading Guide

 Safety

 Warranty

 Certification

Introduction


1-1


Introduction


1-2

Introduction

1.1 About this Manual

This manual has been designed to provide basic and detailed information for the correct use and operation of the OSA 5548C SSU. It summarizes the overall equipment concept and theory of operation, describes the hardware itself and provides information related to installation, operation and maintenance as well as a description of the TL1 commands available.

It is intended for the use of the following types of users:

 Systems Engineers: An overview of the equipment concept and theory of operation as well as an ordering guide is provided in Chapter 2.

 Installation Engineers: Detailed technical information and procedures for correct installation, operation, configuration and commissioning as well as equipment specifications and maintenance guidelines are provided in

Chapters 3 through 9.

 Maintenance Engineers: Information on troubleshooting, maintenance and equipment technical data is provided in Chapters 6 through 9. The

Appendices provide guidelines for analyzing alarms & events, a reference list for TL-1 commands and spare part ordering information.

Copyright © 2012 Oscilloquartz SA

All Rights Reserved

The Oscilloquartz product described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

The contents and information in this document are provided in connection with

Oscilloquartz products. No license, expressed or implied by estoppels or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in

Oscilloquartz SA’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products.

This document is exclusive property of Oscilloquartz SA and may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, modified, translated, reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form without prior consent in writing from Oscilloquartz SA, Brévards 16, 2002

Neuchâtel 2, Switzerland.

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this guide. However,

Oscilloquartz SA makes no warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Oscilloquartz SA shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or the examples herein.


1-3

Introduction

Oscilloquartz SA may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.

Special icons, attracting your attention, precede important and/or critical information in this document. Hereafter are explanations of each icon.

CAUTION

This symbol is extremely important and must not be neglected. It precedes information or procedures regarding installation, operation or maintenance.

Follow all steps or procedures, as instructed, to avoid any damage to equipment or serious personal injury.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HARZARD

This warning symbol is extremely important and must not be neglected. It indicates that there are dangerous high voltages present inside the enclosure of this product and precedes important warnings to avoid any risk of fire or electrical shock that could lead to serious personal injury or loss of life.

ESD CAUTION

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) must be avoided so as not to damage or destroy static sensitive components.

Note:

A note symbol informs the reader that additional information on the related subject is provided in order to simplify a described task, suggest other references or even just simplify an explanation.

Recommendation:

Recommendations advise the user on manufacturer tested methods and procedures proven valuable for correct use and optimum equipment results.


1-4

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

DO NOT DISCARD, READ BEFORE OPERATING

GENERAL

Exercise extreme care when handling any electronics equipment as it contains precision parts that can be damaged by improper handling.

Avoid touching connector pin surfaces. Foreign matter deposited on contact surfaces can cause corrosion, and eventually lead to degradation of performance. In addition, do not use abrasives to clean contact/pin surfaces.

ESD CONSIDERATION

Each module contains semiconductor devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharges. It is advisable to take anti-static precautions when handling electronic boards or static sensitive components. Use an approved anti-static bracelet in accordance with company practice.

WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not place containers with liquids such as coffee, water, sodas, etc. on this unit. Do not operate this equipment in a wet environment.

HEATING

Do not install this product near heat sources such as radiators, air ducts, areas subject to direct, intense sunlight, or other products that produce heat.


1-5

Introduction

VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the chassis are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product. To protect the unit from overheating, those openings must not be blocked or covered. When integrating this unit in a rack cabinet, at least 1 RU (4.3 cm) of clearance above and below the unit is necessary to assure sufficient cooling.

GROUNDING

EARTH CONNECTION IS ESSENTIAL BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE

SUPPLY.

Ensure that all devices connected to it are connected to its protective (earth) ground. (Grounding one conductor of a two-conductor outlet is not sufficient.)

Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside the equipment) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal is likely to make this equipment dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.

POWER

Make sure the power sources are compatible with the power inputs of the equipment. Verify that the correct fuses are installed. The equipment's protective earth terminals must be connected to the protective conductor of the (mains) power cord or the station earth. The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. The protective action must not be negated by the use of an extension cord

(power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).

Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type (normal blow, time delay, etc.) are used for replacement. The use of repaired fuses and the short-circuiting of fuse holders must be avoided.

Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired, the equipment must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation


1-6

Introduction

POWER CORD PROTECTION

The customer-supplied power cables connected to the 5548C should be routed or installed in such a manner to protect it from being walked on or pinched. The unit should be powered down completely before connecting or disconnecting the power cable. The power cord should be removed before moving the unit. The power cord must be placed near an easily accessible unobstructed socket outlet.

CLEANING

Connected and running equipment can only be dusted using a soft dry cloth.

ONLY WITH, AUTHORIZED PERMISSION, OUT OF SERVICE &

UNPLUGGED equipment can be cleaned with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use liquid cleaners, aerosols, abrasive pads, scouring powders or solvents, such as benzine or alcohol. Ensure the surface cleaned is fully dry before reconnecting power

SERVICING AND MODIFICATIONS

To avoid dangerous electric shock, do not perform any servicing or modifications other than what is recommended in this User Manual. Do not attempt to gain access to areas of the unit where dangerous voltages are present. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE

 Refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

 When the power supply cord is damaged.

 If liquid has been spilled into the enclosure of the unit.

 If the product does not function normally by following the instructions in the User’s Manual. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require rework by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation.

 If the product has been damaged in any way.

 When the unit displays a negative, distinct change in performance.


1-7

Introduction

1.4 Warranty

This Oscilloquartz product carries a warranty which commences from date of dispatch from factory. Unless agreed otherwise or stipulated differently on the original acknowledgement of order, the duration of the warranty is twenty four months.

It applies to demonstrably faulty material or poor workmanship, but excludes batteries.

Oscilloquartz shall bear only the cost of repair or replacement in its own premises. Should this not be possible for reasons beyond our control, all additional costs are at customer expense.

Repairs under warranty carry either the balance of the original warranty or a six months warranty, whichever is longer.

Damages resulting from natural wear, improper maintenance, failure to observe the operating instructions, excessive strain, unsuited consumption material as well as improper environmental and mounting conditions are excluded from this warranty.

The warranty expires if the customer or a third party modifies or repairs the product without Oscilloquartz's prior written consent or if the customer does not take immediate steps to prevent the damage from becoming more serious; likewise, if insufficient time is provided for repair or replacement.

The customer will not be entitled to other warranty claims. Oscilloquartz is not liable for consequential damage.


1-8

Introduction

1.5 Certification

EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION:

Oscilloquartz equipment is tested according to well-defined procedures. Appropriate testing and inspection takes place at the component, board, equipment and system levels.

The company maintains in-house cesium standards that are continuously compared to

UTC. Before any equipment is released, it must satisfy the relevant tests and inspection schedules. The equipment is then issued with a "Certificate of Conformity" that guarantees its conformance with the relevant performance criteria.

The OSA 5548C SSU is designed to be compliant to:

 ITU-T

 ETSI

 EMC

 CE

A variety of Oscilloquartz products are certified world-wide. For details, please refer to our web site at www.oscilloquartz.com

COMPANY CERTIFICATION:

 Certified since 1987 by the Swiss Accreditation Service as an accredited laboratory for time and frequency.

 Certified ISO 9001 since 1994 and ISO 14001 since 2000 by The Swiss

Association for Quality and Management Systems (SQS)


1-9


Introduction


1-10

Chapter

2. Product Overview

Including:

 Introduction

 Main Applications

 Main Functions

 System Description

 System Components & Operation

 Communication

 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM)

 Alarms

Product Overview


2-1


Product Overview


2-2

Product Overview

2.1 Introduction

The OSA 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU) is the latest product of a range of similar devices designed for Telecom Network Synchronization, complying with the highest standards. The unit incorporates the latest technological innovations and features for the most demanding present and future network requirements.

The OSA 5548C SSU is the most compact and high performance unit available on the market today for the synchronization of mobile and fixed telecommunication networks.

The OSA 5548C SSU is a timing/signal regenerator/distributor housed in a 6U subrack

19” or ETSI equipped with convenient front access plug in cards with optimized grouping of functionalities. All cards may be duplicated for full system redundancy from the inputs to the user outputs by simple insertion of a second adjacent card for 1:1 functionality protection. Duplicating the cards for full system redundancy does not impact on the maximum input or output capacity of the SSU (dedicated section for redundant modules).

An additional security pass through function for extreme clock signal availability is also implemented, making the unit truly failure proof.

Insert one or both of the available integrated GPS modules to transform your SSU into a

Primary Reference Source fully compliant to G.811 standards.

Several types of connectors are available on the main shelf or through a Remote panel with easy plug in connections. The equipment is locally accessible (RS-232) using an intuitive graphical user interface and remotely manageable (TCP/IP) via SyncView PLUS.

The OSA 5548C SSU has been designed on a truly flexible modular basis allowing multiple equipment configurations to meet all current and future synchronization requirements. By simple insertion of modules, the operator can upgrade any function of an initial configuration to a fully redundant one – upgrading does not require “powering off” of the unit and does not require additional module configuration (plug and play). The new inserted module will automatically be configured and software downloaded, no intervention needed from the operator. The same feature is used in case of capacity extension.

The OSA 5548C SSU fully supports the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) features from inputs decoding to outputs SSM distribution for true synchronization signals validation to collocated or downward network elements.


2-3

Product Overview

At a glance, some of the key features of the 5548C SSU, including a number of unique functions, are summarized below:

 Up to 16 inputs selectable on input cards

 Automatic input frequency validation

 Plug in single or dual GPS receiver card

 Universal input / output card design

 Innovative signal processing and distribution

 20 user ports per card, software selectable per group of 10

 Up to 200 outputs protected 1:1 user selectable

 Modular connector tile sets for inputs / outputs

 Fully redundant architecture with 1:1 protection

 Pass through functionality

 Remote download of firmware and software release

 Compact 6U ETSI / 19” mountings

 Internal high stability Quartz crystal oscillator or Rubidium oscillator

 State-of-the-art DDS technology

 TL1 commands with SyncTerminal and easy graphical pull down menus

 Performance measurements on all inputs

 User selectable SSM decoding and encoding

 Auto detection of redundant card function and firmware version

 Firmware detection and upgrade upon redundant card insertion

 NGN ready for maximum flexibility

 Unique design for master or expansions shelves

 Upgrade for other interface options such as re-timing (RTU) and time-of-day distribution (NTP, PTP)

 Ports for the addition of Expansion Shelves for increased number of outputs


2-4

Power A Output section

Product Overview

Power B

Input section GPS receiver

Tracking & Holdover section

Signal

Generation section

Output section

Figure 2-1 : 5548C SSU-E200 Front View

Note:

The equipment can look different depending on the installed cards.

Management card A


2-5

Output tiles

Product Overview

S helf is powered by redundant

DC power S ourc es with Hazardous

E nergy. Disc onnec t both P ower

S ources before replac ing the shelf





Power tile Management tile

Figure 2-2: 5548C SSU-E200 Rear View

Output tiles Input tile Power tile

Note:

The equipment can look different depending on the installed cards.


2-6

Product Overview

Figure 2-3 : 5548C SSU-E200 Simplified Block Diagram


2-7

The OSA 5548C is locally (RS-232) and remotely (TCP/IP) manageable.

Product Overview

Figure 2-4 : Logical View of SyncView PLUS

Figure 2-5 : Physical View of SyncView PLUS


2-8

Product Overview

2.2.1 Synchronous Network Technologies Requiring

Synchronization

The switching of 64 kbit/s circuits in digital telephony exchanges requires strict synchronism between the processed signals. Some limited amount of wander (usually at least 18 microseconds) can be absorbed by the buffer stores on the input ports.

Too much wander (relative to the equipment clock) will cause the buffer stores to over- or underflow, ending in loss or duplication of 125 microseconds worth of data

(one frame on an 2048 kbit/s signal or one octet on a 64 kbit/s signal). This is called a controlled slip. ITU-T Rec. G.822 specifies upper limits for slip rates.

In order to maintain the operation of the network within these slip-rate limits, the wander on 2048 kbit/s traffic signals must be kept below the so-called Network Limits, as specified in the new ITU-T Rec. G.823. This is achieved by two measures. First, all exchanges in a network are synchronized to a Primary Reference Clock (PRC).

Secondly, SSUs are deployed in exchange nodes in order to minimize the detrimental effects of loosing traceability to the PRC due to link or equipment failures. An SSU which looses all PRC-traceable reference input signals goes into holdover mode. An

SSU in holdover mode is capable of delivering a synchronization signal of near PRC quality for a few days.

2.2.1.2 SDH Network Elements

The quality of synchronization for SDH network elements has a direct influence on the wander introduced to 2048 kbit/s traffic signals (E1) that are transported over the

SDH network. VC-12 pointer adjustments create wander on the E1 signals. This wander becomes apparent when the E1 signals are demultiplexed or dropped from the SDH signal. In order to limit this effect, the maximum acceptable wander for SDH signals and for signals synchronising SDH network elements must not exceed socalled Network Limits as specified by ITU-T Recommendations G.825 and G.823. A set of network planning rules must be followed in order be within the Network Limits, in particular three rules about clock chains (G.803).

The first rule says that the synchronization signal should be regenerated by the insertion of SSUs in the chain of clocks. There should never be more that 20 SDH

Equipment clocks (SEC) between two SSUs or between the PRC and the first SSU.

In practice operators tend to insert one SSU every 10 to 15 SECs, in order to have some margin in case the network grows.

The second rule says that there should not be more than 60 SECs in the entire synchronization chain. The third and last rule says that there should not be more than

10 SSUs in the chain.


2-9

Product Overview

Despite its asynchronous switching technique, ATM switches need to properly time their physical layer signals. The synchronization quality required by ATM network elements depends on the specifications for their physical layer signals. The three most widely used physical layer signals in ATM are the so-called « SDH-based physical layer ATM signals » at the rates 51.84 Mbit/s, 155.52 Mbit/s, and 622.08

Mbit/s. Their timing characteristics are specified in ITU-T Recommendations I.432.2 and I.432.3. These specifications require data rate accuracies of 1E-11 under normal operating conditions and 20E-6 under failure conditions. This means that ATM network elements must take synchronization from a PRC complying with ITU-T Rec.

G.811. Moreover, jitter and wander of these ATM signals must comply with the

Network Limits of ITU-T Rec. G.825. In other words: ATM network elements with interfaces at 51.84 Mbit/s, 155.52 Mbit/s and 622.08 Mbit/s (« SDH-based ») require the same type of synchronization as SDH.

Figure 2-6 : Synchronization reference chain for SDH (ITU-T Rec. G.803)


2-10

Product Overview

The DWDM network technology standardized by the ITU-T, also known as "Optical

Transport Network (OTN)" is based on a plesiochronous physical layer using a number of different wavelengths as transport channels. The OTN is a flexible transport technology which allows many different types of client traffic signals to be transported wavelength channels. A critical case is the transportation of SDH client signals. SDH being based on synchronous STM-N signals, the OTN network must provide reasonable timing transparency for the transported client signal. Since perfect timing transparency is not achievable, the residual timing degradations (jitter & wander) introduced by the OTN network must be taken care of in the SDH layer. ITU-

T Rec. 8251 contains guidelines in the form of a "Synchronization Reference Chain".

According to this model, the SDH timing must be regenerated by an SSU each time the SDH client signal leaves the OTN layer. Furthermore, each OTN island or OTN hop must not contain more than 10 OTN network elements, and the number of SSUs introduced to fulfil the first rule is limited to a maximum of 10.

Figure 2-7 : Synchronization reference chain for SDH over OTN (ITU-T Rec. G.8251)


2-11

Product Overview

GSM and UMTS networks consist of a Radio Access Network and a Core Network.

The Core Network consists mainly of switches and routers dedicated to mobile traffic called Mobile Switching Centers (MSC) and Serving GPRS Service Nodes (SGSN) respectively. Base Stations are connected to the MSCs and SGSNs via another type of network element called Base Station Controller (BSC) in GSM and Radio Network

Controller (RNC) in UMTS. MSC, SGSN, BSC and RNS have exactly the same synchronization needs as ordinary digital telephony switches (see above). This means that their synchronization must be traceable to a PRC compliant with ITU-T

Rec. G.811. Sites containing any of these types of network elements are equipped with SSUs in order to provide holdover protection in case of failures causing the loss of PRC-traceability.

2.2.1.6 Next Generation Networks

In Next Generation Networks (NGN) traffic generated by all service types consist of IP packets or, less frequently, ATM cells. IP routers forward IP packets asynchronously.

Nevertheless, large IP routers usually feature, among other port types, synchronous

SDH and SONET ports. This means that packets are routed asynchronously and then transported over synchronous physical layer signals. Multi-Service Provisioning

Platforms or MSPPs interconnect both synchronous and asynchronous networks by providing both synchronous ports such as E1 and STM-n, as well as asynchronous ports such as Ethernet. In all cases where NGN network elements have synchronous ports, synchronization of the same quality as in SDH and SONET networks is required. SSUs are used in order to obtain this synchronization quality and in order to provide holdover protection. In NGN the need for the distribution of Time-of-Day

(TOD) information is also increasing. This required GPS-based TOD servers. SSUs with internal GPS receiver functions can be used for this purpose.


2-12

Product Overview

2.2.2 Synchronization Distribution Methods

The OSA 5548C SSU is normally used as a node clock: it is the central clock of a telecom building or site, it distributes synchronization to all synchronizationconsuming equipment in the building. The SSU therefore has a clock function and a signal distribution function (i.e. many output ports). The SSUs clock function needs to be locked to some PRC source such a s an atomic Cesium clock or a GPS-receiver.

This section explains how PRC-traceable synchronization reference signals are supplied to the input ports of the SSU.

GPS Satellite Segment

OSA 5548C SSU with GPS card OSA 5548C SSU with GPS card

System-

PRC

E1 E1

STM-n

Digital

Switch

SDH

Mux

SDH

Mux

Digital

Switch

Figure 2-8 : GPS

The simplest solution is to incorporate a GPS receiver card into the OSA 5548C SSU.

This is illustrated in Figure 2-8. The figure shows how the GPS satellite segment conveys time and synchronization information from the distant GPS System PRC to the GPS receiver card, where the information is decoded. The OSA 5548C SSU equipped with a GPS receiver card now acts as a virtual network PRC in the sense of

ITU-T Recommendation G.811. Often, however, telecommunication networks have their own physical PRC system, and synchronization reference signals must be transported from the PRC to all SSUs in the network. This is done via a sometimes complex synchronization distribution network. Figure 2-9 to Figure 2-11 illustrate the transport mechanisms that are used. Figure 2-9 shows the case of SDH and SONET.

Here the aggregate STM-n (or OC-n) signal acts as the synchronization carrier. In the

SSU site the SDH network element extracts the synchronization from the STM-s signal and redirects it to the SSU.


2-13

Product Overview

Figure 2-9 : Synchronization transfer in SDH & SONET

In PDH things are quite different, as can be seen in Figure 2-10. Since in PDH signal mapping and demapping are perfectly transparent for the timing of the tributary signals, E1 tributaries originating in a synchronous network element are used to transport synchronization to the other end. There a passive timing extractor redirects a small part of the signal power to the SSU.

E1

Digital

Switch

E1

PDH

Mux

E-n

PDH

Mux

Digital

Switch

PRC

Figure 2-10 : Synchronization transfer in PDH

OSA 5548C SSU


2-14

Product Overview

Figure 2-11 shows the case of SDH/SONET over WDM (DWDM or CWDM). WDM networks are more or less transparent for the timing of the STM-n or OC-n signals.

Therefore it is possible to use the STM-n (or OC-n) signals as synchronization carriers. The SSU’s inputs are connected to the SDH/SONET network element exactly like in the pure SDH/SONET case.

Digital

Switch

E1

SDH

Mux

STM-n

WDM

Mux e.g. OTM

WDM

Mux

STM-n

SDH

Mux

E1

Digital

Switch

PRC

Figure 2-11 : Synchronization transfer in WDM

OSA 5548C SSU


2-15

Product Overview

2.2.3.1 The 5548C as a Primary Reference Clock

The OSA 5548C SSU can be used as a Primary Reference Clock (PRC) in several ways. The first way is to equip the 5548C with one or two GPS cards, as shown in

Figure 2-12. The second GPS card is optional and serves to improve reliability. With this configuration the 5548C is a self-contained PRC which complies with ITU-T

Recommendation G.811 when locked to GPS.

GPS antenna signal

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

Output

Amplifiers

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Outputs

GPS antenna signal

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

Output

Amplifiers

Figure 2-12 : The 5548C with internal GPS cards

Figure 2-13 shows a second possibility. Here the PRC system consists of an external

PRC source, typically an atomic Cesium clock and an OSA 5548C SSU possibly with a GPS card. Other combinations are also possible, e.g. two external Cesium clocks and two internal GPS cards, or an external Cesium clock and an external GPS receivers, etc.

External

Cesium

Clock

Input Card

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

GPS antenna signal

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

Figure 2-13 : The 5548C with an external Cesium clock

Output

Amplifiers

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Outputs

Output

Amplifiers


2-16

Product Overview

2.2.3.2 The 5548C as a Synchronization Supply Unit

The OSA 5548 SSU configured as shown in Figure 2-14 functions as a true

Synchronization Supply Unit in the sense of and compliant with ITU-T

Recommendation G.812. The SSU terminates up to eight synchronization input signals and selects one of them as the active reference. The internal oscillator is normally phase-locked to the active reference. The Phase Locked Loop removes jitter and wander from the signal and fans out the cleaned up signal to up to 200 output ports. If all input signals are lost, the SSU enters holdover mode and maintains synchronization output signals which are of adequate quality for a limited period of time.

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

(SGC)

Output

Amplifiers

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Inputs

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Outputs

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

(SGC)

Output

Amplifiers

Figure 2-14 : The 5548C as Synchronization Supply Unit

2.2.3.3 The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Shelf

Figure 2-15 shows the OSA 5548C SSU configured as an Expansion Shelf. The

Tracking & Holdover function is missing since Expansion Shelves are used to increase the number of output ports of another 5548C used as an SSU or a PRC. Up to 4 Expansion Shelves can be connected to the main 5548C by redundant link cables as shown in Figure 2-16. The Expansion Shelves are managed through the main 5548C via a management bus contained in the link cables. The maximum distance between the main 5548C and the last Expansion Shelf is 30 m. This maximum distance remains applicable when only one Expansion Shelf is connected.

Input Card

Signal

Generator

(EGC)

2.048 MHz

Expansion

Links

Input Card

Signal

Generator

(EGC)

Figure 2-15 : The 5548C configured as an Expansion Shelf

Output

Amplifiers

Output

Amplifiers

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Outputs


2-17

Product Overview

Figure 2-16 : The 5548C as an SSU Expansion Shelf


2-18

Product Overview

2.2.3.4 The 5548C as a Time-of-Day Server

An OSA 5548C SSU equipped with internal GPS cards and with a Time-of-Day card can be used as a Time-of-Day (TOD) server (see Figure 2-17). Time-of-Day information comes in different formats, depending on the TOD card type. Popular

TOD protocols are NTP (RFC 1305) and PTP (IEEE 1588). TOD cards are future product options. Please consult factory for information about availability.

GPS antenna signal

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

Output

Amplifiers

2.048 MHz &

2048 Mbit/s

Outputs

GPS antenna signal

Internal

GPS

Receiver

Tracking &

Holdover

Signal

Generator

Figure 2-17 : The 5548C as a Time-of-Day (TOD) server

TOD

Server

TOD

Ports


2-19

Product Overview

The OSCILLOQUARTZ 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU) equipment is a timing/signal distributor. It resides in 19" subrack (or ETSI) with various connectors.

Depending on its configuration it can be composed as a single channel or as fully redundant unit. The equipment is locally (RS-232) and remotely (TCP/IP) manageable.

2.3.1 Input reference selection

The OSA 5548C SSU selects one of the input reference signals among up to 8 available input lines (IL), which can be assigned by software commands on any of the

16 input connectors (8x E1 and 8x Frequency).

Selection is based on:

 User defined priority table

 Input signal alarms detection

 Input signal performance measurements

 Synchronization Status Message (SSM)

The selected input reference signal may be affected by phase variations known as jitter. The OSA 5548C SSU can filter this jitter by tracking the internal oscillators on the selected input, and distributing 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) a 2.048 MHz signals with a reduced level of jitter.

When all input references are unavailable, the OSA 5548C SSU generates output signals based on the high quality internal oscillator.

The end-user can select the appropriate type of oscillator:

 Rubidium oscillator for enhanced SSU Type II holdover performance characteristic

 OSA 8663 quartz oscillator for SSU-A (Type I and V) holdover performance characteristics

The OSA 5548C SSU equipment distributes up to 200 synchronization signals. The

10 Output Card groups generate 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 2.048MHz.

Depending on the configuration, output signals are unprotected or protected. In the protected mode, each output signal is generated by two independent cards (one for one protection).


2-20

Product Overview

Up to 10 TCC-NTP cards can be installed in the OSA 5548C SSU. Each takes the place of an OUC group and makes the OSA 5548C SSU capable to supply up to 10

NTP ports according to RFC 1305. When locked to GPS, the OSA 5548C acts as a precise Stratum 1 server.

2.3.6 Re-timing

The Retiming Unit system synchronises a traffic signal based upon the synchronisation signal from the OSA 5548C SSU. Each channel in the RTU has a retiming buffer holding two traffic frames.

2.3.7 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM)

In addition to the timing, the E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages

(SSM), which is embedded information about the frequency quality level allowing any

SSM compatible network element (NE), to select the best frequency quality according to the sync source. The SSM status transfers synchronization quality from the active input or source, toward E1 outputs. The SSM byte is encoded on E1 signals.

The OSA 5548C SSU supports Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) on input and output interfaces E1 (2.048 Mbit/s) according to ITU-T G.781 second generation

SSM norms.

Here are the different SSM quality levels and states supported by the OSA 5548C

SSU.

Level description

G.811 Primary Reference Clock

G.812 Type I or V

G.812 Type IV

G.813 Equipment Clock Option I

Do Not Use for synchronization

SSM Failure

SSM quality unknown

Quality Level Abbreviation

5

-

-

1

2

3

4

PRC

SSU-A

SSU-B

SEC

DNU

FAILED

UNKNOWN

The OSA 5548C SSU extracts the SSM information for each E1 input signal. The operator can assign the SSM value for each individual input signal, if the input signal is not an E1 signal, or if it does not include the Synchronization Status Message. The

5548C can read SSM on all the Sa bits according to the user configuration

Then, based on the extracted Synchronization Status Message SSM Clock quality, or user defined level, the OSA 5548C SSU will automatically select the higher quality input reference signal.

In normal operation, the SSM output value corresponds to the reference input signal’s

SSM. In holdover mode, the SSM byte corresponds to the quality level of the internal oscillator.


2-21

Product Overview

2.3.8 Pass-through

In case of failure or extraction of internal oscillators (THC cards), the equipment will automatically activate its “pass-through” (Clock bypass) function when at least one input signal 2.048MHz, E1 or GPS is connected and qualified to the INC Group 1.

It is an autonomous option of 'last-resort' in SSU input selection upon critical internal failure to prevent prolonged outage.

The selected input signal is directly connected to the Signal Generator Cards (SGC) allowing all Output Cards to generate synchronization signals.

The output signal quality will be, in this “pass-through” operating mode, the same as the selected input signal (no filtering and jitter attenuation).

Note:

Upon switching to the pass-through mode, the output signal can be affected with a phase jump as the THC will not be there to filter and insure phase alignment.

Note:

For more details and configuration, refer to section 6.8.5


2-22

Product Overview

The OSA 5548C SSU monitors, measures and calculates performances in Ym

(fractional frequency), TDEV (Time DEViation) and MTIE (Maximum Time Interval

Error) of every single input signal connected to its inputs, as well as the GPS input line.

The measurement is performed in the INC cards, which compare the input signal against a reliable frequency reference produced by the signal filtered and processed by the active THC card.

The performance measurement is processed when the input line meets one of the following criteria:

 Enabled: the line is activated to select an input reference.

 Monitored: the input line is only measured in order to assess the signal.

The user can also define a performance threshold to disqualify and reject input signals that fail to meet this programmable threshold.


2-23

Product Overview

2.3.10 Redundancy

Each individual card can be protected, one for one, by inserting an adjacent protection card, except for the Management Card.

The insertion of protection card does not require any type of configuration. The newly inserted card will automatically get the configuration of the card already inserted in the same group.

The OSA 5548C SSU incorporates a FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client which allows upgrading every single card remotely.

When a card firmware is different than the whole shelf release, the system automatically informs the user. Then the user can easily upgrade the card in question in two clicks, via the management software.

Thus, the OSA 5548C SSU always insures that all cards firmware matches together and provide easy and comfortable release management.

The OSA 5548C SSU uses the TL1 (Transaction Language 1) protocol to communicate. TL1 was defined in the 80's by Bellcore (now Telcordia) and is the dominant management protocol for controlling telecommunications networks in North

America, China and other parts of the world.

The TL1 protocol consists of a set of ASCII messages or instructions that a terminal emulator, the SyncTerminal and the SyncView PLUS use to handle the OSA 5548C

SSU functions.


2-24

Product Overview

2.4.1 Introduction

The OSA 5548C SSU is divided in different systems:

 The input signals qualification. Part A, B, C and D.

 The signal reference selection, tracking, filtering and holdover capability. Part

E.

 The signal generation. Part F.

 The output signal amplification and distribution. Part G and H.

 The power distribution. Part I.

 The communication and alarm management. Part J.

A C E F G

OUtput

OUtput

Card

Card 1

(INC)

Tracking &

Holdover Card

(THC)

OUtput

OUtput

Card

Card 2

(INC)

Input

Selection

Tracking &

Holdover

Oscillator

Output

Phase

Alignement

Signal

Generator

Card

(SGC)

OUtput

OUtput

Card

GPS

Antennas

GPS

Card

D

B

48 VDC (A)

48 VDC (B)

J

Pass-through functionality

Power distribution to all modules


I

NTP/SNTP server

MAnagement Card (MAC)

PTP

External

Alarm

Inputs

Status

LEDs

Alarm

Contacts

COM

Ports

Ethernet

Port

H

= 1:1 protection possible

Up to 4 chained Slave or Expansion Shelves

Figure 2-18 : System Description Diagram

2.4.2

A: Input Lines (IL)


2-25

Product Overview

The IL are the link between input connectors, INput Cards (INC) and Tracking &

Holdover Cards (THC).

A total of 8 IL can be assigned by software command to the 8 available input connectors.

 2 groups of 4 BNC connectors for asymmetrical E1, input references. A

120/75 ohms converter (Balun) can be installed for the symmetrical option.

 2 groups of 4 BNC connectors for asymmetrical Frequency 2.048, 5 and 10

MHz input references. A 120/75 ohms converter (Balun) can be installed for the symmetrical option.

2.4.3

C: INput Cards (INC)

The 5548C SSU-E200 can be equipped with 2 groups of up to 2 INC cards. Each INC group can be protected when the second card is inserted in the adjacent slot.

The 2 INC groups allow introducing up to 8 input references in the OSA 5548C SSU.

Depending on user configuration, the input signals can be:

 2.048 Mbit/s (E1)

 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz or 10 MHz

The INC cards condition and qualify the input references (Input Lines). They are also able to make phase measurement between the input signal and Tracking & Holdover

Cards (THC) output signal to provide Maximum Time Interval Error (MTIE), Time

DEViation (TDEV) and Fractional Frequency Deviation (Ym).

2.4.4

B: GPS Inputs

There are 2 GPS inputs connectors to connect two GPS antennas to the 5548C.

These GPS inputs make the 5548C to get 2 redundant PRS quality references when

GPS cards are locked. The GPS inputs are considered by the system as a single IL such as described in section A: Input Lines

2.4.5

D: GPS cards (GPS)

1 or 2 redundant GPS cards can be installed to condition and qualify the GPS signal coming through the GPS Inputs.

2.4.6

D: GNSS cards (GPS/GLONASS)

1 or 2 redundant GNSS cards can be installed to condition and qualify the GNSS signal coming through the GNSS Inputs.


2-26

Product Overview

2.4.7

E: Tracking & Holdover Cards (THC)

The THC can be protected by inserting the protection card in the adjacent slot. In case that all OSA 5548C SSU input signals are missing or in failure, the THC will continue to generate a frequency based on the internal oscillator operating in holdover mode.

Two THC types are available:

 With internal Rubidium Oscillator for SSU Type 2 holdover capability

 With internal Oven Controlled Oscillator (OCXO) for SSU Type I & V holdover capability

These above THC types can be mixed together.

This card selects one of the input reference signals according to different configurable criteria to track the local high performance oscillator in order to filter and attenuate the phase-time jitter, such as:





The THC output signal is forwarded to the Signal Generator Card and consequently to the Output Card in order to distribute precise synchronization signals to all network elements connected to the OSA 5548C SSU unit.

When both THC are removed or in alarm condition, the 5548C enters in pass-through operation mode.

2.4.8

F: Signal Generator Cards (SGC)

SGC card processes the reference signal from the Tracking Holdover Card (THC) and delivers 2.048MHz, PPS and E1 signals to all of the output cards, expansion shelves and PPS outputs. The SGC should be protected by the introduction of a second card in the adjacent slot.

2.4.9

G: OUtput Section

The OSA 5548C can distribute different type of Time & Frequency Services from its

OUC slots, such as below:

 NTP

 PTP


2-27

Product Overview

2.4.9.1 OUtput Card (OUC)

The OSA 5548C can be configured with up to 10 OUC groups. Each one distributes twenty output signal references. Each card can be protected by the insertion of a redundant card, for a maximum of 200 output signals (Protected or Unprotected).

The output connector tile provides 20 output ports divided in 2 groups of 10 outputs, which can be configured in:

 2.048MHz according to ITU-T G.703.13

 E1 configuration nr.1 according to ITU-T G.703.9


The E1 configuration nr.1 and nr.2 are customizable by software and allow the user to:

 select the code type (HDB3 or AMI)

 configure the Time Slot 16 (TS16) structure (CCS, CAS)

 configure Sa bits

 configure the Idle

The OSA 5548C has also the capability to show a SHORTED alarm when it detects short circuit on any of an OUC’s Output Lines.

The user can insert one or two OUC cards in each of the OUC groups depending on protection requirements.


2-28

Product Overview

2.4.9.2 Time Code Card - NTP (TCC-NTP)

The TCC-NTP card is a NTP server (RFC1305) which provides a reliable and easy synchronization of Ethernet TCP/IP network.

A TCC-NTP card can be inserted in any of the OUC group, which makes therefore the OSA 5548C TSG able to provide up to 10 NTP ports.

Its own base time and its algorithm guarantee a high level accuracy when the GPS card is tracked.

High security level: 64 bits RSA

™ MD5 encryption, leap time protection, high stability time base.

The OSA 5548C SSU offers the following possibilities of TCC-NTP card management:

 from the 5548C management system while blocking access from individual

NTP port

The TCC-NTP has autonomy to provide a stable output time code even when external synchronization is lost by using the THC cards as clock reference.

2.4.9.3 Time Code Card - PTP (TCC-PTP)

The TCC-PTP card is a PTP server (IEEE-1588) which provides a reliable and easy synchronization of Ethernet and TCP/IP networks.

The TCC-PTP card is a PTP master. The card provides through the Ethernet connector (SFP) short time messages to slaves (typically 8 to 64 per second).

Packets may be Sync, Follow-up, Delay request and Delay response as specified by

IEEE-1588v2. Accurate measurement and timestamping of these messages allow slaves to recover the master clock with a nanosecond resolution.

TCC-PTP cards can be inserted in any OUC slot, which therefore allows the OSA

5548C SSU E200 to host up to 20 PTP ports.

When the 5548C GPS card is tracked, the PTP master can provide time information with +/-50ns. Furthermore, the 5548C holdover capabilities, assured by the THC module, make possible achieving a comparable level of accuracy when the GPS card switches into unlocked state.

In the 5548C, the TCC-PTP cards are managed indirectly through the MAC module.

.

Note:

The IEE 1588 v2 standard provides the synchronization through an

Ethernet network. For more information concerning the IEEE norms, please visit: http://standards.ieee.org/


2-29

Product Overview

2.4.10

H: Expansion Shelves*

Expansion Shelves are required when it is necessary to get more than 200 outputs.

An expansion can allow up to 200 additional outputs. Up to 4 expansion shelves can be connected to the main shelf with redundant links making the 5548C providing up to

1000 output ports.

2.4.11

I: Power Supply

The OSA 5548C is equipped with two DC power supply inputs. Each OSA 5548C

SSU card includes its own power supply converter connected to both power supply inputs. The power supply voltage range is: 40 Vdc to 60 Vdc.

2.4.12

J: MAnagament Cards (MAC)

The MAC gathers and reports all alarms and events from all cards, in addition to external alarm inputs. The MAC is the communication interface for local and remote management, allowing an operator to access information, via local serial ports (RS-

232) and/or the remote Ethernet (TCP/IP) interfaces.


2-30

Product Overview

2.5 System Components & Operation

2.5.1 Overview

The OSA 5548C Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU) has been developed on a modular basis (plug-in cards) allowing the operator to upgrade the configuration of the equipment without normal operation interruption. Each individual function can be equipped as single or dual card to introduce redundancy and protection.

As well as the cards, the connector tiles are field replaceable and do not require a power cycle of the equipment.

A group of cards is always composed with an “A” card, usually the left one and an optional “B” card, usually the right one. When no card is inserted in a slot, a blank panel is required and the slot must be deactivated by software management interface.

In the INC, GPS and THC groups one of the two cards is active and the second is in stand-by to protect the active one. In the SGC, OUC and POWER groups, both cards are active. MAC, NTP and PTP cards cannot be protected.

Power A Output section

Power B

A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37

Use the sam e type and style fuse


Input section GPS receiver

Tracking & Holdover section

Signal

Generator section

Figure 2-19 : 5548C SSU-E200 Front Panel Layout


Output section

Management card

2-31

A1

A2

Downward Card Range

INput Card

INput Card

A5 GPS

A6 GPS

A7 Tracking & Holdover Card

A8 Tracking & Holdover Card

A9 Signal Generator Card

A10 Signal Generator Card

A11

OUtput Card, TCC-NTP card,

TCC-PTP card

A13


TCC-PTP card

A15


TCC-PTP card

Type* Abbrev.

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

INC

INC

INC

INC

GPS

GPS

THC

THC

SGC

SGC

B OUC

B OUC

B

A

OUC

MAC

Product Overview

GPS

THC

SGC

Group

INC 1

INC 2

PTP 1

PTP 2

PTP 3

MAC


2-32

Upward card range

Type* Abbrev.

A21 Power A

A22


TCC-PTP card

A PWR A

B OUC

A24


TCC-PTP card

B OUC

A26


TCC-PTP card

B OUC

A28


TCC-PTP card

B OUC

A30


TCC-PTP card

B OUC

A32


TCC-PTP card

B OUC

A34


TCC-PTP card

A36 Empty

B OUC

A37 Power B B PWR B

*A: Master card & B: Slave card (protection card)


Product Overview

Group

PWR

PTP 4

PTP 5

PTP 6

PTP 7

PTP 8

PTP 9

10 ,PTP 10

PWR

2-33

Table 2-1 Card Locations

The overall physical layout is similar for all cards:

Product Overview

Figure 2-20 : Physical Card Description

 Front panel

This is the metallic panel where LEDs and some of the following components are on.

 Locking screws

These 2 screws are necessary to tighten the card into the shelf. It is important to tighten the card in order to avoid any instability.

 Bail handle

The bail handle permits removal of the card from its slot, by pushing down while extracting the card.

 Card abbreviation

This is the abbreviation name of the card. i.e. OUC for OUtput Card

 Fuse

This easily removable component protects the card against over-voltage and/or short circuit, it is usually located near the DIN connector at the rear of the card.


2-34

Product Overview

Warning

Do not remove the fuse without the agreement by an Oscilloquartz technical support person.

 DIN Connector

This grey connector permits the card to be connected to the rest of the shelf. It usually contains 96 pins, except for the MAC cards which have 160 pins.

 Serial number

The serial number of the card is written on the sticker stuck on the DIN connector. On the same sticker, there is the article number of the main board.

 Locating teeth

The card locating teeth prevent card insertion into an incorrect slot. The locating teeth are coded for specific slots.

Warning

Do not modify the code of locating teeth!


2-35

Product Overview

STATUS

A 0 x x x x

INC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

 GREEN Solid: Card system is working properly

 RED Solid: Card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.

 RED Flashing: Version error

 ORANGE Solid: Card’s firmware is being upgraded

 OFF: Card is not working at all

 GREEN Solid: The related input signal is qualified and provisioned correctly

 GREEN Flashing: The Input Line is currently in Wait-

To-Restore time

 ORANGE Solid: The line is being in MONITORING mode

 RED Solid: The input signal is rejected or disqualified by one of the signal validity criteria

 RED Flashing: The input is rejected due to a performance alarm

 OFF: Input Line unused, disabled or INC in stand-by

Figure 2-21 :

INput Card

(INC)

TaTable 2-2 INput Card (INC) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed INC LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1

 For ordering Information, refer to 0


2-36

Product Overview

The INC card is designed to provide the following functions:

 Input signal processing and provisioning

 Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the passthrough function is enabled

 Performance Measurement and reference disqualification when Performance

Thresholds are defined.

 Input signal and card 1:1 protection

 Up to 4 inputs processing (up to 4x E1 or 4x Frequency such as 2.048, 5 and

10 MHz)

 Wait-To-Restore (WTR) time function

 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) decoding and processing

 Remotely software (also called firmware) upgradeable

2.5.3.3 Operation

The user can insert in each INC Group:

 1 INC, which makes the shelf available for 4 input references without INC card protection.

 2 INCs, which makes the shelf available for 4 input references with INC card protection.

When two INC cards are installed in the same group, the active one is the card which shows status on any of its IN1…4 LEDs, the stand-by one, has its IN1…4 LEDs extinguished.

When at least 1 INC is inserted in each INC group, the 5548C is available for 8 Input references.

The 4 Input references of each INC group can be configured by software or via TL1 commands to any of the 8 related connectors on the Input tile.

The input connector types available for the INC group are:

 2 groups of 4 E1 BNC 75 ohms connectors (asymmetrical)

 2 groups of 4 Frequency BNC 75 ohms connectors (asymmetrical)

There is the possibility to install an adapter 120/75 (Balun) to get the symmetrical option.

It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the INC; MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the

5548C to select it and to avoid reporting alarms about it.

In cooperation with the THC group, the INC can also disqualify an input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance Threshold.


2-37

Product Overview

The INC card delivers up to 4 input signals to the THC group. When at least one input has been configured as E1 or 2.048MHz among the 4 input references. The INC group 1 provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Passthrough mode, when both THC cards are removed or being in warm-up or failure.

2.5.3.4 INC Block Diagram

Figure 2-22 : Input Card - Block Diagram


2-38

2.5.4 GPS Card (GPS)

Product Overview

STATUS

GPS

OCXO

A 0 x x x x

GPS

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Figure 2-23 :

GPS Card

(GPS)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

GPS

OCXO



GREEN Solid: Card system is working properly



RED Solid: Card system is currently not working properly or GPS card is in initialization phase.



RED Flashing: Version error



ORANGE Solid: Card’s firmware is being upgraded



OFF: Card is not working at all



GREEN Solid: GPS signal reception is OK, PPS input reference available



RED Solid: No or not enough GPS signal available.

PPS input reference not available.



RED Flashing: No connection to GPS Antenna. Either shorted or opened GPS antenna cable.

When both GPS and OCXO LEDs have this status, the input is rejected due to a performance alarm.



Yellow: The GPS input is OK but currently monitored



OFF: The GPS input is disabled or the GPS Card is in

Stand-by



RED Solid: Internal GPS’s OCXO failure or Initialisation phase



RED Flashing: GPS pre-tracking sequence.

When both GPS and OCXO LEDs have this status, the input is rejected due to a performance alarm.



OFF: When the GPS LED is GREEN solid, the GPS card delivers signal to the THC. Or the GPS card is in stand-by when the GPS LED.

Table 2-3 GPS Card (GPS) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed GPS LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1



2-39

Product Overview

The GPS card is designed to provide the following functions:

 GPS signal tracking and processing from up to 12 satellites

 Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the passthrough function is enabled.



 GPS card 1:1 protection

 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) quality according to the GPS operation status

 Manual position provisioning for location where condition of GPS reception are bad, such as “urban canyon”

 UTC-based and GPS-based time source



The user can insert in the shelf:

 1 GPS, which makes the shelf available for an input reference from one GPS antenna.

 2 GPS, which makes the shelf available for input reference from two GPS antennas.

When two GPS cards are installed, one is active and the other is in stand-by. The

GPS antenna connectors are 2x BNC 50 ohms located on the Input Tile.

It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the GPS card; MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the 5548C to select it and to avoid reporting alarms about it.

In cooperation with the THC group, the GPS can also disqualify its input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance Threshold.

The GPS group delivers one input signal to the THC group. It provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Passthrough mode, when both THC cards are removed or being in warm-up or failure.

As soon as the GPS card is powered, it starts researching and acquiring GPS satellites. This sequence should last 5 minutes. Then the GPS internal filtering system enters in pre-tracking phase for 200s. Thereafter, the GPS card is able to provide its signal to the rest of the shelf.


2-40

2.5.4.4 GPS Block Diagram

Antenna

GPS Engine

Microprocessor

+48V

Power

Supply

Figure 2-24 : GPS Card - Block Diagram

+3V3

+5V

Product Overview

OCXO

Internal Communication Bus

Phase Measurement system

8kHz GPS Reference

2.048MHz GPS Reference

PPS Reference

GPS Pass-through


2-41

Product Overview

Figure 2-25 :

GNSS Card (GLN)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status  GREEN Solid: Card system is working properly

 RED Solid: Card system is currently not working properly or GNSS card is in initialization phase.




GNSS  GREEN Solid: GNSS signal reception is OK,

PPS input reference available

 RED Solid: No or not enough GNSS signal available. PPS input reference not available.

 RED Flashing: No connection to GNSS Antenna.

Either shorted or opened GPS antenna cable.

When both GNSS and OCXO LEDs have this status, the input is rejected due to a performance alarm.

 Yellow: The GNSS input is OK but currently monitored

 OFF: The GNSS input is disabled or the GNSS

Card is in Stand-by

OCXO

 RED Solid: Internal GNSS’s OCXO failure or

Initialisation phase

 RED Flashing: GNSS pre-tracking sequence.

When both GNSS and OCXO LEDs have this status, the input is rejected due to a performance alarm.

 OFF: Card is in stand-by without XO alarm.

Table 2-4 GNSS Card LED Description

Note:

 For detailed GPS LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1

 For ordering Information, refer to Error! Reference source not

found.


2-42

Product Overview

The GPS card is designed to provide the following functions:

 GNSS signal tracking and processing from up to 24 satellites

 Input signal distribution to the THC cards or to the SGC cards when the passthrough function is enabled.



 GNSS card 1:1 protection

 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) quality according to the GNSS operation status

 Manual position provisioning for location where condition of GNSS reception are bad, such as “urban canyon”

 UTC-based and GNSS-based time source



The user can insert in the shelf:

 1 GNSS, which makes the shelf available for an input reference from one

GNSS antenna.

 2 GNSS, which makes the shelf available for input reference from two GNSS antennas.

When two GNSS cards are installed, one is active and the other is in stand-by. The

GNSS antenna connectors are 2x BNC 50 ohms located on the Input Tile.

It is possible to configure each input reference as ENABLE to make it available for selection by the 5548C when qualified by the GNSS card; MONITORED in order to measure its performances without allowing the 5548C to select it or DISABLE to disallow the 5548C to select it and to avoid reporting alarms about it.

In cooperation with the THC group, the GNSS can also disqualify its input reference if it crosses a user defined Performance Threshold.

The GNSS group delivers one input signal to the THC group. It provides also a clock to the SGC group in case of Pass through mode, when both THC cards are removed or being in warm-up or failure.

As soon as the GNSS card is powered, it starts researching and acquiring GNSS satellites. This sequence should last 8 minutes. Then the GNSS internal filtering system enters in pre-tracking phase for 200s. Thereafter, the GNSS card is able to provide its signal to the rest of the shelf.


2-43

2.5.5.1 GNSS Block Diagram

Antenna GNSS

Engine

Product Overview

OCXO

TOD/PPS IN

RJ 45 connector front panel

Microprocessor

+48V

Power

Supply

Figure 2-26 : GNSS Card - Block Diagram

+1V2

+2V5

+3V3

+5V

Internal Communication Bus

Phase Measurement system

8kHz GPS Reference

2.048MHz GPS Reference

PPS Reference

GNSS Pass-through

NTP // ToD/PPS OUT

RJ 45 connector front panel


2-44

2.5.6 Tracking Holdover Card (THC)

Product Overview

OSCILLOQUARTZ

STATUS

5548C

SSU

HOLDOVER

OSCILLATOR

SELECTED

INPUT

A 0 x x x x

THC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Figure 2-27 : Tracking

Holdover Card (THC)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

Holdover

Oscillator

 RED Solid: The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.

Note that at the start-up, this status remains until the THC is able to provide a proper clock signal, usually, once the warm-up sequence has ended.





 RED Solid: Holdover/Freerun

 RED Flashing: Fast Start-up

 RED Solid: Oscillator failure

 RED Flashing: Oscillator in Warm-up

Selected

Input

The displayed number is the input line (IL) currently selected by the system, 1 to 8 are IL from the INC group (i.e. 1= IL-1-1, 2 = IL-1-2, …). G is the GPS IL.

When the “dot” lit, it means that at least one Input

Line is qualified by the INC group.

The “dash” means that the THC is in holdover or in freerun mode.

Table 2-5 Tracking Holdover Card (THC) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed THC LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1



2-45

Product Overview

The THC card is designed to provide the following functions:

 Input selection based on: o

Input priority table o

SSM quality level o

manual

 Jitter and Wander filtering using embedded MADDS (Manual & Automatic

Direct Digital Synthesis) system in association with a quartz or rubidium oscillator

 Provides SSU Type 2 (with rubidium) or SSU-A Type I and V (with quartz oscillator) holdover capability

 Distributing signal to the SGC cards

 Squelching outputs in case of non valid signal

 1:1 card protection



The user can insert one or two THC cards in the THC group depending on protection requirements.

When two THC cards are installed, the active one is the card which shows the currently SELECTED INPUT status on its digital LED display.

When powered on from a cold start, the THC card requires time to warm up the internal oscillator. The delay varies with oscillator type and card temperature. Typical cold start warm up period is up to 30 minutes. When the THC is ready, and an input reference is qualified by the INC card(s), the THC enters a “fast start” mode, synchronizing the internal clock phase to that of the input signal as quickly as possible. Upon completion of the “fast start” mode, the THC enters the “normal” mode.

The same sequence applies to card replacement, where a stand-by THC in the adjacent slot becomes active, initiating a short holdover cycle, and the transitioning into “fast start” mode, quickly aligning the input signal phase to the stand-by THC oscillator, and about one minute later, completes the transition into “normal” mode.

The “warm-up” mode is indicated by a flashing red OSCILLATOR LED. The

“holdover” mode is indicated as a solid RED indication, “fast start” mode as the flashing GREEN indication and the normal mode as the solid GREEN indication of the holdover LED on the THC.


2-46

Product Overview

When all qualified input references are absent or unavailable, the THC provides a source for synchronization output signals, known as “holdover” mode. THC “freerun” mode occurs when THC is cold started, and has not been aligned to any qualified input signals yet. When in “freerun” mode, the holdover LED is also solid red.

It is also possible to configure the THC by software or via TL1 commands according to various input reference selection modes, such as:





The THC card integrates a system called MADDS (Manual & Automatic Direct-Digital

Synthesis). This system processes and filters the signal selected as reference. The

MADDS is a module, which has its own upgradeable software.

The THC pair of modules ensures phase alignment between both cards, in the instance that an active THC is removed.

2.5.6.4 THC Block Diagram

8kHz IN1 INC1A

8kHz IN2 INC1A

8kHz IN3 INC1A

8kHz IN4 INC1A

8kHz IN1 INC1B

8kHz IN2 INC1B

8kHz IN3 INC1B

8kHz IN4 INC1B

8kHz IN1 INC2A

8kHz IN2 INC2A

8kHz IN3 INC2A

8kHz IN4 INC2A

8kHz IN1 INC2B

8kHz IN2 INC2B

8kHz IN3 INC2B

8kHz IN4 INC2B

8kHz GPSA

8kHz GPSB

2048kHz

Input interface and

Input Selector

+ 48V

DC/DC

+ current limiter

+3.3V / 2W

+5V / 1W

+12V / 8W

+12V / 20W f

IN

8kHz

Oscillator

Manual &

Automatic Direct

Digital

Synthesis

(MADDS)

Figure 2-28 : Tracking Holdover Card - Block Diagram


LEDs

7 segments display f

OUT

2048kHz

Micro-Processor

2048kHz THC SGCA

2048kHz THC SGCB output amplifier

2048kHz THC INC

2048kHz REF OUT

OSA 5548C Internal Bus

2-47

2.5.7 Signal Generator Card (SGC)

Product Overview

STATUS

E1 f

A 0 x x x x

SGC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Figure 2-29 : Signal

Generator Card (SGC)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

E1 f



RED Solid: The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.















GREEN Solid: E1 generated properly



GREEN Flashing: Pass-through mode



RED Solid: E1 generation failure



RED Flashing: No clock signal received by the

SGC



GREEN Solid: Frequency and PPS generated properly



GREEN Flashing: Pass-through mode



RED Solid: Frequency and/or PPS generation failure



RED Flashing: No clock signal received by the

SGC

Table 2-6 Signal Generator Card (SGC) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed SGC LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1



2-48

Product Overview

The SGC card is designed to provide the following functions:

 Generation of 2x E1, 2.048MHz and 1 PPS signals

 Two E1 options with different code and frame (HDB3 or AMI, CRC-4 and CCS or CAS) are user configurable allowing 2 different E1 format selectable on output connectors

 Distribution of signals to the OUC cards

 Receiving signal from the INC cards in case of pass-through mode

 1:1 card protection



The user can insert one or two SGC cards in the SGC group depending on protection requirements.

When two SGC cards are installed, both are active.

The SGC card receives a signal from the THC group or from INC when the 5548C is in pass-through mode. When no signal is detected, it squelches its outputs to prevent any signal to the rest of the shelf.

The SGC generates all signals types for OUC, NTP, PTP cards, Expansion shelves and PPS outputs, such as:

 Two independent E1

 2.048MHz

 PPS


2-49

Product Overview

2.5.7.4 SGC Block Diagram

2048kHz THC A

2048kHz THC B

Pass Through

Input

Interface input reference selector

PPS GPS A

PPS GPS B

Input

Interface system

STATUS detection

2.048MHz

2048kHz

2048kHz

2048kHz

2048kHz

Framer 1

E1-1

Framer 2

E1-2

Framer 3

E1 Default

Framer 4

E1 Default

CODE 1

Micro-Processor

+ 48V

DC/DC

+ current limiter

+3,3V / 5W

+5V / 1W


Figure 2-30 : Signal Generator Card - Block Diagram

CODE 2

CODE EXT A

CODE EXT B

PPS

Output amplifier

PPS1

PPS2

FREQ

PPS

2.048 MHz 2.048MHz

Output amplifier

FREQ

OUC 1 ... 20

CODE 1

CODE 2

Output amplifier

CODE 1_1

OUC 1, 3, 5 ... 19

CODE 1_2

OUC 2, 4, 6 ... 20

CODE 2_1

OUC 1, 3, 5 ...19

CODE 2_2

OUC 2, 4, 6 ... 20

2.048 MHz

PPS

CODE EXT B

Output amplifier

2.048MHz

EXT B

PPS EXT B

CODE EXT B

To

Exp.

Link

B

2.048 MHz

PPS

CODE EXT A

Output amplifier

2.048MHz

EXT A

PPS EXT A

CODE EXT A

To

Exp.

Link

A


2-50

2.5.8 OUtput Card (OUC)

Product Overview

STATUS

OUT 1-10

E1 f

OUT 11-20

E1 f

A 0 x x x x

OUC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Figure

2-31 :

OUtput

Card

(OUC)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

OUT 1-10

E1

OUT 1-10 f

OUT 11-20

E1

OUT 11-20 f






 GREEN Solid: E1 distributed properly to Output ports 1 to 10

 RED Solid: No E1 distribution to Output ports 1 to 10

 RED Flashing: No clock signal received by the OUC

 OFF: The related outputs are not configured to supply E1 clock to Output ports 1 to 10 or the output tile is not installed if the f LED is also OFF

 GREEN Solid: 2.048 MHz distributed properly to Output ports 1 to 10

 RED Solid: No 2.048 MHz distribution to Output ports 1 to 10


 OFF: The related outputs are not configured to supply 2.048

MHz clock to Output ports 1 to 10 or the output tile is not installed if the E1 LED is also OFF

 GREEN Solid: E1 distributed properly to Output ports 11 to

20

 RED Solid: No E1 distribution to Output ports 11 to 20


 OFF: The related outputs are not configured to supply E1 clock to Output ports 11 to 20 or the output tile is not installed if the f LED is also OFF

 GREEN Solid: 2.048 MHz distributed properly to Output ports 11 to 20

 RED Solid: No 2.048 MHz distribution to Output ports 11 to

20


 OFF: The related outputs are not configured to supply 2.048

MHz clock to Output ports 11 to 20 or the output tile is not installed if the E1LED is also OFF

Table 2-7 OUput Card (OUC) LED Description


2-51

Product Overview

Note:

 For detailed OUC LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1


The OUC card is designed to provide the following functions:

 Selection of the output signal to be distributed according to the user configuration

 Distribution of 2.048 MHz frequency (ITU-T G.703-13) and/or E1 signal (ITU-T

G.703-9) to 20 output ports

 Card and output 1:1 protection

 Distribute the SSM generated by the SGC cards.

 Manual output squelching

 Output circuit short detection

 Remotely software upgradeable


The user can insert one or two OUC cards in each of the OUC groups depending on protection requirements.

When two OUC cards are installed, both are active.

The OUC card receives a signal from the SGC group. The signal types delivered on the 20 outputs is defined by the user configuration.

The user has a choice of 3 output configurations per group of 10 outputs:

 E1 with user configuration no.1

 E1 with user configuration no.2

 2.048 MHz frequency according to ITU-T G.703-13

The output ports can be configured to show alarm when outputs are shorted.


2-52

2.5.8.4 OUC Block Diagram

CODE 1 (SGC A)

CODE 2 (SGC A)

FREQ (SGC A)

CODE 1 (SGC B)

CODE 2 (SGC B)

FREQ (SGC B)

Input

Interface

SIGNAL

SELECT

SGC

SELECT

AGC

Product Overview

Squelch Ctrl

Squelch funtion OUT_1


Micro-

Processor

LED's

Squelch Ctrl

Squelch funtion

Squelch funtion

Squelch Ctrl

OUT_10

OUT_11

CODE 1 (SGC A)

CODE 2 (SGC A)

FREQ (SGC A)

CODE 1 (SGC B)

CODE 2 (SGC B)

FREQ (SGC B)

Input

Interface

SIGNAL

SELECT

SGC

SELECT

AGC

+ 48V

DC/DC

+ current limiter

+5V / 2W

±9V / 10W

+3,3V / 2W

Figure 2-32 : Output Card - Block Diagram

Squelch funtion

Squelch Ctrl

OUT_20


2-53

2.5.9 Time Code Card – NTP (TCC-NTP)

Product Overview

S TA TUS

A 0 x x x x

TCC-NTP

O S C I LLO Q U A R TZ

NTP S Y NC

E THE RNE T

LED DESCRIPTION

Status  RED Solid: The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.





NTP SYNC

ETHERNET

 RED Solid: The card system is currently in power up mode, wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure.

 RED Flashing: Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC

GPS received

 GREEN Solid: NTP worked properly

 GREEN flashing: TOD UTC GPS lose, NTP is waiting locked.

 ORANGE when the NTP module is being downloaded

 GREEN Solid: Ethernet cable connected

 OFF: Ethernet cable disconnected

Table 2-8 Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) LED Description

Figure 2-33 :

Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP)


2-54

Ethernet port access directly on TCC-NTP Card.

Product Overview

LED DESCRIPTION

S TATUS

Status  RED Solid: The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.





NTP S Y NC

E THE RNE T

NTP SYNC  RED Solid: The card system is currently in power up mode, wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure.

 RED Flashing: Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC

GPS received

 GREEN Solid: NTP worked properly

 GREEN flashing: TOD UTC GPS lose, NTP is waiting locked.

 ORANGE when the NTP module is being downloaded

A 0 x x x x

TCC-NTP

O S C I LLO Q U A R TZ

ETHERNET



Table 2-9 Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP) LED Description

Figure 2-34 :

Time Code Card-NTP (TCC-NTP)


2-55

Product Overview

2.5.9.2 Main Features (TCC-NTP)

 Stratum 1 NTP server

 Configuration by DHCP or Fixed IP

 64 MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

 Plug-and-play installation

 Can be inserted in any of the OUC slots

 Remotely software upgradeable


The NTP card receives a signal from the SGC group and from the GPS group. There are two modes:

 Needs a GPS card and PPS signal from SGC card to power up and to synchronize the UTC time

 Generates a minor alarm if the Time Of Day (TOD) disappears although the performance will be affected more than 1 year later.

 Generates a major alarm if the PPS from SGC card disappear.


2-56

Product Overview

2.5.9.4 TCC-NTP Block Diagram

Rear

Connector

P

L

L

Val_PPS

PPS

FPGA

8625

10MHz (T.P.)

LEDs driver

Pos. Id

R=0 Ohms b u s

I n t.

PPS

Out

PPS

In

Alarm

Reset

Fact.

def.

NTP

RS-232 Download

CAN H

CAN L

CAN

Driver uC

Tx

Rx

5V

<->

3V3

Front panel

Status

NTP

Synchr.

RJ45

Ethernet - NTP

Ethernet

LED driver

Mode

Select

Front panel or tile set access

+20 -> +60V

+3V3

+5V

+12V

Vref

Extracted

Figure 2-35 : NTP Card - Block Diagram


2-57

Product Overview

2.5.10 Time Code Card – PTP (TCC-PTP)

2.5.10.1 Physical Layout

Figure 2-36 :

Time Code

Card-PTP (TCC-

PTP)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

PTP

ETHERNET

SFP






 RED Solid: The card system is currently in power up mode, wait PPS/TOD UTC GPS or server failure.

 RED Flashing: Waiting synchronization, PPS/TOD

UTC GPS received

 GREEN Solid: PTP working properly

 GREEN flashing: PTP alarm which doesn't affect the operational state. PTP port is always active.

 ORANGE when the PTP module is being downloaded



 Ethernet link

Table 2-10 Time Code Card-PTP (TCC-PTP) LED Description


2-58

Product Overview

2.5.10.2 Main Features (TCC-PTP)

 Server accuracy, PPS reference +/- 50ns

 Global accuracy on data network is depending on traffic and topology.

 Number of PTP slaves supported:

128 slaves @ 16 Sync/s

80 slaves @ 32 Sync/s

 6x TCC-PTP cards available for 5548C E60 SSU

 20x TCC-PTP cards available for 5548C E200 SSU

 PTP load sharing between different groups of TCC-PTP cards

 One or two-step clock

 UNICAST and/or MULTICAST addressing mode

 Ethernet/UDP transmission protocol

 Configuration of the PTP domain

 Configuration by DHCP or Fixed IP

 Can be inserted in any of the OUC slots

 Software is remotely upgradeable


The PTP card receives its timing reference from the SGC and GPS groups.

Both types of cards must be present in the shelf for the TCC-PTP to run properly.

If no GPS card is present if it has never been tracked, the TOD Not detected alarm is raised.

If the timing reference provided by the GPS card is lost but the TCC-PTP was previously locked to it, the Loss of TOD alarm is raised.

If all the SGC boards fail or are extracted, the PPS Loss alarm is raised.


2-59

Product Overview

2.5.10.4 PTP Load sharing with the TCC-PTP

In a UNICAST based network, the slaves in a given domain may loose the connection to their master because of a failure in the network or in the master itself. If they are configured to use the UNICAST message negotiation, that is, if they have a list of master in their Acceptable Master Table, they will try to switch to a redundant master in the same domain if available.

The new elected Grandmaster will then receive UNICAST message negotiation from many slaves and could possibly not being able to deal with all of them. It is then good practice to share this additional set of slave across a given number of masters and to leave processing resources in case of a fault.

The following diagram describes the load sharing mechanism.

Figure 2-37 : LOAD SHARING (TCC-PTP)


2-60

Product Overview

2.5.11 MAnagement Card (MAC)


STATUS

MST

RMT

EXP

USC

CR

MJ

MIN

1 2

ACO

ACO

A 0 x x x x

MAC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Alarm Cut-Off pushbutton

Figure 2-38 :

MAnagement Card

(MAC)

LED DESCRIPTION

Status

MST

RMT

EXP

USC

CR

MJ

MIN

ACO



RED Solid: The card system is currently not working properly or may be in failure.















GREEN Solid: Indicates that this is a MASTER shelf



This LED is unused in the OSA 5548C SSU version



GREEN Solid: Indicates that this is a

EXPANSION shelf



YELLOW Solid: Indicates that at least one user is logged.



RED Solid: Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a CRITICAL severity



ORANGE Solid: Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a MAJOR severity



YELLOW Solid: Indicates that there is at least one alarm with a MINOR severity



RED Solid: Indicates that at least one alarm has been cut-off

Table 2-11 MAnagement Card (MAC) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed MAC LED status description, refer to section 8.2.1



2-61

Product Overview

2.5.11.2 Main features

The MAC card is designed to monitor and manage the OSA 5548C SSU, its main features are:

 Gathering the status of all cards

 Management of external output and input alarm

 Management of front panel cards LEDs information.

 Internal card management and communication

 Expansion shelves management and communication

 Ethernet and serial communication management

 Ethernet speed setting 10M or 100M

 Events and alarms storage and timing

 Retaining every card’s firmware in its memory

 FTP client for firmware upgrade



2-62

2.5.11.3 MAC Block Diagram

Product Overview

External alarms

Master/

Remote/

Expansion/ address

AL input 1

AL input 2

AL input 3

AL input 4

AL input 5

AL input 6

AL input 7

AL input 8

AL input 9

AL input 10

AL Input Power 1

AL Input Power 2

Lamp Test

ADDR0

ADDR1

ADDR2

ADDR3

Programmable Logic

Devices

13x

LED

Cuttoff switch

Buzzer

Micro-processor

Alarm

High driver

MINOR 1

MAJOR 1

CRITICAL 1

MINOR 2

MAJOR 2

CRITICAL 2

DRAM

8Mb

FLASH

16Mb

NAND

NVRAM

32kb

+RTC

EXT. BUS controller

External Bus


LOCAL MGMT

(RS232 front)

LOCAL MGMT

(RS232 rear)

REMOTE MGMT

(Ethernet)

+ 48V

DC/DC

+ current limiter

+3,3V / 7W

Figure 2-39 : MAnagement Card - Block Diagram


2-63

2.5.12 POWER A & POWER B Cards


Power supply fuses are located on the front panel for easy access.

Product Overview

S TA TUS

S TATUS

FUS E A

T 6,3A L 250V

FUS E B

T 6,3A L 250V

Main FUSES of the shelf

Use the same type and style fuse

LAMP TEST push button

LOCAL management RS-232

LA MP

TE S T

LAMP TEST push button

A 0 x x x x

POWE R A

O S C I LLO Q U A R TZ

POWER A Card

Figure 2-40 : Power Cards (PWR)

POWER B Card

LOCAL

COMM .

A 0 x x x x

PO WER B


LED DESCRIPTION

Status

 RED Solid: The POWER Card is not fed with POWER

 GREEN Solid: POWER supplied correctly

Table 2-12 Power Card (PWR) LED Description

Note:

 For detailed POWER card LED status description, refer to section

8.2.1

 Specifications of the fuses are described in Appendix A.


2-64

Product Overview

2.5.12.2 LOCAL COMM. Port

This is a RS-232 serial port SUB-D 9p for local management purpose. A second one is located on the MANAGEMENT Connectors Tile above the card range (see section

2.5.16.3). Both connectors can be used simultaneously.

6

7

8

9

PIN DESCRIPTION

1 NC

2

3

4

5

RX

TX

NC

GND

NC

NC

NC

NC

Note:

 In TL1 commands, this port is named “RS-FRONT”

Table 2-13 RS-232 - Local COMM Port Connector Description

2.5.12.3 Main features

The POWER cards are designed to provide the following functions:

 Distribute the power into all cards

 Present main fuses on front panel

 POWER A card has a switch for LED test

 POWER B has serial RS-232C connector for local management

 POWER B card stores the network parameters


2-65

2.5.13 Connectors Panel Layout

A121 A122 A123 A124 A125

Product Overview

A126 A127









A101 A102 A103 A104

Figure 2-41: 5548C SSU-E200 Rear View

A105 A106 A107


2-66

Product Overview

Downward Tiles Range

Cards or Slots

Description related to

A101 Power B tile POWER B card

Redundant Power source connection and grounding

A102 Management tile MAC, SGC groups Ethernet LAN, Local RS-232, Expansion shelves link, alarms IN and OUT and PPS output connections

A103 Output tile Provides 20 output synchronization ports.

A104 Output tile

OUC 3

(A15 & A16)

OUC 2

(A13 & A14)

A105 Output tile

A106 Input tile

A107 Power A tile

OUC 1

(A11 & A12)

INC Groups

(A1 to A4)

POWER A card

Input ports are split in two groups of 4 for the

Frequency and 4 for the E1 references from which the user can cable and use 8 lines. A second group of two BNC connectors are available for

GPS antenna connection.

First Power source connection and grounding

Upward Tiles Range

Cards or

Slots related

Description

A121 Output tile

A122 Output tile

OUC 10

(A34 & A35)

OUC 9

(A32 & A33)

OUC 8

(A30 & A31)

Provides 20 output synchronization ports.

OUC 7

(A28 & A29)

A127 Output tile

OUC 6

(A26 & A27)

OUC 5

(A24 & A25)

OUC 4

(A22 & A23)

Table 2-14 Connector Tile Locations


2-67

Product Overview

2.5.14 Connector Tile Description

The connector tiles have almost the same architecture, such as shown in the figure below:

LOCKING SCREWS

Figure 2-42 : Connector Tile Description

LOCKING SCREWS

4 screws are used to fix the tile onto the shelf.


2-68

Product Overview

Power supply connectors, for POWER A & B cards are located on two separate

POWER connectors tiles, A107 for POWER A and A101 for POWER B. Each one includes two grounding studs.

+VDC / RETURN -VDC / -BATT

POWER GROUND (GND)

2 grounding studs (GND)

Figure 2-43 : Power Connector Tile

Note:

 For detailed Connection instructions, refer to section 4.4


2-69

Product Overview

The Management tile provides ports for Local and Remote management, to link expansion shelves, to connect Internal and External alarms and to supply 1 PPS. It is located in position A106, on the rear of the shelf.

Link to Expansion shelves

Ethernet LAN management port

Oscilloquartz restricted access for test purpose

MASTER or EXPANSION address Rotary Switch

Output Alarm Group 1

Output Alarm Group 2

Local RS-232

Management port

PPS Outputs

(UTC synchronised when GPS locked)

Figure 2-44 : Management Connectors Tile

Note:

 For detailed Connection instructions concerning: o

PPS outputs, refer to section 4.5.2.6 o

IN/OUT Alarms connectors, refer to section 4.6 o

Communication ports, refer to section 4.7


2-70

1

Product Overview

2.5.16.1 EXPANSION LINK Connectors

Expansion Link SUB-D 25p female connectors are necessary to cable expansion shelves. The EXPANSION LINK B connector is a redundant protection of the

EXPANSION LINK A.

25

5

6

7

8

PIN DESCRIPTION

1 FREQ. SGC A

2

3

4

FREQ. SGC B

E1+ SGC A

E1+ SGC B

PPS SGC A

PPS SGC B

EXP LINK 1

EXP LINK 2

PIN DESCRIPTION

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

GND SGC A

GND SGC B

E1- SGC A

E1- SGC B

GND

GND

GND

GND

9

10

EXP LINK 3

EXP LINK 4

11 NC

12 NC

13 EXTCANH

22

23 GND

24 NC

25 EXTCANL

GND

Table 2-15 Expansion Link Connector Description

2.5.16.2 LAN COMM. Port

This socket is a RJ-45 female type to connect Ethernet LAN for remote management.

8

1

PIN DESCRIPTION

1 TX+

2 TX-

3 RX+

4 NC

5 NC

6 RX-

8 NC


2-71

Product Overview

2.5.16.3 LOCAL COMM. Port

This is a RS-232 serial port SUB-D 9p male for local management purpose. A second one is located on the POWER A card on the front of the shelf.

PIN DESCRIPTION

1 NC

2 RX

3 TX

4 NC

5 GND

6 NC

7 NC

8 NC

9 NC

Table 2-17 RS-232 - Local COMM Port Connector

Description

Note:

In TL1 commands, this port is named “RS-REAR”

2.5.16.4 EXT. ALARM INPUTS Connector

This SUB-D 25 pins male connector provides 10 input alarms capability to connect input alarms from a third party device to be stored and reported by the 5548C.

25

14

DESCRIPTION

Alarm 1

Alarm 2

Alarm 3

Alarm 4

Alarm 5

Alarm 6

Alarm 7

Alarm 8

Alarm 9

Alarm 10

GROUND

(GND)

Not Connected

21

18

17

16

15

14

PIN Severity

25

24

CRITICAL

CRITICAL

23

22

CRITICAL

MAJOR

MAJOR

MAJOR

MINOR

MINOR

MINOR

Non

Alarmed

- 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9, 10,

11, 12, 13

19, 20 -

Table 2-18 Ext. Alarm Inputs Connector Description

ALARM OUT Connectors


2-72

Product Overview

These 2 SUB-D 9 pins female connectors report alarms of the 5548C through

Normally Opened (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) relay in order to forward current alarm severity to a third party device.

1

1

9

9

Figure 2-45 : Alarm Out Connectors

ALARM OUT GROUP 1

SEVERITY NO C NC

CRITICAL 1 6 2

MAJOR 7 3 8



CRITICAL 1 6 2

MAJOR 7 3 8


2-73

Product Overview

2.5.16.5 Master and Expansion Address Rotary Switch

As the 5548C has the same hardware for MASTER, or EXPANSION shelf functions, this Rotary Switch controls configuration of the shelf as MASTER or EXPANSION shelf address using a flathead screwdriver.

Caution:

The configuration of the shelf with the rotary switch must be done before powering the shelf during the installation and commissioning procedure.

The configuration does not change when the shelf is powered.

EXPANSION

SHELF #4

EXPANSION

SHELF #3

EXPANSION

SHELF #2

EXPANSION

SHELF #1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

D

E

1

F

0

MASTER SHELF

Figure 2-46 : Master & Expansion Rotary Switch

POS. SELECTION DESCRIPTION

0

1

MASTER

Not used

In this position the 5548C is configured as a MASTER shelf

This position is not utilized in the 5548C SSU

2

3

4

EXPANSION #1 In this position, the shelf is configured as an EXPANSION shelf with address number 1



5 EXPANSION #4 In this position, the shelf is configured as an EXPANSION shelf with address number 4

6…F Not Used These selections are reserved for eventual future developments

Table 2-19 Master & Expansion Selection

Note:

The Expansion shelves do not contain INC, GPS, THC and SGC cards.

Instead, in the SGC slot position, it is required to insert EGC cards


2-74

Product Overview

2 groups of 8 BNC connectors are available for 2.048, 5 or 10 MHz and E1 are available for input references. Each group is divided in two with 4 BNC connectors on the left for Frequency (2.048, 5 or 10 MHz) and 4 on the right for E1. Among these 16

BNC connectors 8 (4 per INC group) can be used to feed the 5548C with signal. This tile is located in position A106 on the rear of the shelf.

E1 FREQUENCY

Input Group 1 Input Group 2

INC 1 A – INC 1 B INC 2 A – INC 2 B

Input type to Input type to connector:

E1

connector:

1 E1 1

E1 2 E1

3 E1

2

3

4 E1 4

b

FREQ 1 FREQ 1

FREQ 2 FREQ 2

FREQ 3 FREQ 3

FREQ 4 FREQ 4

GPS A

Antenna GPS 1

GPS B

Antenna GPS 2

i

F gure 2-47 : Input Tile

Note:

 For detailed Input Connection instructions, refer to section

4.5.1 and for GPS antenna, refer to section 4.5.1.4


2-75

Product Overview

2.5.18 Input, Management & Power Remote Panel

The OSA 5548C SSU-E200 can be optionally delivered with an Input, Management &

Power Remote Panel when front connectors are required. The remote panel is connected to the rear Power, Input and Management tiles.

533 mm (ETSI) or 483 mm (19’’)

Power A

GPS

Antenna

Input references

449 mm

Management

Power B

Note:

The connectors on this panel are the same as on the Power, Input and

Management tiles. Refer to previous sections for Pin-Out description.


2-76

Product Overview

The OSA 5548C SSU unit can be delivered with different types of output tile sets.

 Output tile with 20x Symmetrical outputs

 Output tile with 20x Asymmetrical outputs

 Output tile with 20x Asymmetrical outputs for Remote panel

Each Output Tile has 2 Output Groups (OG) of 10 Outputs Lines (OL). OG 1 supplies

OL 1 to 10 and OG 2 supplies OL 11 to 20.

20x ASYMMETRICAL 20x SYMMETRICAL 20x IDC connectors

1

OUTPUTS ASYM.

6 11 16

OUTPUTS SYM.

1..10

OUT 1..10 SYM.

2 7 12 17

3 8 13 18

Output Group 1

Output Group 1

4 9

14 19

11..20

5 10 15 20

Output Group 2

Output

Group 1

Output

Group 2

Figure 2-48 : 100. Outputs Ports Remote Panel

OUT 11..20 ASYM.

Output Group 2


2-77

2.5.19.1 Output Tile with 20x CEI 1.0/2.3 connectors

20x ASYMMETRICAL with CEI 1.0/2.3 75ohms

1

OUTPUTS ASYM.

6

11 16

2 7

12 17

3 8 13 18

4

9 14 19

5

10

15

20

Output

Group 1

Output

Group 2

Figure 2-49 : ASYM Output Connectors Tiles

Product Overview


2-78

Product Overview

2.5.19.2 Output Tile with 20x SUB-D 25 pins

20x SYMMETRICAL with SUB-D 25 pins female 120 ohms

1

Output Group 1

OUT 11..20 DS1

1

OL 1…10

OL Tip Ring Shield

1 25 12 13

2 24 11 13

3 23 10 20

4 22 9 20

5 21 8 7

6 19 6 7

7 18 5 14

8 17 4 14

9 16 3 1

10 15 2 1

OL 11…20


11 25 12 13

12 24 11 13

13 23 10 20

14 22 9 20

15 21 8 7

16 19 6 7

17 18 5 14

18 17 4 14

19 16 3 1

20 15 2 1

Output Group 2

Figure 2-50 : SUB-D Output Connectors Tiles


2-79

2.5.19.3 20x Output Tile with IDC 20 pins

20x ASYM. with IDC connector for Remote BNC panel

OL 1…10

OL Tip Ring

1

Output Group 1

1 1 2

2 3 4

3 5 6

4 7 8

5 9 10

6 11 12

7 13 14

8 15 16

9 17 18

10 19 20

1

Output Group 2

Figure 2-51 : IDC Output Connectors Tiles

Product Overview

OL 11…20

OL Tip Ring

1 1 2

2 3 4

3 5 6

4 7 8

5 9 10

6 11 12

7 13 14

8 15 16

9 17 18

10 19 20


2-80

2.5.20 Time Code Card - NTP Tile

1x NTP with RJ45 connector

Product Overview

Figure 2-52 : TCC-NTP Output Tile

2.5.20.1 TCC-NTP Ethernet Port

This socket is a RJ-45 female type to connect Ethernet for remote management.

1

8

PIN DESCRIPTION

1 TX+

2 TX-

3 RX+

4 NC

5 NC

6 RX-

7 NC

8 NC

Table 2-20 TCC-NTP Ethernet COMM Port Connector

Description


2-81

Product Overview

2.5.21 100x BNC Outputs Ports Remote Panel

The BNC Remote Panel provides up to 100x BNC 75ohms Output Ports (ASYMM.). It can be installed anywhere in the same rack where the OSA 5548C SSU is mounted.

For each 10 outputs of an Output Group (OG), a ribbon cable connected from an

Output Tile for Remote panel (refer to Figure 2-49) to the corresponding Remote

Panel output tile’s connector is required.

Output Tile 1 Output Tile 2 Output Tile 3 Output Tile 4 Output Tile 5

OG 1 OG 2

Output Conn. OG1

Output Conn. OG2

533mm (ETSI) or 483mm (19’’)

Figure 2-53 : Remote BNC panel - Front View

449mm

Figure 2-54 : Remote BNC panel - Top View


2-82

Product Overview

2.6 Communication

The OSA 5548C SSU includes Remote and Local Management capability.

On the OSA 5548C SSU, two serial ports allow the operator to access the system via RS-

232. Both connectors (type: Sub-D 9p male, labeled: LOCAL comm.) are located on the front of the Power B card and on the Management Tile. There is also one RJ-45 port for management via Ethernet. The local interfaces operate on TL1 commands.

A CD-ROM containing the SyncView PLUS management software is delivered with all

OSA 5548C SSU. By default, the SyncView PLUS runs in Element Manager version, which allows the user to easily configure and manage an OSA 5548C SSU via serial connection (RS-232 – Null Modem) or via a peer-to-peer TCP/IP connection.

A license can be ordered to enhance the SyncView PLUS Element Manager as an

Element Manager PRO

version, which introduces Performance Measurements graphical user interface and storage capability for of up to 2000 alarms and events.

The SyncView PLUS software can also becoming a Network Manager version, which operates as a Central Network Managing System. Through the same software interface, it allows managing all OSA 5548C SSU equipments in a network, as well as others Oscilloquartz and third party equipments from any location via an Ethernet

TCP/IP network. For full security and redundancy, Oscilloquartz offers also the

SyncView PLUS Network Manager Advanced

version in a reliable 19’’ rack mountable server, which enhances secure configurations, such as mirroring, RAID-5 disks and advanced SQL database. Other features can be requested to match your security needs.

Figure 2-55 and Figure 2-56 are examples of the Graphical User Interfaces, which can be seen locally and/or remotely through the SyncView PLUS Management

Software. Figure 2-57 is the Network Browser view of the SyncView PLUS Network

Manager

version.


2-83

Product Overview

Figure 2-55 : SyncView PLUS - Logical View (example)


2-84

Product Overview

Figure 2-56 : SyncView PLUS - Physical View (example)

Figure 2-57 : SyncView PLUS Network Manager version – Synchronization Network

General View (example)


2-85

Product Overview

2.6.2 SyncTerminal

The SyncTerminal is a terminal Interface enhanced with a TL1 tutor, which assists the user with the syntax of any TL1 command for the OSA 5548C SSU. The

SyncTerminal can remotely access the shelf via TCP/IP on LAN COMM. port or locally via serial RS-232C on LOCAL COMM. port.

Key features:

 Sending TL1 commands via local serial RS-232 connector as well as remote

Ethernet connection.

 SyncTerminal assists with the TL1 commands, and auto-completes the commands as the user types them

 All 5548C TL1 commands are provided in a tree-like menu or sorted by alphabetical order.

 Quickly repeats past commands very efficiently without retyping them.

 Sends user-preprogrammed TL1 commands scripts.

 Test an Ethernet connection with an embedded “PING” function.

 Ergonomical and customizable window interface.

 Command and response logging

 Interfaces to many Oscilloquartz products with MML or TL1

Figure 2-58 : SyncTerminal (example)


2-86

Product Overview

2.7 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM)

E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages (SSM), which is embedded information about the frequency quality level allowing any SSM compatible network element (NE), to select the best frequency quality according to the sync source.

The SSM status transfers synchronization quality from the active input or source, toward

E1 outputs. The SSM byte is encoded on E1 signals.

The OSA 5548C SSU supports Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) on input and output interfaces E1 (2.048 Mbit/s) according to ITU-T G.781 second generation SSM norms.

Here are the different SSM quality levels supported by the OSA 5548C SSU.

Level description

G.811 Primary Reference Clock

G.812 Type I or V

G.812 Type IV

G.813 Equipment Clock Option I

Do Not Use for synchronization

SSM Failure

SSM Quality unknown

Quality Level Abbreviation

1

2

3

4

5

-

-

PRC

SSU-A

SSU-B

SEC

DNU

FAILED

UNKNOWN

Table 2-21 SSM Levels

The OSA 5548C SSU extracts the SSM information from each E1 input signal.

The operator can assign the SSM value for each individual input signal, if the input signal is not an E1 signal, or if it does not include the Synchronization Status

Message.

The 5548C can read SSM on all the Sa bits according to the user configuration

Based on the extracted Synchronization Status Message SSM Clock quality, or user defined level, the OSA 5548C SSU will automatically select the higher quality input reference signal.

In case two input signals include the same SSM Quality Level, the priority table levels are used to override selection of two similar SSM quality reference signals.

Should all input signals include SSM byte corresponding to a lower value than the internal oscillator, the OSA 5548C SSU will enter in holdover operation mode.


2-87

Product Overview

If activated, the OSA 5548C SSU generates E1 output signals including

Synchronization Status Message.

In normal operation, the SSM output value corresponds to the reference input signal’s

SSM.

In holdover mode, the SSM byte corresponds to the quality level of the internal oscillator.

2.8 Alarms

Thanks to its LEDs, the OSA 5548C SSU indicates current alarms and status. Detailed alarms and events are reported to local or remote software such as SyncTerminal or

SyncView PLUS.

The MAC card is the one that gathers stores and distributes alarms and events information and messages.

The shelf can accept alarms from external equipment, such as door or cooling system alarm contacts connected to the input alarm connector. The SSU provides alarm outputs to any other device.

A description of all physical alarms for each card is located in section 8.2.1 and an alarm and event list can be found in Error! Reference source not found..

The alarms are categorized in 3 levels, Critical, Major or Minor. Other events are also shown as Non-Alarmed condition.

The OSA 5548C SSU has also the capability to escalate the severity of an active alarm after a configurable delay (24 hours by default).


2-88

Chapter

3. Pre-Installation Considerations

Including:

 Overview

 Site Survey

 ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) Prevention

 Rack Preparation

 GPS Antenna Mounting

 Remote Communication

 Required Tools & Material

Pre-Installation Considerations


3-1




3-2


3.1 Overview

This chapter provides guidelines and requirements needed before ordering and installing the OSA 5548C SSU. It is divided into the following sections:

 Site survey section provides instructions before installing the OSA 5548C SSU.

 Rack preparation section, presents the size of the shelf, remote panels and power cable requirements.

 GPS Antenna Mounting (referral to separate installation guide), describes how to mount and cable the GPS antennas in order to prepare the connection to the OSA

5548C

 Remote communication section, describes the information required to configure the OSA 5548C SSU, to be remotely manageable.

 Required Tools and Material consists of a list presenting the basic tools and instruments necessary to install and configure the OSA 5548C SSU.

Note:

Installation & cabling instructions are presented in chapter 4.

Plan the following prior installing the OSA 5548C:

 A location as far as possible from any sources of electrical noise.

 Power supply with dual -48 VDC with breakers

 Battery Distribution Fuse Bay (BDFB) maximum rating: 10A

 For environmental specifications please refer to the chapter 9.


3-3


3.3 ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) Prevention

Electromagnetic interferences (EMI) from any equipment can affect the normal operation of other equipments. To prevent such interferences with other equipments, the OSA

5548C must be installed as per described below.

All cables connected to the OSA 5548C should be shielded cables with “drain” wires connected to the rack ground.

Follow your company procedures for shield grounding. The screws on all cable connectors must be correctly fastened to their corresponding connectors.

During 5548C operation, there must be a card or blank panel installed in every slot and tile position. The locking screws on every card and tile should be correctly tightened.

On GPS antenna BNC connector where no GPS antenna cable is connected to, a BNC caps must be mounted on.

CAUTION

Use only shielded cabling on all telecom signals wiring, including input, output, management and Ethernet connections.

Ensure that connections are properly grounded.

Consider the following size to install the OSA 5548C SSU-E200.

 Vertical rack size:

 Depth rack size:

 Width rack size:

26.6 cm (10.5 inches) 6U

24.60 cm (9.7 inches)

53.3 cm (21 inches) ETSI or 48.26 cm (19.0 inches) 19”


3-4


Consider 4 screws to tighten the shelf using the 2 holes in each the mounting ears.

404 mm (20.98 in.)

533 mm (15.98 in.)  ETSI

482.6 mm (19.0 in.)  19”

465.1 mm (183.1 in.)  19”

515 mm (202.8 in.)  ETSI

Left mount ear Right mount ear

Figure 3-1 : Dimensional View

CAUTION

Each OSA 5548C SSU must have at least 1 RU (4.5 cm) of clearance below and above to assure sufficient cooling.

240 mm

(9.45 in.)


3-5


3.4.2 Power, Input and Management Remote Panel

The Power, Input and Management Remote panel is an optional part which can be ordred with the 5548C to get connectors on the front. It should be placed right above or under the OSA 5548C SSU as the length of Remote Panel’s cable is 50cm. Leave

1 RU of clearance between the Remote Panel and the 5548C shelf to ensure sufficient cooling.

533 mm (ETSI) or 483 mm (19’’)

449 mm


3-6


The BNC Remote panel can be installed anywhere in the same Rack of the shelf. It provides up to 100 output connectors. Leave 1 RU between the 5548C shelf and the

Remote panel.

533mm (ETSI) or 483mm (19’’)

449mm

Figure 3-2 : Remote BNC panel - Front View

Figure 3-3 : Remote BNC panel - Top View


3-7


3.4.4 Power supply cables

CAUTION

Power voltage must be between 40VDC minimum and 60VDC maximum.

 DC power supply: recommended minimum cable size: 2mm2

 Ground: recommended minimum cable size: 2mm 2

3.5 GPS Antenna Mounting

Please refer to the "GPS Antenna & Accessories Installation Guide" For detailed information concerning the necessary precaution to undertake.

CAUTION

The installation guide must be carefully read prior connecting GPS antenna cable and antenna to the OSA 5548C.

The OSA 5548C SSU includes a remote management port. The operator must define the following parameters before installation.

The above information is to be configured via the local communication port (RS-232).

The OSA 5548C SSU includes a RJ-45 connector for remote management. For communication specifications, please refer to the “Specifications” chapter of this document.


To facilitate the full benefit of the 5548C SSU management possibilities,

Oscilloquartz recommends installation and use of the SyncTerminal and/or the SyncView PLUS management software


3-8


3.7 Required Tools & Material

The installation process requires the following tools:

 Standard tool kit

 Four screws, flat washers and locking washers for mounting the OSA 5548C SSU in the rack. (user supplied)

 ESD wrist strap for equipment installation.

 A Multimeter for verifying the power supply voltage range and polarity.

 An Oscilloscope with at least 30 MHz bandwidth for verifying input signal conformity. Please refer to the specifications in the section 9.5

 At-Link - Null modem cable for local RS-232 connection. See section 4.7.1.1.

 A laptop computer with terminal emulator (HyperTerminal, ProComm) or better with SyncTerminal or SyncView installed.

 USB

RS-232 converter, if the user’s laptop doesn’t have COM port.

 A 100 Base-T category 5 cable with RJ-45 ends for remote management

2

cable for –48V power connection and for grounding the shelf

Recommendations:

Use cable jacket that is rated in accordance with Local and State Fire Transit

Building Code Ordinances, Electrical Codes, and a Plenum rated jacket if required.

Follow 'Best Company Practice' when wiring and cabling connections.

Use diverse paths when routing Wires or Cables from separate sources, if possible. Do not combine timing in the same bound group, such as using two pairs in a multiple pair cable.


3-9




3-10

Chapter

4. Equipment Installation

Including:

 Overview

 Unpacking

 Rack Mounting

 Grounding & Power Connection

 Connections

 Alarms

 Cabling Communication Ports

 Installation Check List

Equipment Installation


4-1




4-2


4.1 Overview


The “Pre-Installation Considerations” chapter must be carefully read prior to this chapter.

Note:

Turn-up and configuration procedures are described in chapter 6 of this document.

This chapter covers detailed installation instructions for the OSA 5548C SSU. It is divided into the following sections.

 Unpacking section, describes the precautions and instructions required to unpacking and inspecting the OSA 5548C SSU and its associated material.

 Rack mounting section, presents the size and information for mounting the rack.

 Grounding and power connection section, explains how to connect the power and ground to the OSA 5548C SSU.

 Connections section, describes how to cable the Input and Output connections.

 Alarms section, describes how to connect the remote and local alarm cables and a typical application.

 Local/Remote connections section, describes how to connect a 5548C extension shelf.

 Cabling communication ports section, explains cabling to connect a local and/or remote management system.

If any difficulties are encountered during the installation process, contact your local

OSCILLOQUARTZ representative or OSCILLOQUARTZ offices.


4-3


4.2 Unpacking

CAUTION

Check first that the packing does not have any signs of rough handling such as dents or scratches, which might have occurred during transportation. Also inspect the equipment carefully for possible damage (broken knobs, bent handles, etc.).

Should the equipment have suffered any damage, immediately notify the carrier and retain the packing material for inspection.


We recommend saving the packing material for use in case of return shipment. Should you need to return the equipment, please do not hesitate to contact OSCILLOQUARTZ for help in obtaining appropriate packing material.

CAUTION

When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards, the operator must use grounded wrist straps.

CAUTION

Spare cards must be stored in anti-static packaging.

Note:

Compare the OSA 5548C SSU contents with the purchase order / order acknowledgement. In case of error, contact your local OSCILLOQUARTZ representative or OSCILLOQUARTZ offices.


4-4


An installed OSA 5548C SSU-E200 occupies the following space in the rack.

Also see Figure 4-1.

 Vertical rack size:

26.6 cm (10.5 inches) 6U

 Depth rack size:

 Width rack size:

24.60 cm (9.7 inches)

53.3 cm (21 inches) ETSI



or 48.26 cm (19.0 inches) 19”

Refer to picture Figure 3-1 for more details about dimension.

CAUTION

Each OSA 5548C SSU must have at least 1 RU (1.75in. / 4.5 mm) below the shelf to allow for adequate convection cooling.

4.3.1 Mounting the Shelf in the Rack

STEP ACTION

1

Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack

2

Mount the OSA 5548C SSU carefully onto the rack rails from the front of the rack and fix it using four screws and their corresponding washers.

Procedure 4-1 Rack Mounting


4-5


Text

Remote Output Panel

Remote IN, PWR and MGMT Panel

1RU of clearance

4 holes to fix the 5548C into the rack

1RU of clearance

Remote Output Panel

Rack

Figure 4-1 : Rack Mounting


4-6


4.3.2 Remote Power, Input and Management Panel

Mounting

It is recommended to mount the Remote Panel once the OSA 5548C SSU is installed.

It is possible to mount the panel above or below the shelf, leaving enough space (1

RU) for cable and adequate convection cooling.


1 RU

Figure 4-2: Mounting Remote PWR, IN and MGMT Panel in the rack

Note:

The Remote Panel can be adjusted in 19” or ETSI according to the rack type.


4-7


STEP ACTION

1

Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack. As the Remote

Panel’s cables have a length of 50cm, do not install the Remote Panel further than 1RU (4.6 cm) under or above the 5548C shelf.

2

3

Mount Remote Panel carefully onto the rack using four screws and their corresponding washers (customer-supplied).

Connect each Remote panel’s cable to their corresponding connector on the rear side of the 5548C.

Procedure 4-2 Remote Panel Mounting

Front side

Remote Panel

OSA 5548C SSU

Rack

Cables (50cm)


4-8


It is recommended to mount the Remote Panel once the OSA 5548C SSU is installed.

It is possible to mount the panel above or below the shelf, leaving enough space (at least 1 RU) for cable and adequate convection cooling. If a Remote PWR, IN and

MGMT anel is installed, it is not required to leave 1RU between both Remote Panels.

1 RU

1 RU


Figure 4-4: Mounting Remote Output Panel in the rack


4-9


Note:

 The Remote Panel can be adjusted in 19” or ETSI according to the rack type.

 The Remote Panel can also get its output connectors pointing on the rear of the rack

STEP ACTION

1

Check the position in which to fit the shelf in the rack. Intsall under or above the shelf eaving a space of 1 RU (4.6cm).

2

3

Mount Remote Panel carefully onto the rack using four screws and their corresponding washers (customer-supplied).

Read section 4.5.2.4 for cable connection between 5548C’s output tiles and the Remote Panel


4-10


4.4 Grounding & Power Connection

The OSA 5548C SSU has redundant -48VDC power input connectors called POWER A and POWER B, which supply power to each individual card slot.

The POWER A connection tile is the tile A107 and the POWER B is the tile A101. On the

Remote Power, Input and Management panel, the POWER A is on the left side and the

POWER B on the right side.

A121 A122

A123

A124 A125 A126 A127

POWER B

(office battery B)

POWER A

(office battery A)

A101

Figure 4-5: Power Tiles Location on rear 5548C side

POWER A

(office battery A)

POWER B

(office battery B)

Figure 4-6: Power Tiles Location on Remote Power, Input, and Management Panel


4-11


FUSE A

Figure 4-7: Fuses Location

T he fuses of the shelf are located on both POWER A and B cards.

FUSE B

CAUTION

Do not exchange POWER A & POWER B cards in their respective slots.

This may cause damage and inhibit the correct functioning of the shelf.

Note:

The fuse specification is T 6.3A L 250V – 5mm x 20 mm size

DC Inputs are isolated from shelf and logic ground.

In order to ensure correct powering-up of the system, it is necessary to follow these instructions.

STEP ACTION

1

The unit should be installed near the socket outlet, which must be easily accessible.

2

The shelf and if ordered, the Remote Panel must be connected to a proper earth: a. The ground connections of the shelf are made using the studs of the power tiles and the Remote Panel. b. Connect the OSA 5548C SSU to the earth using cable min. 2mm

2 c. Verify that no voltage exists between the ground and the shelf, using a voltmeter


Make this cable as short as possible.

3

4

Remove the fuses located on the POWER A and the POWER B cards front panel (Slots A21 & A37) using a flathead screwdriver. They will be reinstalled in the power-up procedure in chapter 5

Locate the power tiles on top range of the shelf, respectively A107 for

POWER A and A101 for POWER B. Or on the Remote Panel the left side for


4-12


STEP ACTION

POWER A and right side for POWER B.

5

6

Remove (if necessary) the transparent plastic protection above the power connector on each Power tiles using a screwdriver.

The minimum conductor size of the power cord must be at least 2mm

2

.

Connect primary power to the connectors on the POWER A tile and secondary power on the POWER B tile.


use a spade lug termination for each power wire

7

8

Measure voltages and polarities of the external power sources before connecting them to the OSA 5548C.

The voltages must be within the specified ranges (40 to 60VDC).

To ensure that the power connections to the 5548C are correct, use the following procedure:

1. Disconnect the –48V (-) wires from the POWER A & B tiles and leave the Return battery (+) connected.

2. On the power tile, use a Multimeter to measure the voltage between the following points:

TEST POINT 1

POWER A -

POWER A -

POWER A -

TEST POINT 2

POWER B -

POWER A +

GROUND

VALUE

0V

0V

0V

OK

POWER B -

POWER B -

POWER B +

GROUND

0V

0V

3. Reconnect the –48V wires on to the POWER A and B – connectors

4. Measure the following points:

TEST POINT 1

POWER A -

POWER B -

TEST POINT 2

POWER A +

POWER B +

VALUE

-40 to -60VDC

-40 to -60VDC

OK

Replace the plastic protection on the power connector of both Power Tiles

9

10

Please refer to chapter 5 for Turn Up Procedures

Procedure 4-3 Grounding & Power connection


4-13

+VDC / RETURN (0V) -VDC / -BATT (-48V)


POWER GROUND (GND)


Figure 4-8 : Grounding & Power Connections on Power Tiles

+VDC / RETURN (0V) -VDC / -BATT (-48V)

Note:

Screw the studs to ensure grounding


Figure 4-9: Grounding and power connection on PWR, IN & MGMT Remote panel


4-14


4.5 Connections

4.5.1 Input and GPS Connectors

There is 2 groups of INC (INC1: slots A1 and A2; and INC2: slots A3 and A4) and a group of GPS (slots A4 and A5) on the bottom range of the OSA 5548C SSU. The input tile is located on the rear of the OSA 5548C SSU (position A106) and on the

Remote PWR, IN and MGMT Panel.

INPUT TILE

Figure 4-10: Input Tile location on the 5548C shelf

INPUT TILE

Figure 4-11: Input Tile on the Remote Panel


4-15


A B A B A B

INC1 INC2 GPS

Figure 4-12: Input and GPS Cards Location

The input connectors are processed by the 2 INC groups, INC Group 1 and INC

Group 2.

The INC groups can qualify or monitor up to 8 input lines (IL) among the 16 input connectors available (2x 4 E1 and 2x 4 Freq) on the Input tile or on the Remote

Panel.

The first group of 8 Input connectors is linked to INC group 1 and the second group to

INC Group 2.

 E1 connectors can be cabled with asymmetrical E1 signal (2.048 Mbits at 75 ohms) or symmetrical with a 120/75 ohms adapter (balun).

 Freq connectors can be cabled with asymmetrical 2.048, 5 & 10 MHz sine or square wave frequency (75 ohms).

Note:

The Input Connectors to the Input Lines assignments and configurations have to be configured via TL1 commands or via management software.

Refer to section 6.5.


4-16

E1 FREQUENCY


E1 FREQUENCY

GPS

Figure 4-14: Input Tile on Remote Panel

Figure 4-13: Input Tile on 5548C shelf

Input Group 1 Input Group 2

INC 1 A – INC 1 B INC 2 A – INC 2 B

Input type to Input type to connector:

E1

connector:

1 E1 1

E1

E1

2 E1

3 E1

2

3

E1 4 E1 4

FREQ 1 FREQ 1

FREQ 2 FREQ 2

FREQ 3 FREQ 3

FREQ 4 FREQ 4

GPS A

Antenna GPS 1

GPS B

Antenna GPS 2


4-17


4.5.1.1 Introduction to Cable Input Ports

Connect the frequency inputs (i.e. from a PRS) to the Freq. BNC connector shown on with a 75 ohms asymmetrical coaxial cable.

Connect the E1 input either directly to the BNC connector for the asymmetrical 75 ohms option or through a 120/75 ohms adapter (Balun) for the symmetrical 120 ohms option.

Note:

Contact Oscilloquartz or your local representative for ordering BALUN.

The GPS antenna cable has to be connected on the BNC GPS inputs detailed in .

Note:

Refer to section 9.2 for input signal specifications

4.5.1.2 Cabling a Frequency of 2.048, 5 or 10 MHz

STEP ACTION

1

Select a connector among the 4 BNC connectors under the label

“FREQ.” of Group 1 or Group 2 according to the INC group chosen.

2

Use coaxial cable 75 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector.

3

Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector.

Procedure 4-4 Cabling a Frequency Input Connector


4-18


STEP ACTION

1

Select a connector among the 4 BNC connectors under the label “E1” of Group 1 or Group 2 according to the INC group chosen.

2

Use a coaxial cable 75 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector.

Should you have a 120 ohms symmetrical cable, use a 120/75 ohm adapter (balun).

3

Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector or onto the BALUN when used

Procedure 4-5 Cabling an E1 Input Connector

4.5.1.4 Cabling GPS Antenna

This section describes the procedure to connect the antenna cable(s) to the 5548C.

IMPORTANT:

The installation guide must be carefully read prior connecting GPS antenna cable and antenna to the OSA 5548C

STEP ACTION

1

When cabling a roof or wall antenna, verify that the EMP protector is correctly mounted with reliable earth grounding.

2

3

4

Select a connector of your choice among the 2 BNC connectors GPS1 and GPS 2.

Connect the Coaxial cable into the intended connector.

Check that the cable is tightened correctly into the BNC connector.

Procedure 4-6 Cabling a GPS Input Connector


4-19


4.5.2.1 Output Cards & Tiles

Up to 10 Groups of OUtput Cards (OUC) can be inserted in the OSA 5548C SSU, providing up to 200 output signals. Within each GROUP, there is an OUC A on which an OUC B can be added on the right slot to insure a one for one protection (1:1 redundancy).

10 9 8 7 6 5 4

3

2

1

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A B A B A B A B A B A B A B

A B A B A B

Figure 4-15: Output cards and tiles location

1 2 3


4-20


OUC GROUP OUC A slot no. OUC B slot no. Output Tile

1 A11 A12 A105

2 A13 A14 A104

3 A15 A16 A103

4 A22 A23 A127

5 A24 A25 A126

6 A26 A27 A125

7 A28 A29 A124

8 A30 A31 A123

9 A32 A33 A122

10 A34 A35 A121

Table 4-1: Reference between OUC cards and Output tiles

The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted.

Verify that the link points to the correct file and location.

Outputs terminations

If outputs have impedance mismatch, output failure alarms could appear.

Make sure the output ports are terminated with their corresponding loads or squelched (if not used) to avoid these false output failure alarms.

The sections below present different available types of Output tiles with their procedure of connection. Each tile provides twenty outputs signals, either

Symmetrical or Asymmetrical.

Note:

The maximal cable length from the output port of the 5548C to another device depends on the cable used.

To calculate the maximal length, use the following information: the output signal level specification from the section 9.5 the manufacturer’s cable “loss per meter” specifications at the frequency used (i.e. 2.048MHz) the minimum signal level allowed by the device to synchronise


4-21


4.5.2.2 Cabling Output Tile with 20x CEI 1.0/2.3 connectors

20x ASYMMETRICAL with CEI 1.0/2.3 75 ohms

1

OUTPUTS ASYM.

6

11 16

2

3

4

5

7

8

9

10

12

13

14

15

17

18

19

20

STEP ACTION

1

Locate the connector tile corresponding to the group required to cable.

2

3

Select a connector, which will be configured with the signal desired. The output port configuration is done by software as described in section 6.9

Use a 75 ohms coaxial cable with CEI

1.0/2.3 male connector.

4

Plug the connector and ensure that it is correctly fixed.

Procedure 4-7 Cabling an E1 or Freq. port from an Asym. Output Tile with CEI connectors


4-22


4.5.2.3 Cabling Output Tile with 20x SUB-D 25 pins


OUT 1..10 DS1

1

Output Group 1

OUT 11..20 DS1

1

OL 1…10


1 25 12 13

2 24 11 13

3 23 10 20

4 22 9 20

5 21 8 7

6 19 6 7

7 18 5 14

8 17 4 14

9 16 3 1

10 15 2 1

OL 11…20


11 25 12 13

12 24 11 13

13 23 10 20

14 22 9 20

15 21 8 7

16 19 6 7

17 18 5 14

18 17 4 14

19 16 3 1

20 15 2 1

Output Group 2

Note:

Any shield pins can be connected with any Output Line

STEP ACTION

1


2


3

4

Use a SUB-D male connector with 25 pins with a ribbon cable connected on the pins described on the above table

Plug the connector and tighten it correctly.

Procedure 4-8 Cabling Output port from Output Tile with SUB-D 25pins connectors


4-23


4.5.2.4 Cabling BNC Output Port Remote Panel

20x ASYM. with IDC connector for Remote BNC panel

1

Output Group 1

OL 1…10

OL Tip Shield

1 1 1

2 3 2

3 5 3

4 7 4

5 9 5

6 11 6

7 13 7

8 15 8

9 17 9

10 19 10

OL 11…20

OL Tip Shield

1 1 2

2 3 4

3 5 6

4 7 8

5 9 10

6 11 12

7 13 14

8 15 16

9 17 18

10 19 20

1

Output Group 2

Output Tile

1 or 6

Output Tile

2 or 7

Output Tile

3 or 8

Output Tile

4 or 9

Output Tile

5 or 10

OG 1 OG 2

Output Conn. OG1

Output Conn. OG2


4-24


STEP ACTION

1

Connect the Remote panel to the ground

2

3

4

5

6



Connect the ribbon cable supplied by Oscilloquartz on the tile’s connector required.

Connect the other end of the ribbon cable on the Remote panel’s output tile desired

Check that cable is well tightened

Procedure 4-9 Cabling the BNC Remote panel


4-25


4.5.2.5 Cabling SUB-D 9 Output Port Remote Panel


Output Group 1

1

OL 1…10


1 25 12 13

2 24 11 13

3 23 10 20

4 22 9 20

5 21 8 7

6 19 6 7

7 18 5 14

8 17 4 14

9 16 3 1

10 15 2 1

OL 11…20


11 25 12 13

12 24 11 13

13 23 10 20

14 22 9 20

15 21 8 7

16 19 6 7

17 18 5 14

18 17 4 14

19 16 3 1

20 15 2 1

Output Group 2

1

OG 1 OG 2

Output Tile 1 Output Tile 2 Output Tile 3 Output Tile 4 Output Tile 5

Output Conn. OG1

Output Conn. OG2


4-26

SUB-D 9 pole female

7

8

9

3

4

5

6

PIN

1

2

Table 4-2 SUB-D 9 Pole pin description

DESCRIPTION

Ring (out x)

Tip (out x)

NC

Shield

Shield

Shield

NC

Ring (out x+1)

Tip (out x+1)


STEP ACTION

1

Connect the Remote panel to the ground

2


3

4

5

6


Connect the ribbon cable supplied by Oscilloquartz on the tile’s connector required.

Connect the other end of the ribbon cable on the Remote panel’s output tile desired

Check that cable is well tightened

Procedure 4-10 Cabling the SUB-D Remote panel


4-27


4.5.2.6 Output Tile Set Connectors PPS

There are two BNC connectors on the Management tile labeled PPS 1 & PPS 2. See section 9.5 for specifications.

MGMT TILE

Figure 4-16 : Output Connectors PPS location (slot A102)

IMPORTANT:

When no GPS receivers are installed, the PPS signal is not phase-locked to

UTC.

PPS 2

PPS 1

Figure 4-17 : Output Connectors PPS


4-28


PPS 1 PPS 2

Figure 4-18: Output PPS on Remote Panel

PPS is phase-locked to UTC when GPS receiver cards are locked to GPS signal.

4.5.2.7 Cabling a PPS Output Connector

STEP ACTION

1

Choose a PPS output BNC connector available.

2

3

Use a coaxial cable 50 ohms with BNC male termination and connect it into the intended connector.

Check that the cable is tightened correctly.

Procedure 4-11 Cabling a PPS Output Connector


4-29


4.6 Alarms

Figure 4-20 shows two types of alarm connectors, the EXTERNAL ALARM INPUTS and the ALARM OUT group 1 & 2.

ALARMS OUT 1

EXT. ALARMS IN

ALARMS OUT 2

Figure 4-20 : Alarms - Management Tile

Figure 4-19: Alarams - Remote panel

The OSA 5548C unit includes 10 input alarms. These are used to remotely manage external units. And two groups of NC (Normally Closed) & NO (Normally Opened) relays contacts to remote alarms to third party devices.


4-30


The OSA 5548C SSU unit includes ten input alarms. These are used to remotely report external unit’s alarms.

EXT. Alarm Inputs - SUB-D 25p Male

DESCRIPTION PIN Severity

Alarm 1 25 CRITICAL

Alarm 2 24 CRITICAL

Alarm 3 23 CRITICAL

Alarm 4 22 MAJOR

Alarm 5 21 MAJOR

Alarm 6 18 MAJOR

Alarm 7 17 MINOR

Alarm 8 16 MINOR

Alarm 9

Alarm 10

GROUND

(GND)

Not Connected

15

14

1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9, 10,

11, 12, 13

19, 20

MINOR

Non Alarmed

-

-

25

14

Figure 4-21 : External Input Alarm Connector

The OSA 5548C SSU will automatically generate event messages in case of defined alarm condition status.

When the contact between the pin IN and GND is closed or opened, the OSA 5548C

SSU will take this state as a remote alarm.

Dry Contact

ALARM 1

GND

+3V3

ALARM

DETECTION

HCMOS

REMOTE UNIT OSA 5548C SSU

Figure 4-22 : External Input Alarm Application


4-31


STEP ACTION

1

Locate the connector “EXT. ALARM INPUTS” on the Management tile.

See Figure 4-20.

2

Connect a SUB-D 25 Female wired with respect to the Figure 4-21 :

External Input Alarm Connector

3

4

Tighten the two fixation screws

Verify that the connections have been correctly effected.

Procedure 4-12 External Alarm Input Connection

CAUTION

Do not supply power into the IN pin or a voltage offset between IN pin and GND pin, only a dry contact closure or opening can be connected.

Please read the specifications in section 9.6.2


4-32


4.6.2 Output Alarm Groups

The OSA 5548C SSU unit presents two groups of electrical output alarms (ALARM

OUT 1 / 2) as shown in Figure 4-20. Each group includes 3 levels of alarms:

Each alarm contains three connections allowing the user to connect alarms as

Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC).

Alarm Output Groups – SUB-D 9p Male



CRITICAL 1 6 2

MAJOR 7 3 8

MINOR 4 9 5

1

9



CRITICAL 1 6 2

MAJOR 7 3 8

MINOR 4 9 5

1

9

Figure 4-23 : Output Alarm Connection

Note:

One connector set can be reserved for Visual Alarms, while the other is reserved for Audible alarms.


4-33


+VDC

ALARM

MANAGEMENT

(MAC)

NC

C

NO

OSA 5548C SSU

Figure 4-24 : Output Alarm Application

LAMP

CAUTION

Before cabling, please read and follow the specifications in section

9.6

STEP ACTION

1

Locate the connector ALARM OUT GROUP 1 or 2 on the Management tile. See Figure 4-20

2

3

4

Select the SUB-D 9 pins connector required

Connect a SUB-D 9 pins male wired with respect to the Figure 4-23

Tighten the two fixation screws

5

Verify that connections have been done correctly

Procedure 4-13 Output Alarm Connection


4-34

4.7 Cabling Communication Ports



In order to take full benefits of the 5548C SSU management possibilities, we recommend installing and using the SyncTerminal and/or SyncView PLUS software.

The OSA 5548C enables to communicate locally via two RS-232 serial ports. It is possible to connect a computer or laptop to communicate with a terminal emulator software with the recommended software supplied with the OSA 5548C SSU.

The two communication ports can be used simultaneously.

RS-232 port

Figure 4-25: Local management Port location on the shelf


4-35


RS-232 port

Figure 4-26: Local management port location on Remote Panel

4.7.1.1 R

S-232 / AT-Link serial cable PIN assignment

Note:

This cable can be ordered to Oscilloquartz, the article number is

A012740

.

Should the computer or laptop only have USB ports, use a universal

USB to RS-232 adapter.

AT-LINK or Null Modem Cable with two ends SUB-D 9p Female

SUB-D 9p Female on SUB-D 9p Female on cable-end cable-end

1 7

7 1

2 3

3 2

4 6 & 8

5 5

6 & 8 4

Cable PIN assignment - Local Comm.


4-36


The OSA 5548C SSU allows communicating with via an Ethernet network for remote management. A RJ-45 port is located on the management tile.

Connector specifications

Label:

LAN comm.

Figure 4-27 : LAN Comm. Port Location on 5548C shelf

LAN comm. port

Figure 4-28: LAN Com Port location on Remote panel


4-37


4.8 Installation Check List

This table is designed to help you in verifying that all required tasks have been done before powering-up the shelf as described in the chapter 4

Item Tasks



1

2

Unpack the shelf carton and inspect the material according to the order acknowledgement or the packing list.

Confirm that all the intended cards and tiles are inserted correctly and tightened in the shelf.

3

Confirm that the shelf’s ears are adjusted according to the width required

4

5

Confirm that the shelf is mounted in a rack with at least 1 RU (1.79’’ / 45mm) of clearance below the shelf

Confirm that the shelf is grounded from the grounding studs to a reliable earth point in the rack

6

Confirm that voltage and polarities on the two power cables are compliant

7

8

9

10

Confirm that the power cable is connected to both POWER A and POWER B connector tile

Confirm that the input and/or output connectors is cabled to the corresponding connector tiles

Confirm that the external input and/or output Alarms connectors are cabled accordingly

Confirm that the remote “LAN COMM.” and/or local serial “LOCAL COMM.” connector(s) are cabled

Table 4-4 Installation Check List


4-38

Chapter

5. Turn-up Procedure

Including:

 Overview

 Power-up

 Card Start-up Sequences

Turn-up Procedure


5-1


Turn-up Procedure


5-2

Turn-up Procedure

5.1 Overview


The chapter 4, entitled ”Equipment Installation”, must be carefully read prior to this chapter.

This chapter describes the power-up procedure and the behaviors shown by each single card inserted in an already powered shelf. It does not include the Downloading description.

Many different scenarios can be shown if the shelf has already been configured and provisioned.

This section is divided into the following sections.

 Power-Up procedure section, explains the instructions & the precautions to Turnup the shelf as well as its behavior during this procedure.

 Cards Turn-up sequence section, describes the LEDs and behaviors during card start-up process after insertion.

5.2 Power-up

Note:

The OSA 5548C SSU does not include a Power-switch to switch it on. It is controlled by the insertion/removal of two fuses T 6.3A L 250V on the

POWER A and POWER B card respectively or by the insertion/removal of the two POWER cards.

At this point, voltage & polarity checks are complete.

STEP ACTION

1

Install the fuse into the POWER B card.

2

3

4

Install the fuse into the POWER A card.

Now both POWER cards A & B should show their STATUS LED as GREEN and solid after been very shortly RED.

Focus on the MAC A card located in slot A17.

During the start-up sequence, it should show the following:

1. STATUS LED illuminates in solid GREEN

2. STATUS LED flashes in GREEN (~20s)

3. All LEDs light very shortly

4. MST LED lights in solid GREEN

5. RMT illuminates in solid GREEN shortly

6. CR, MJ and MN LEDs light in sequence one after the other


5-3

Turn-up Procedure

STEP ACTION

7. MST LED Blinks in GREEN

8. Once the MAC MST LED has turned into GREEN solid, the

communication with the 5548C is possible.

5

Except THC Cards, all cards should show their STATUS LED in GREEN solid.

The THC cards remain with a RED STATUS LED until they are able to supply a proper sync clock to the rest of the shelf.

It is therefore recommended to allow the THC cards ending their warmup procedure, which takes up to 30 minutes.

6

Once all the cards are showing their STATUS LED in GREEN, the 5548C is ready to be provisioned.

Detailed TL1 commands to provision the 5548C are described in the chapter 6.

Advanced users can go to chapter 7 where they can find quick commissioning procedures with fewer details.

About warm start or restart of each card, please refer to the next section.

Procedure 5-1 Power-up


5-4

Turn-up Procedure

5.3 Card Start-up Sequences

When the system is powered-up, the LEDs of each card embedded in the OSA 5548C

SSU should show the sequences described in this chapter.


Do not remove any card until all the cards have finished their own turn-up sequence. The THC performs the longest sequence.

CAUTION

Prior inserting any new card, verify that currently inserted cards are well inserted in their respective slot and that they have their locking screws well tightened.

Figure 5-1 : Power Card Turn-up

Both POWER A (A21) & POWER B (A37) cards have the same behavior.

Seq. STATUS

1 GREEN

DESCRIPTION

Once the card is inserted, the STATUS LED lights in GREEN.

If any LED lights in RED, check the Voltage fed into POWER

Connectors and its fuse (refer to section 8.4.4.1).

Table 5-1 Power Card Turn-up Status


5-5

Turn-up Procedure

5.3.2 MAC - MAnagement Card


Use the same type and style fuse

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

Figure 5-2 : Management Card Turn-up

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17

Seq. STATUS

1

2

3

4

5

6

GREEN OFF

GREEN

Flashing

OFF

GREEN GREEN

GREEN GREEN GREEN

GREEN OFF

GREEN

MST RMT EXP USC

MST in GREEN

Flashing

OFF

CR, MJ, MN

Extinguished

OFF

OFF

OFF

Alarm level

Any of these if any alarm detected

ACO DESCRIPTION

OFF

The LEDs light in sequence one after the other

Initialization

Boot (~20s)

Auto-test process

OFF Establishing communication

7 GREEN MST in GREEN solid

OFF Any of these if any alarm detected

OFF Ready to

communicate with the

5548C

Table 5-2 MAC Card Turn-up Status

Note:

If the POWER-B card is not inserted or without its fuse, or if the shelf cannot retrieve its network parameters (IP address and/or MAC Address), the STATUS

LED flashes in red. In almost all cases, once the POWER-B card or its fuse is inserted, extract and reinsert the MAC in order to restart it.

5.3.3 INC - INput Card


5-6

Turn-up Procedure

Figure 5-3 : Input Card Turn-up

Seq. STATUS

1 RED

IN 1 to IN 4

Extinguished

2 GREEN GREEN on LED corresponding a Input Line provisioned and qualified

RED on LED corresponding to an Input Line not configured correctly or alarmed

GREEN Flashing on LED corresponding to an input with a Wait-To-Restore time currently elapsing.

ORANGE on LED corresponding to an Input Line currently set as Monitored

OFF correspond to a disabled input or if all the LEDs are off, it means that this INC card is the stand-by one.

Table 5-3 Input Card Turn-up Status

DESCRIPTION

The status LED should be in

RED for a few seconds

Different states can be shown depending on INC group and status of the Input Line.


5-7

Turn-up Procedure

5.3.4 GPS – GPS card

Figure 5-4 : GPS card Turn-up

Note:

The following procedure is shown when a valid and well mounted

GPS antenna is connected to the related GPS input connector.

Seq. STATUS

1 RED RED

2 GREEN RED

GPS OCXO

RED

OFF

3 GREEN GREEN: GPS reception is OK

4 GREEN GREEN: GPS reception is OK

Table 5-4 Input Card Turn-up Status

RED

Flashing

OFF

DESCRIPTION

Initialization

Start-up and GPS statellites research (~5 min)

GPS signal pre-tracking phase

(~200s)

This status is shown once the pre-tracking phase has ended.


5-8

Turn-up Procedure

5.3.5 THC - Tracking Holdover Card

Figure 5-5 : Tracking Holdover Card Turn-up

Seq. STATUS HOLDOVER OSCILLATOR SELECTED

1

2

RED until the THC can supply a proper signal

Extinguished RED Flashing “.” (dot) or nothing

3 GREEN RED Flashing Extinguished Input Line

4 GREEN Extinguished or RED if the

THC is in

Holdover

Extinguished

Number accompanied with a “.” (dot) give the Input

Line number currently selected as reference. (G

= GPS input)

DESCRIPTION

INPUT

Extinguished Extinguished Extinguished This status remains for a short time. However, the

STATUS LED remains

RED until the THC is able to supply a proper signal

to the rest of the shelf, normally until the

Warm-Up sequence has ended (OSCILLATOR

LED has stopped flashing in RED)

The internal oscillator is

warming-up

. Depending on the Oscillator, the delay can be up to

30min

.

The THC is in fast startup during a couple of minutes.

The THC is operating correctly.


5-9

Seq. STATUS HOLDOVER OSCILLATOR SELECTED

INPUT

“-“ (dash) if the THC is in holdover or freerun.

Nothing shown means that the THC is in stand-by and you should see a number on the adjacent THC card

Table 5-5 Tracking Holdover Card Turn-up Status

Turn-up Procedure

DESCRIPTION

Note:

Oscillator cold-start to warm-up intervals depend upon the type and configuration of the Oscillator modules installed. In example, Rubidium THC cards warm up faster than Quartz THC cards.


5-10

Turn-up Procedure

5.3.6 SGC - Signal Generator Card

Figure 5-6 : Signal Generator Card Turn-up

Seq. STATUS

1 RED

E1 f DESCRIPTION

Extinguished Extinguished This status remains briefly.

2 GREEN RED flashing

RED flashing

Status while the SGC does not receive any signal from the THC.

The SGC cards squelch their outputs and the OUC cards do not receive signals.

3 GREEN

GREEN flashing

GREEN

GREEN flashing

GREEN

This condition means that the shelf is in Pass-through mode. So no

THC is currently available to process input signal fed.

The SGC now receives a signal from the THC and can process and supply it to the OUC

Table 5-6 Signal Generator Card Turn-up Status

Note:

Redundant SGC are simultaneously active and should show the same status at the same time.


5-11

Turn-up Procedure

5.3.7 OUC – OUtput Card

Figure 5-7 : Output Card Turn-up

Seq. STATUS OUT 1-10

1

2

3

OUT 11-20

RED

E1 f

Extinguished

E1 f DESCRIPTION

Extinguished This status remains very shortly

GREEN E1 or f RED flashing

E1 or f RED flashing

Depending on the output configuration, either the f or

E1 RED LED flashes during signal outage from SGC.

GREEN E1 or f GREEN E1 or f GREEN Depending on the output configuration, either the f or

E1 GREEN LED is lit, once the OUC has received a signal from the SGC

Table 5-7 Output Card Turn-up Status


5-12

Operating & Provisioning

Chapter

6. Operating & Provisioning

Including:

 Overview

 Communication

 Security Management

 General Parameters and Information

 Input Line (IL) Properties & INput Card (INC) Configurations

 Line Switching, Tracking & Holdover (THC), Signal Filtering and

Processing

 Signal Generation & Output Properties

 Synchronization Status Message - SSM

 Alarms & Events

 Performance Measurement (PM)

 Firmware Download


6-1




6-2


6.1 Overview

This chapter provides instructions and procedure to configure the available functions and settings in the OSA 5548C SSU.


Review the information in this chapter prior to configuration of the shelf.



In order to take full benefit of the 5548C SSU management possibilities, use the SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS software.

Note:

All of the 5548C’s TL1 commands are listed in the"TL1 Command List" document.

6.2.1.1 Overview

The OSA 5548C SSU uses the TL1 (Transaction Language 1) protocol to communicate. TL1 was defined in the 80's by Bellcore (now Telcordia) and is the dominant management protocol for controlling telecommunications networks in North

America, China and other parts of the world.

The TL1 protocol consists of a set of ASCII messages or instructions that a terminal emulator, the SyncView PLUS use to handle the OSA 5548C SSU functions.

Among the TL1 commands implemented in the OSA 5548C SSU, several are compliant with:

 Telcordia GR-199-CORE (OTGR: Operations Application Messages - Memory

Administration Messages)

 Telcordia GR-833-CORE (Network Maintenance: Network Element and

Transport Surveillance Messages)

 TR-NWT-835 (Operations Application Messages – Network Element and

Network System Security Adminitration Messsages


6-3


The GR-831 standard specifies syntax, semantics, information structure, and other rules for uniform construction of TL1 messages.

6.2.1.2 TL1 Command Structure

In TL1, the messages are sent by the user to perform functions to manage the OSA

5548C SSU, or to observe faults and events emitted by the equipment. In other words, the TL1 messages are used to operate, administer, maintain, and provision the OSA 5548C SSU. There are two main types of standards-defined TL1 messages:

 Command/responses.

These are initiated by the user and provide two parts: a request to the 5548C to get or set information, and a response from the 5548C containing completion or status codes and requested or chained information.

 Autonomous events.

These are events, alarms or otherwise, that the 5548C emits indicating some change in its state.

The user executes TL1 requests via the SyncView PLUS or a command line interface

(CLI) like the SyncTerminal software and receives notifications from the OSA 5548C

SSU (autonomous events).

The TL1 message is easy to understand; each component of the message is easily identifiable. Below is an example of an ED-EQPT-OL message, which sets Output

Line (OG) parameters, such as the squelch state and tits tag:

ED-EQPT-OL : [TID] :

1-1

:

CTAG ::

SQUELCH=OFF,TAG=”my tag” ;

C E F G

Command code block

Staging block Payload block

A: The TL1 main command

defines the function to be executed in the OSA 5548C

SSU. It is composed by different abbreviations like ED for Editing, RTRV for

Retrieving, DLT for deleting in the form VERB-MOD1[MOD2]. More details about abbreviation are described in next sections.

B: Target Identifier (TID)

is required in all input commands, but its value can be null.

In the 5548C, the TID is represented between two brackets “[“ and “]” as it is an optional value.

C: Access Identifier (AID)

contains parameters that uniquely identify the entity within or associated to the OSA 5548C SSU. In the above example, it corresponds to the

Output Group (1-1).


6-4


D: Correlation Tag (CTAG)

is a sequential command identifier to be used with every command input. The CTAG correlates acknowledgments, errors, and responses with an originating request.

E: General Block Format

is usually empty, and is the fourth and final parameter in the TL1 message's staging block.

F: The Payload block

of any TL1 command message contains any additional information needed to carry out the specified command. Typically any parameters associated with the operation are conveyed within this block.

G: The TL1 input message terminator

is a semicolon “;” which must always end any input or command messages.

6.2.1.3 Abbreviations and Characters for Command Format Types

Characters for commands and received messages

Characters Description

[ ]

..

,

“ ”

or …

-

;

:

=

\” \”

Optional parameters or command. Two types exist:

 The parameters defined by variable; i.e [VARIABLE=PARAMETER] can be ignored and not typed in the command

 The single parameter must be located by its position in the command; i.e to set the

PARAMETER2 in the following series:

[PARAMETER1], [PARAMETER2],

[PARAMETER3]

It should be written with nothing at its position, such as follow:

PARAMETER1,,PARAMETER3

Separate value or parameters.

Text parsed within an answer or an autonomous message

List of (logical) values between the first and the last written value

Separation in the command block or within a parameter name

Termination of a command

Separation between blocks

Separation between the variable and its value or parameter

Text description

Example

[

tid]

IL-1-1,IL-1-2

“

1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,”

1…9

ED-EQPT-MADDS

IL-2-1

RTRV-PRO:::ctag;

RTRV-PRO:::ctag;

SSM=OFF

\”

CONDESCR\”

Table 6-1 TL1 Command Format Types

Verbs used in the TL1 command block


6-5

Abbreviation Description

RTRV

Retrieving information

ED

DLT

Editing a function or parameter

Deleting a function or element

INIT

ENT

SET

OPR

REPT

ABT

Initializing a part or function

Entering a new parameter

Setting a new parameter

Operating a function or command

Reporting a function or command

Aborting a function or process

Table 6-2 TL1 Command Block Verbs


Example

RTRV-INV

ED-EQPT-MAC

DLT-EQPT

INIT-SYS

ENT-PORT

SET-SID

OPR-LEDS

REPT ALM

ABT-DNLD

6.2.1.4 Autonomous Message

An autonomous answer is sent by the OSA 5548C when something occurs in the shelf, such as an event or an alarm.

Example of autonomous alarm message:

MAC-ACK 118-29-01 00-36-43

**

2784 REPT ALM

"SGC:MJ,EQPT,SA,2005-29-01,00-36-43,,NA:\"Output failure\""

;

Alarm code

*C

**

*

A

Description Abbreviation

Critical Alarm condition

Major Alarm condition

Minor Alarm condition

Non-alarmed or cleared autonomous message.

CR

MJ

MN

CL or NA


6-6


A response message is always sent back after sending a command to the OSA

5548C.

Example of response message:

SID DATE TIME

M

CTAG

RESPONSE_CODE

DENY_ERROR

/*MESSAGE*/

"

;

M : “M” Indicates that it is a response message

RESPONSE_CODE: This is the status of the commend sent. The below parameters can be answered:





COMPLD :

The command has been sent and received correctly, the response of the of the message can be shown in the

/*MESSAGE*/



DENY :

An error occurred after sending the command. The error code is shown in

“ DENY_ERROR ” and the description of the error is shown in

/*MESSAGE*/

.

Refer to the section 6.2.1.6 for DENY ERROR messages.



PRTL :

The command has partially passed. The error code is shown in

“ DENY_ERROR ” and the description of the error is shown in

/*MESSAGE*/

.

Refer to the section 6.2.1.6 for PRTL ERROR messages

6.2.1.6 DENY or PRTL Errors

Response

Code

Command Sending Errors

DENY

Error

Message Description

occurred active block an answer from the shelf has expired

User not logged

Extra data block sent within the command the command sent field within the command sent


Action

Resend the command and check if it redoes the same

Check the conection to the

5548C

Login the 5548C

Check te command syntax and resend it accordingly

Check the command syntax and resend it accordingly


6-7


Response DENY

Message Description

Code Error

DENY

Field

Extra data field within the command sent

IDNV Data not valid Data not valid within the command sent error range Data range error within the command sent

DENY IIFM Invalid

Payload block.

Invalid Data format

Invalid data format or payload block within the command sent

Requested The condition sent condition already exists or punctuation invalid already exists

Action




Check the command syntax and resend it accordingly implemented not implemented on script

DENY PIUI Privilege, illegal user identity occurred after sending the command

The user does not have priviligege to send this command

Check the command syntax and resend it accordingly. If the command is supposed to exist, contact Oscilloquartz.

Check te command syntax and resend it accordingly

Contact the 5548C administrator


Retrieve the current condition and check that it exists accordingly.

Check the command syntax and resend it accordingly unimplemente d parameter illegal command code punctuation within the command sent is not correct

There is a parameter which should not be located at the place it has been sent

The user does not have priviligege to send this command code


Contact the 5548C administrator


6-8


Response

Code

DENY

PRTL

PRTL

PRTL

Internal Communication Bus (CAN) Errors Codes

DENY

Error

Message Description Action

EDNV Data not valid occurred error

Data sent in command is invalid invalid an answer from the card in question has expired the command sent is not the same than the initial error been detected in the card’s EEPROM configuration error

The configuration of event contains an error

ERTE Test date error The test date of the card’s firmware is not correct error

ERTE Null pointer error configuration

ERTE CAN bus error There is an error within the internal bus

System error command error sent



Check the connection to the

5548C


Resend the command to download

Contact Oscilloquartz

Check the event configuration. If no error is found, contact

Oscilloquartz.



Contact Oscillquartz

Contact Oscillquartz



6-9


Firmware Upgrade Errors Codes

Response

Code

DENY

Error

Message Description Action

not found find the firmware in the FTP server

Check the FTP server configuration

FTP server lost

Check the FTP server connection aborted by the user the FTP server is lost

The user has aborted the firmware dowload

-

Restart the download error

Download

Executed

Partially down downloaded is not conform to the initial data

The firmware downloaded has been partially executed

The FTP server is down

Restart the process or roll back to the previous version

Check the FTP server status and its connection.


6-10


6.2.1.7 Card Abbreviation and Name used within TL1 Commands

In the below table are represented the cards with their corresponding abbreviation used with TL1 commands.

Slot Abbreviation

A1 INC-1-A INC-1

A2 INC-1-B

A3 INC-2-A

INC-1

INC-2

A4 INC-2-B

A5 GPS-A

A6 GPS-B

A7 THC-A

INC-2

GPS

GPS

THC

A8 THC-B

A9 SGC-A

THC

SGC

A10 SGC-B SGC

A11 OUC-1-A TCC-1-A OUC-1

A12 OUC-1-B OUC-1

A13 OUC-2-A TCC-2 OUC-2

A14 OUC-2-B OUC-2


A16 OUC-3-B OUC-3

A16 MAC-A

A21

MAC

PWR-A is not software manageable

TCC-1

TCC-2

TCC-3

INC

INC

INC

INC

GPS

GPS

THC

THC

SGC

SGC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

MAC

Slot Abbreviation


A23 OUC-4-B OUC-4


A25 OUC-5-B OUC-5


A27 OUC-6-B OUC-6


A29 OUC-7-B OUC-7


A31 OUC-8-B OUC-8


A33 OUC-9-B OUC-9


A35 OUC-10-B

A36 MAC-B

37

OUC-10

MAC

PWR-B is not software manageable

TCC-4

TCC-5

TCC-6

TCC-7

TCC-8

TCC-9

TCC-10

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

OUC

MAC

Table 6-3 Card Names & Abbreviations within TL1


6-11


6.2.2 Establishing Communication with the 5548C SSU

The 5548C can communicate either via a direct serial connection using a computer with a terminal emulation software or if the 5548C is connected to a LAN (Local Area

Network), through an Ethernet connection via TELNET.

Please refer to the below section 6.2.3 if it is necessary to connect a computer with direct serial connection or the 6.2.4 for the Ethernet connection.

6.2.3 Serial Port Communication

The OSA 5548C SSU has two serial communication ports RS-232C labeled “LOCAL

COMM” located on the front of the POWER B card, the Management tile and the

Remote panel.

Cable type:

Cable termination:

5548C’s serial connector:

AT-link - Nullmodem

Sub-d, 9 pins, female

LOCAL COMM.

Serial connection to the RS-232C port located on the PWR B card.

(in TL1: RS-FRONT)

Serial connection to the RS-232C port located on the Management tile.

(in TL1: RS-REAR)

Serial connection to the RS-

232C port located on the

Remote Panel. (in TL1: RS-

REAR)

Figure 6-1 : Local Comm. Port Connection


6-12


Note:

The AT-LINK/NULL MODEM cable is described in section 4.7.1.1

6.2.3.1 Serial Port Configuration

To establish the connection via serial port, here below is the configuration required to set up in the terminal emulator (i.e. HyperTerminal, Procomm).

Baud rate:

Parity bit:

Stop bits:

Flow control:

19200 kbs

None

1

None

Note:

The communication via serial link is designed for RAW DATA with TL1 protocol.

STEP ACTION

1

Connect a null modem cable to one of the two RS-232 ports, located on the front and the rear side and labeled “LOCAL COMM”

2

Launch a terminal emulator (HyperTerminal for example)


6-13

STEP

ACTION



6-14


STEP

ACTION

3

Set the corresponding communication parameters as shown below

4

At this stage, it’s necessary to log on.

Please create a txt file and insert:

ACT-USER ::OSCILLOQUARTZ:CTAG::OSA;

Select “send text File…” and select the file previously created


6-15


STEP

ACTION

5

You are now connected. Use command in chapter “TYPE

INFORMATION AND INVENTORY” -> section “using TL1”

Example: To retrieve inventory used: “RTRV-INV::ALL:CTAG;”

Procedure 6-1 Serial Connection


Osciloquartz highly recommends using SyncTerminal instead of other terminal emulators.


6-16


STEP ACTION

1

2

Connect a null modem cable to one of the two RS-232 ports, labeled

“LOCAL COMM”

Launch the SyncView PLUS software

3

Set the corresponding communication parameters as shown below with the Port where the Null Modem cable is connected on the computer and click “Connect”

Procedure 6-2 Serial Connection with SyncView PLUS

The OSA 5548C can be managed via an Ethernet connection.

Such as a usual Ethernet network element, you can define an IP address for the

5548C, an IP subnet mask and two gateways. The IP format is IPv4 with a format in dotted quad like 123.123.123.123.


6-17


6.2.4.1 Ethernet Port Configuration

Note:

If the OSA 5548C has never been connected via Ethernet port, you must configure the Ethernet parameters via a direct serial connection as detailed in the section 6.2.3

Send the following TL1 command replacing the bold letter words with the setting required to configure.

ED-COM-SYS::: ctag ::[ IPADDRESS=ipaddress ],[ NETMASK=netmask ],

[ GW1ADDRESS=gw1address ],[ GW1NETMASK=gw1netmask ],

[ GW2ADDRESS=gw2address ],[ GW2NETMASK=gw2netmask ],[ ETHER_SPEED=10

/100 ],

Example:

ED-COM-SYS::: MYCTAG :: IPADDRESS=149.133.41.25 ,

NETMASK=255.255.255.254 , GW1ADDRESS=149.133.40.1 ,

GW1NETMASK=255.255.255.252 , ETHER_SPEED=100

To check the Ethernet parameters, use the following TL1 command:

Input Syntax

RTRV-COM-SYS::: ctag ;

Parameter name Default Parameter Description

IPADDRESS

NETMASK

149.133.41.4

123.123.123.123

GW1ADDRESS 149.133.40.1

GW1NETMASK 255.255.0.0

GW2ADDRESS 0.0.0.0

GW2NETMASK 255.255.0.0

IP address of the 5548C

IP subnet mask of the 5548C

IP address of the first gateway

IP subnet mask address of the first gateway

IP address of the second gateway

IP subnet mask of the second gateway

ETHER_SPEED 10 Ethernet

Table 6-4 Ethernet Parameters


6-18


Note:

Prior to communicate remotely with the OSA 5548C SSU shelf, it is required to set the Ethernet parameters (IP, Gateway and Subnet mask addresses) using a direct serial port connection following section 6.2.4.1

STEP ACTION

1

Connect the 5548C SSU to the LAN with an Ethernet cable 100 Base-

T category 5 with RJ-45 connectors. Refer to section 4.7 for more details.

2

3

4

Connect one Ethernet cable end into the RJ-45 connector as shown on the

Figure 4-27 : LAN Comm. Port Location

Test the connection with a PING to the shelf’s IP

Using TELNET, access the IP address configured in the OSA 5548C

SSU.

Procedure 6-3 Ethernet Connection

6.2.4.3 Ethernet Connection with the SyncView PLUS software

STEP ACTION

1

Connect the 5548C SSU to the LAN with an Ethernet cable 10 or 100

Base-T category 5 with RJ-45 connectors. Refer to section 4.7 for more details.

2

3

4

Connect one Ethernet cable end into the RJ-45 connector as shown on the

Figure 4-27 : LAN Comm. Port Location

Test the connection with a PING to the shelf’s IP

Launch the SyncView PLUS software


6-19

5


Set the 5548C’s IP Address and click on the “Connect” button.

Procedure 6-4 Ethernet Connection with SyncView PLUS

6.2.5.1 Default Communication Ports

Connector Type Available comm. type

On MAC card

“LOCAL

COMM

”

On MGMT tile

“LOCAL

COMM

”

On MGMT tile

“LAN COMM”

RS-232C Raw data

RJ-45 Raw data (by default) &

Telnet

Table 6-5 Default Communication Ports

Number of port(s) max.

1

1

Max. number of session(s) per port

1

1

25 5

Default

Protocol port

Telnet 8023

Available ports

Raw data

FTP

8000

21

Table 6-6 Ethernet Ports

User selectable ports from

1025

to 9999

Not user selectable

Function

Maximum of simultaneous sessions

32

For 5548C management with TL1 commands

For 5548C management with TL1 commands

For card and shelf upgrade

6.2.5.2 Add, Edit or Remove a Port

Note:


6-20


It is possible to configure up to 25 Ethernet ports, but the maximum of simultaneous sessions (number of user connected simultaneously) is

32, including the sessions via serial ports.

Adding a new Ethernet port

It is possible to add up to 25 Ethernet ports within the range of 1025 to 9999

Input Syntax

ENT-PORT::

aid

: ctag ::

type

;

Note:

The user security account must be configured to authorize the communication through any port. Read section 6.3.6 to allow a new port for an user.

Deleting an Ethernet port

To delete an Ethernet port within the range of 1025 to 9999, simply send the following command.

Input Syntax

DLT-PORT::

aid

: ctag ;

Editing any port (Ethernet or RS).

With the following command, you can edit all the existing Ethernet and RS ports.

Input Syntax

ED-PORT::

aid

: ctag ::[ IDLEDELAY=idledelay ],[ SESSIONS=sessions ];

Example:

ED-PORT::

8023

: MYCTAG :: IDLEDELAY=10 , SESSIONS=5 ;

Idle delay

It is possible to add an idle delay to any port. The idle delay determines the maximum time after a command allowing the user to stay connected after it, until the session/connection will close.

Example: If the idle delay is set to 5 minutes, after 5 minutes of inactivity, the access will automatically close.


6-21


Sessions

With the ED-PORT command, the maximum number of simultaneous sessions can be set to a limit. By default the number allowed is 3 and up to 5 simultaneous sessions can be set.

Retrieve the port parameters currently configured

Input Syntax

RTRV-PORT::

aid

:ctag;

Observe an answer as in the example below:

Output Syntax

“

aid

:

type

: IDLEDELAY=idledelay , SESSIONS=sessions ;”

Parameter name

AID

Default

Parameter

Possible configurations

Description

TYPE RAW

IDLEDELAY 5

SESSIONS 3

RS-FRONT,

RS-REAR number to access the shelf via RAW DATA is 8000 and via TELNET it is 8023.

RS-FRONT is the RS-232 port on the

POWER B.

RS-REAR is the RS-232 port on the

Management tile or Remote panel.

RAW, TELNET This parameter is the type of communication. Set RAW for Raw data or

Telnet

1..60, NONE After the idle delay, the session will be

0...5 discontinued and will automatically disconnect the user. The idle delay is in

Minute(s).

This is the number of simultaneous sessions allowed for the related port.

Table 6-7 Communication Parameter Names


6-22


6.2.6.1 Introduction

Use the SyncTerminal software to send TL1 commands to the 5548C. It enhances an emulator interface for sending TL1 commands to manage and configure the

5548C.

6.2.6.2 Opening the SyncTerminal from SyncView PLUS

The SyncTerminal is included in the SyncView PLUS software. Use the connection procedure as shown in the SyncView PLUS user manual; right-click on the OSA

5548C SSU-E200 icon and select “SyncTerminal”.


6-23



The SyncTerminal main window is divided in 4 principal parts:

 The top menu provides 4 menus of all main functions of the SyncTerminal.

 The shortcut menu presents rapid access to principal functions.

 The command tree contains all the TL1 commands available for the 5548C.

The user can re-arrange then in alphabetical order.

 The main window is divided in two parts once you the 5548C is accessed.

Commands tree

Top menu

Shortcut menu

Main or command windows

Figure 6-2 : SyncTerminal Main Window


6-24


Figure 6-3 : SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu

1. Connection

This button allows connecting to a network element.

2. Disconnection

When pressing this button, it stops the current connection.

3. Run

This button opens the script editor window.

4. Stop running script

When a script is running, press this button to stop it.

5. Print

It prints all the command's answers from the window’s top-right side.

6. Options

After pressing this button, the Options window pops-up.

7. PING current connection

This button will automatically open the Microsoft Windows’s console to ping the current connection IP address.

This function removes all the TL1 responses in the top-right part of the window.

Arranges multiple windows in cascade.

10. Tile windows vertically

This button tiles multiple windows vertically.

11. Tile windows horizontally

The button tiles multiple windows horizontally.

12. View/Hide journal window

This function hides or unhides the left part of the SyncTerminal window.

13. About SyncTerminal

When pressing this button, the “about” window appears.

14. Exit

This function immediately closes the SyncTerminal.

Note:

There is fewer buttons when using the SyncTerrminal from the SyncView software


6-25


6.2.6.5 Send Command Window or Command Tree Menu

A command tree list for each type of equipment appears automatically after user configuration.

To sort, use the corresponding button under the list.

Figure 6-4 : SyncTerminal Short Cut Menu


6-26


6.2.6.6 Main or command window

Once the SyncTerminal is connected to the shelf, a new window appears on the right part of the SyncTerminal, as in the figure below.

On the top side, the SyncTerminal will respond to the commands, or automatically send information from the shelf.

On the bottom side, the operator types the commands.

Figure 6-5 : SyncTerminal Main or Command Menu


6-27


6.2.6.7 SyncTerminal Connection Parameters

The SyncTerminal must be configured before attempting to access any equipment. It is necessary to configure the communication protocol (i.e. TL1, MML, etc.), the equipment commands type file (i.e. 48CTL1SSU.dat) and the connection type

(Remote or Local).

Note:

When running SyncTerminal from the SyncView PLUS software, do not follow this procedure. The software automatically sets the SyncTerminal to connect the 5548C.

The following procedure configures the SyncTerminal in order to access the OSA

5548C SSU.

Note:

Please read section 6.2.1 and following before attempting to connect to the OSA 5548C SSU

STEP ACTION

1

Launch the SyncTerminal software

2

Go in the “Tools” menu and select “Option”

3

Click on the tab labelled “Protocol"


6-28


STEP ACTION

4

Select the 5548C in the “Select Shelf” list.

5

Select TL1 and press the button with “…” to browse the computer in order to find the corresponding data file “*.dat”


6-29


STEP ACTION

6

Select the corresponding file, which should be as shown below

(TL148CSSU.dat) and press the button “Open”

7

Then press “OK”


6-30


STEP ACTION

8

For prerequisites for local serial RS-232 connection, refer to section 6.2.3 and for remote Ethernet connection, refer to section 6.2.4.

Press the “Connect” button

9

For Local RS232 connection:

Click on the tab named “RS-232” and select your computer’s serial port it is needed to use (COM1 or COM2) to access the OSA 5548C. Other parameters are automatically configured.

For Remote Ethernet connection:

Before attempting to access the 5548C shelf the first time remotely, it is required configure its network parameters via local RS-232 management.

Go into the first tab labeled “TCP/IP” and enter the IP address configured in the shelf and the corresponding port.

10

Then click “OK”. When the connection has been correctly established, a new window should appear on the right part of the SyncTerminal window interface.

When no connection can be established via TCP/IP, a message

“

Connection failed !” is prompted.


6-31


STEP ACTION

When no connection can be established via RS-232, although there is no connection, it is written “

Connected

” as the SyncTerminal detects the computer serial port, but it is not able to send command.

Procedure 6-5 SyncTerminal Communication Configuration and Set-up

6.2.6.8 Typing TL1 commands

Note:

If the 5548C is being accessed for the first time, please refer to the previous sections for connection procedure and parameters.

There are two ways to send commands from the SyncTerminal. To assist the operators who may be unfamiliar with the TL1 command set for the 5548C, use these steps described in the following procedure.

For those familiar with TL1 command set, the interface allows operators to type the command line directly into the bottom right area of the terminal screen.

STEP ACTION

1

The operator can launch the SyncTerminal and proceed to the 5548C connection (refer to the section 6.2.2)


6-32


STEP ACTION

2

The operator can select the command to send in the left part of the window, as in the following example.

The command will appear in the right-bottom part with its description just above in the balloon help window.

STEP ACTION

3

Copy the parameter as highlighted in boldface in the callout above the command area, using the full colon character as a delimiter, as shown in the example below.

For the TL1 handling, terms and abbreviations please refer to the section

6.2.1


6-33


STEP ACTION

4

While the operator types the TL1 command, sync terminal will move its callout window to assist the command completion:

5

Type the “;” semicolon to terminate the line and then press the “ENTER” key to send the command.


6-34


STEP ACTION

6

The 5548C should respond in the right of the window, as follows:

Procedure 6-6 Typing TL1 Commands


6-35


The SyncTerminal interface uses tips and shortcuts to assist the user with TL1 command.

Shortcut Function & Description Keyboard vision

Repeat a previous command

To repeat a previously typed TL1 command, the operator can press the top cursor one time if it is required to repeat the previous command. Or as many times as he wants want to retrieve past typed TL1 commands

Select a parameter in the callout

To select a parameter in a long list of available parameters, as in the picture below, press the keys

CTRL+Cursor right

Select an optional configuration parameter in the callout

When setting one of the optional parameters in a TL1 command, as in the example below, the operator can press CTRL+Cursor right to choose it and CTRL+Cursor down to select it.

Once selected, the operator can press CTRL+Cursor right, to choose a setting in the list of suggestions.

Finding a string in the previous responses

To find information among the previous responses, the operator can press the keys CTRL+F or select the item in the top menu called “Edit”

Table 6-8 Keyboard Shortcuts for Typing TL1 Commands


6-36


6.2.6.10 Making TL1 Command Scripts

It is possible to create a sequence of TL1 commands to avoid retyping the same sequence of commands.

Press the button below.

The following window appears allowing to enter sequence of commands.

This is the command editor to write the commands script

Check this box to repeat the script continuously once launched

To load a script press this button and browse the computer

Press this button to save a script in any place on your computer

Once the script is ready, run it pressing the button ok

To avoid overwhelming the MAC card with too many commands too quickly,

Oscilloquartz recommends adding delay between commands. To set a delay between commands, press the button shown below.


6-37


This check box should be checked to delay the script before sending another command

When checked, the AutoRepeat feature automatically repeats the script when executed until halted by the user

This is the delay before stoping the script when no response is received

This is the delay between two commands within the script

Example of script:

To retrieve all the input line parameters, create the following script.

RTRV-EQPT-IL:: 1-1:MYCTAG;




To stop the script, you can simply press the below button.


6-38



This chapter describes the parameters and functions available to manage the user security and rights to access the OSA 5548C SSU management system.

Prior to sending any command to the 5548C, it is required to log into the 5548C management system with a username (UID) and password (PID).

When attempting to log the shelf at the first time, it is necessary to use the default username and password.

It is also possible to create different user rights according to restriction required to supply to operators. However, at least one user account with full rights is obligatory.

6.3.2 Default Username (UID) and Password (PID)

At the first attempt, it is required to use the default username and password, which are the following:

UID: OSCILLOQUARTZ

PID: OSA


Oscilloquartz recommends creation of a user account and removal of the default for security. Securely record all new account creations.

6.3.3 Login 5548C

The following TL1 command is required to log into the shelf.

Input Syntax

ACT-USER::

aid

: ctag ::

pid

;

Example:

ACT-USER::

OSCILLOQUARTZ

: MYCTAG ::

***

;

The response should be:

Output Syntax

;

“ aid : last_time,attempts ”


6-39


Parameter Default Parameter Possible name

AID OSCILLOQUARTZ

configurations

PID OSA Any ASCII string

(excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax) of up to 10 characters.

LAST_TIME* 2004-01-01…2099-12-

31 00-00-00…23-59-59

ATTEMPTS* 0…99

Description

Login or Username (UID)

User password.

Date and Time of the last session established by this user.

Number of unsuccessful session attempts since last session

* Not software configurable

Note:

By default, once logged, when no command is sent during 10 minutes, the session closes automatically for security.

The following automatic message format is prompted:

sid date time almcde ctag CANC

;

6.3.4

Logout the 5548C

When user needs to end the session, the following command is required:

Input Syntax

CANC-USER::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

CANC-USER::

OSCILLOQUARTZ

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID

Default Parameter Possible configurations

Description



6-40

6.3.4.2 Logout User from an Administrator Account

An admistrator can logout a user with the following command.


Input Syntax

CANC-USER-SECU::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

CANC-USER-SECU::

USER1

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID

Default Parameter Possible configurations Description

Login or Username

(UID) of the user being logged

The user can modify his password with the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-PID::

aid

: ctag ::

oldpid

,

newpid

;

Example:

ED-PID::

OSCILLOQUARTZ

: ctag ::

OSA

,

MYNEWPWD

;

Parameter name

AID

OLDPID

NEWPID

Default

Parameter

Possible configurations Description

Login or Username

(UID)

Any ASCII string (excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax) of up to

10 characters.

New password


6-41


The administrator can modify anuser password with the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-SECU-PID:: aid : ctag ::

oldpid

,

newpid

;

Example:

ED-SECU-PID::O SCILLOQUARTZ : MYCTAG ::

OSA

,

HISNEWPWD

;

Parameter name

AID

OLDPID

NEWPID

Default

Parameter


Login or Username

(UID)

Any ASCII string (excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax) of up to

10 characters.

New password

6.3.6 User Account Management

6.3.6.1 Parameters

The following parameters can be configured in every User account.

UID:

PID:

CID:

User name of the user account.

Password of the user account.

A list of up to 25 ports allowed for the user. It can be RS-232 front and/or rear and/or Ethernet Ports.

UAP*: This parameter is related to the user privileges.

PAGE*: Password ageing interval. It is the number of days after which the user receives a prompt indicating that it is necessary to change his password.

PCND*: This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory.

PCNN*: This is the number of time before an user must change his password.

POINT*: When the user receives a prompt to change his password, no old password can be restored unless the POINT interval expires.

UOUT*: At the end of the UOUT interval the user account is disabled if the user has never been used to set up a session.


6-42


LSTOI*: Normally used to set what is accessible to the user. This parameter is required by Telcordia GR, but not used with the 5548C.

Note:

*: The parameters in ITALIC are not implemented. Oscilloquartz will introduce them upon customer specific security requirements.

6.3.6.2 Create a New User Account

To create a new user account, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ENT-USER-

SECU::

aid

: ctag ::

pid

,

cid

,

uap

:[ PAGE=page ],[ PCND=pcnd ],[ PCNN=pcnn ]

,[ POINT=point ],[ UOUT=uout ],[ LSTOI=lstoi ];

Example:

ENT-USER-SECU::

USERNAME

: MYCTAG ::

PASSWORD

,

8000&8023&RS-FRONT&RS-

REAR

,

X

: PAGE=90 , PCND=7 , PCNN=5 ;

Parameter name

AID

PID

CID

UAP

PAGE

PCND

Default Possible Description

Parameter configurations


Any ASCII string

(excluding those characters that represent TL1 syntax) of up to 10 characters.

Password

RS-

FRONT, RS-REAR.

A list of up to 25 ports or channels.

When a session initiation request is

Each port separated with a “&”. i.e. in the format of:

8023&8024&RS-FRONT received, the NE checks the CID of the session request against the CID as stoerd in the NE.

RS-FRONT is the RS-232 port on the

POWER B.


Management tile or Remote Panel.

Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user

90 30..999 receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one.

Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user

7 1..999 receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one.

This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use


6-43

Parameter name

Default

Parameter


PCNN 5 1..999

POINT 180 1..999

UOUT 60

LSTOI

1..999

IDENTIFIERS


Description

the existing password before an update becomes mandatory. It is typically 5 to 10 days.

This is an integer signifying the number of times that an user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory.

Typically it is 3 to 5 times.

Password Obsolescence Intervall in days. When a user receives a prompt to change the PID, no old PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete. Typically it is about 180

UID Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session.

Typically it is between 45 and 90.

NOT USED IN 5548C

List of Object Identifiers. These identifiers specify what is accessible to this UID. The list may indicate channels, commands. It may be a range, all objects, none. It is an application-dependant requirement


6-44


6.3.6.3 Edit an User Account

To edit a new user account, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-USER-

SECU::

AID

: CTAG ::[

newpid

],[

newpid

],[

cid

],[

uap

]:[ PAGE=page ],[ PCND

=pcnd ],[ PCNN=pcnn ],[ POINT=point ],[ UOUT=uout ],[ LSTOI=lstoi ];

Example:

ED-USER-SECU::

USERNAME

: MYCTAG ::

NEWUSERNAME

,

NEWPASSWORD

,

8023&RS-

FRONT&RS-REAR

,

X

: PAGE=90 ;

Parameter name

AID

NEWUID

NEWPID

CID

UAP

PAGE

PCND

PCNN

Default

Parameter

90

7

5



New Username (UID)

Any ASCII string

(excluding those characters that represent

TL1 syntax) of up to 10 characters.

New Password (PID)

RS-FRONT,

RS-REAR. Each port separated with a “&”.


When a session initiation request is received, the NE checks the CID of i.e. in the format of:

8023&8024&RS-FRONT the session request against the CID as stoerd in the NE.

RS-FRONT is the RS-232 port on the POWER B


Management tile.

Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a

30..999 new one.

Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one.

1..999

1..999

This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory. It is typically 5 to 10 days.



Parameter name

Default

Parameter



Description

6-45

POINT

UOUT

LSTOI

180

60

1..999

1..999

IDENTIFIERS


Password Obsolescence Intervall in days. When a user receives a prompt to change the PID, no old

PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete. Typically it is about 180

UID Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session. Typically it is between 45 and 90.



6.3.6.4 Retrieve User Account Parameters

To retrieve user account parameters, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

RTRV-USER::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-USER::

USERNAME

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID

CID

Default

Parameter


UAP

PAGE 90


RS-FRONT,

RS-REAR. Each port separated with a “&”.


When a session initiation request is received, the NE checks the CID of i.e. in the format of:

8023&8024&RS-FRONT the session request against the CID as stored in the NE.

RS-FRONT is the RS-232 port on the POWER B.


Management tile.

Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a new one.

30..999 Password Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall, the user receives a prompt that the existing password has to be replaced with a


6-46

Parameter name

Default

Parameter



PCND

PCNN

POINT

UOUT

LSTOI

7

5

180

60

1..999

1..999

1..999

1..999

IDENTIFIERS new one.

This is an intervall signifying the number of days that a user can use the existing password before an update becomes mandatory. It is typically 5 to 10 days.



Password Obsolescence Intervall in days. When a user receives a prompt to change the PID, no old

PID can be restored unless the intervall POINT expires since that old PID became obsolete. Typically it is about 180

UID Aging Intervall in days. At the end of this intervall the UID is disabled if during this intervall it has never been used to set up a session. Typically it is between 45 and 90.




6-47

6.3.6.5 Delete an User Account

To delete a user account, the following command is required.


Input Syntax

DLT-USER-SECU::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

DLT-USER-SECU::

USERNAME

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID

Default

Parameter



6.3.6.6 Disabling or Enabling an User Account

To disable an existing user without deleting the user account, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

INH-USER-SECU::: ctag ::

uid

;

Example:

INH-USER-SECU::: MYCTAG ::

USERNAME

;

To enable an existing user currently disabled, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ALW-USER-SECU::: ctag ::

uid

;

Example:

ALW-USER-SECU::: MYCTAG ::

USERNAME

;

Parameter name

AID

Default

Parameter




6-48


6.4 General Parameters and Information

This section contains general information and setting such as :

 Setting the 5548C’s shelf name

 Setting the time and date

 Checking the inventory and retrieving the 5548C type information

 Checking card operation state

 Deleting a card for empty slots

 Swapping active card within a group (i.e. INC-A to INC-B)

 Initializing card firmware

6.4.1 Set the 5548C’s Name

To set the network element’s name, also called the source identifier, use the following command:

Input Syntax

SET-SID::: ctag ::

newsid

;

Example:

SET-SID::: MYCTAG ::

MY5548C

;

To retrieve the name, send the following TL1 command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-HDR::: ctag ;

Note:

The name of the 5548C shelf should be displayed in the first line of the response after sending any command.

Parameter name

NEWSID

Default

Parameter


A string limited to

20 Characters in the ranges “A” to

“Z” and “0” to “9”

Description

This is the source identifier of the 5548C


6-49


6.4.2 Time & Date

To set the time and the date in the 5548C, the following command can be sent.

Input Syntax

ED-DAT::: ctag :[

date

],[

time

],[

utcoffset

];

Example:

ED-DAT::: MYCTAG :

2006-10-05

,

10-30-00

,

8-00

;

Description Parameter name

DATE

TIME

Default Possible

Parameter configurations

2004-01-01…2099-12-

31

00-00-00…23-59-59

UTCOFFSET 02-00 -12-00…12-00

The date in the format of YYYY-

MM-DD

The time in the format of HH-MM-

SS

Offset between local time and UTC time in the format of HH-MM

6.4.2.2 Using SyncView PLUS

Open the Physical or Logical view and go to View  Local Time

Figure 6-6: SyncView PLUS: time and date


6-50


6.4.3 5548C Type Information and Inventory

6.4.3.1 5548C Type Information

Physically

The model number (Mod.) the serial number (No.) and the order reference, also called part or article number, (Order ref.) can be found on the right side of the shelf and on the 5548C shelf’s right ear.

Mod.

5548C

No.

XXX

Order ref.

A0XXXXX

Figure 6-7 : 5548C - SSU Physical Type Information

Using TL1

Retrieve information about the product using the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-NETYPE::: ctag ;

An answer similar to the following should be responded:

Output Syntax

“ vendor , model , netype , sw ”

;

Parameter Range Description name

VENDOR OSCILLOQUARTZ

MODEL 5548C

NETYPE

SW

SSU

01000…99999

This is the equipment vendor’s name

This is the equipment model’s name

This is the equipment type

This is the software release of the shelf

Table 6-9 5548C Type Information

To get the serial number of the shelf, the following command is required.


6-51


Input Syntax

RTRV-INV-SYS::: ctag ;

The response should be:

Output Syntax

“

serial

,

shelftype

”

;

Parameter name Range

SERIAL

SHELFTYPE

100…4294967295

SSU_L, SSU_S

Description

This is the equipment serial number

OSA 5548C SSU type

SSU_S: OSA 5548C SSU-E60

SSU_L: OSA 5548C SSU-E200

6.4.3.2 Inventory

Physically Inspection

Find the inventory of every single card at the following locations, illustrated below:

Serial Number

A0XXXXX

OUC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Article Number

Card type

Figure 6-8 : Article Number & Card Type Location


6-52


Note:

The “A0xxxxx” number located on the connector is not the card’s article number reference. Pleas refer to the “A0xxxxx” article number located on the bail handle.

Using TL1

With the following commands retrieve the inventory from either a single card, a group of cards or from all installed cards simultaneously.

Input Syntax

RTRV-INV::

aid

: ctag ;

Example

RTRV-INV::

INC-1-A

: MYCTAG ;

The response is formatted as below.

Output Syntax

“ aid : slot , article , serial , clei , eci , hw , sw , test , upgrade ”

;

Parameter name

AID


INC, INC-1, INC-2, INC-1-A…INC-2-

B, GPS, GPS-A, GPS-B, THC, THC-

A, THC-B, SGC, SGC-A, SGC-B,

OUC, OUC-1…OUC-10, OUC-1-

A…OUC-10-B, MAC, MAC-A, MAC-

B, ALL

SLOT

ARTICLE

SERIAL

CLEI

ECI

HW

SW

0…4294967295

1…9

0001…9999

LOADER 0001…9999

TEST

UPGRADE 2004-01-01…2099-12-31

Description

Abbreviation of the card, card group, card type or all cards. Refer to the section 6.2.1.3 for more details about abbreviations.

Article or part number

Hardware version of the related card

Software version embedded in the corresponding card

Loader version embedded in the corresponding card

Last software upgrade date


6-53

Using SyncView

Right Click on the element icon and select Inventory.


Figure 6-9: SyncView - Inventory

Via the File menu, the user can:

 save the inventory as a XML file

 print the inventory

The inventory is gathered once a day. The user can force a new synchronization of the Inventory of the shelf with the SyncView Database using the

Inventory

button.

Note:

The user can select the inventory list on and then copy with CTRL+C and paste in any document with CTRL+V


6-54


6.4.4 Checking the Card Operation States

There are 10 different states for each card or more precisely slots in the 5548C shelf, as below:

EMPTY

: The card slot is empty. This is not considered as an alarm.

Remedial action: Nothing except inserting a card in the slot.

EXTRACTED

: The card has been extracted from its respective slot. This is considered as an alarm.

Remedial action: Reinserting the card in the slot or deleting the card with command shown in section 6.4.5.

INIT

: The card firmware is being restarted

Remedial action: Wait for the completion of initialization.

DOWNLOAD

: The card firmware is being downloaded

Remedial action: Waiting until the end of the download or aborting the download.

OK

: The card is ACTIVE and is working correctly

Remedial action: No action required.

STANDBY

: The card is in STAND-BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group

Remedial action: Should you need to activate the card which shows this status, please refer to section 6.4.5.2 in order to replace the active card with this one.

ALARM

: The card is in alarm

Remedial action: Check the current alarm with the command RTRV-ALM and initiate corrective action accordingly.

DEGRADED

: The firmware version is different than the rest of the shelf

Remedial action: Upgrade the card firmware with the firmware stored in the MAC cards.

TESTERROR

: Invalid testing date. The card has encountered a mismatching error about the date when it has been tested

Remedial action: Contact your Oscilloquartz Customer Support service.

DEAD

: The MAC is not able to communicate with the card.

Remedial action: Restart the card software and contact the Oscilloquartz Customer

Support service.


6-55


The following command is required to obtain the current state from any card or slot.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OP::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OP::

INC-1-A

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

“

aid

:

opstate

”

;

Parameter Possible configurations name

AID INC-1-A…INC-2-B, GPS-A,

GPS-B, THC-A, THC-B, SGC-A,

SGC-B, OUC-1-A…OUC-10-B,

MAC-A, MAC-B

OPSTATE EMPTY, EXCTRACTED, INIT,

DOWNLOAD, OK, STANDBY,

ALARM, DEGRADED,

TESTERROR, DEAD

Default Description

OK

The specified card

There are different states:

EMPTY

: The card slot are empty

EXTRACTED

: The card has been extracted from its respective slot

INIT

: The card is being restarted

DOWNLOAD

: The group firmware is being downloaded

OK


STANDBY

: The card is in

STAND-BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group

ALARM

: The group is in alarm

DEGRADED

: The firmware version is not the same as the rest of the shelf

TESTERROR

: Invalid testing date

DEAD

: The MAC group is not able to communicate with the card or group


6-56


6.4.5 Card Deleting for Empty Slot

Previously empty slots that are populated automatically update the inventory list. If a previously occupied card is removed from its slot, the OSA 5548C SSU will set an alarm called “IMPROPER REMOVAL”.

To avoid such alarms, you can set the corresponding slot to an empty state, using the following command.

Note:

It is not possible to DELETE or set an empty card state to an

OCCUPIED slot.

Input Syntax

DLT-EQPT::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

DLT-EQPT::

INC-1-B

: ctag ;

Parameter name Possible configurations

AID INC-1-A, INC-2-B, GPS-A, GPS-B,

THC-A, THC-B, SGC-A, SGC-B,

OUC-1-A…OUC-10-B, MAC-A,

MAC-B

Description

Select the card’s slot you want to set as empty

Go to the Physical View  right-click on the empty slot shown in Black colour  set

empty


6-57


6.4.6 Switching the Active Card within a Card Group

To enable a switch between the currently active and the inactive (stand-by) card (e.g. from THC-A to THC-B):

 Physically on the shelf, by removal of the active card from its slot.

 By software, with the following TL1 command.


Switching INC, GPS and THC should be done during maintenance window period or before putting the 5548C in service as the output signal can be afftected with small phase jump.

Input Syntax

SW-DX::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

SW-DX::

THC

: MYCTAG ;

For retrieving the current active card, the following command is required. Many parameters will be returned, with focus upon card active or standby status.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OP::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OP::

THC

: ctag ;


Output Syntax

;

“

aid

:

opstate

”


6-58


Parameter Possible configurations Default Description name

AID

OPSTATE

INC-1, INC-2, GPS, THC, MAC

EMPTY, EXCTRACTED, INIT,

DOWNLOAD, OK, STANDBY,

ALARM, DEGRADED,

TESTERROR, DEAD

OK

The specified card

There are different status:

EMPTY

: The card slot are empty

EXTRACTED

: The card has been extracted from its respective slot

INIT

: The card is being restarted

DOWNLOAD


OK


STANDBY

: The card is in STAND-

BY and ready to protect the active card within the same group

ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD

: The MAC group is not able to communicate

Go to the Physical View  right-click on a protected pair of card (INC, GPS, THC) 

Switch


6-59


6.4.7 Card Firmware Initialization

To re-initialize the firmware embedded in one of the 5548C’s card, apply the TL1 command instructions below.

CAUTION

This command is SERVICE AFFECTING, and will require a consultation with a Customer Support & Services (CSS) representative to assess the potential of outage, and post-operation effects.

For those who are unfamiliar with this command, contact your local CSS for instructions, and always perform this command in MAINTENANCE

WINDOW PERIOD.

Please read the below warning before doing any initialization

Important Recommendation

During input card initialization, Timing signals passing through a card are interrupted, and the card will not feed other cards.

To prevent service outage on the shelf during a firmware upgrade that causes INC initialization, Oscilloquartz recommends that a redundant card be utilized to prevent shelf outage.

In example:

To initialize the INC-1-A, verify that the INC-1-B protection (1:1) card is operational, and switch service to that protection twin prior to update or initialization of the active INC-1-A.

The system will avoid loss of synchronization service, in the following circumstances:

1. The active THC will run in holdover if a lone INC is initializing.

2. If only a single INC is installed in either INC-1-A or INC-1-B slots and either 2.048MHz or E1 signal is qualified by the INC, the shelf will enter in passthrough mode during THC initialization.

3. MAC card initialization does not affect shelf synchronization functions.


6-60


Input Syntax

INIT-SYS::

aid

: ctag ::

restart

;

Example:

INIT-SYS::

THC-A

: MYCTAG ::

WARM

;


AID

RESTART

INC-1-A…INC-2-B, GPS-A, GPS-B,

THC-A, THC-B, SGC-A, SGC-B,

OUC-1-A…OUC-10-B, MAC-A,

MAC-B, ALL

COLD, WARM

Description

Select the card’s slot you want to set as empty

There are two type of restart:

COLD: is a restart with factory default card(s) settings

WARM: is a restart which maintains the current card(s) settings

6.4.8 Testing all the Cards' LEDs

There are two ways to test the 5548C SSU’s cards' LEDs, described in the following two sections.

6.4.8.1 Physical Lamp Test on the Shelf

STATUS

FUSE A

T 6,3A L 250V

Use the same type and style fuse

LAMP

TEST

A 0 x x x x

POWER A

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Physically there is a pushbutton on the POWER A (slot A21) card labeled “LAMP TEST”

Figure 6-10 : Physical Lamp Test

Once the LAMP TEST switch is pressed, follow the LAMP TEST sequence in section

6.4.8.3


6-61


6.4.8.2 Lamp Test Using Software

The following TL1 command will have the same effect as pressing the LAMP TEST switch on the shelf.

Input Syntax

OPR-LEDS::: ctag ;

Once the LAMP TEST command sent, where it is possible to see the shelf physically, follow the LAMP TEST sequence in section 6.4.8.3 that describes point by point what the shelf is supposed to do.

6.4.8.3 Lamp Test Sequence

Once the LAMP TEST switch has been pressed or the command OPR-LEDS has been sent, the 5548C will react as follow. The lamp test takes approximately 10 seconds.

Seq.

1

2

DESCRIPTION

All LEDs are lit, and bicolor LEDs in RED for 5 seconds

The bicolor LEDs are Green for 5 more seconds while monocolor LEDs remain lit

3 All LED are restored on their previous state

Table 6-10 Lamp Test Sequence


6-62


6.5 Input Line (IL) Properties & INput Card (INC)

Configurations


The OSA 5548C has the capability to connect up to 4 Input lines among 8 input connectors (4 for E1 signal and 4 for Frequency). There are also 2 connectors to connect up to two GPS antennas to get an additional PRS quality input line when

GPS cards are locked on GPS signal.

The 5548C allows several customizable configurations for each IL and INC:

 Input port(s) assignment:

To assign any port connector to an input line.

 Enabling/Disabling or Monitoring a line:

To enable a new line, to disable a line or to monitor an input signal without allowing the OSA 5548C to select it.

 Configuring a line as terminated or bridged:

To select the type of hardware connection.

 E1 signal configuration:

To configure the E1 signal corresponding to the signal fed.

 Adding a restore delay once a line is detected as valid:

To delay the premature selection of an input source that is in the process of recovery.


6-63


6.5.2 Input connector to Input Line (IL) description

The OSA 5548C allows configuration of up to 5 inputs from two groups of 4 inputs plus 1 input from any of the GPS input ports.

INC-1-A (A1)

INC-1-B (A2)

IL-1-1

IL-1-2

IL-1-3

IL-1-4

IL-2-1

IL-2-2

IL-2-3

IL-2-4

STATUS STATUS

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IL-1-1 (1)

IL-1-2 (2)

IL-1-3 (3)

IL-1-4 (4)

STATUS STA TUS

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IL-2-1 (5)

IL-2-2 (6)

IL-2-3 (7)

IL-2-4 (8)

GPS-A (A4)

GPS-B (A5)

GPS (G)

GPS 1

GPS 2

STATUS STATUS

GPS

OCXO

GPS

OCXO

INC-2-A (A3)

INC-2-B (A4)

Figure 6-11 : Input Connector Assignment

The arrows on the above figure are the Input Lines (IL), which are “virtual” lines between connectors and INput Cards (INC). The IL are configurable with TL1 commands or via management software.

Each INC can be configured to connect to any of the 8 ports within that group through the IL.

Example:

The operator can assign IL-1-2, which is the second IL of the INC group 1 to Input connectors E1 #1 to #4 or input connectors FREQ. #1 to #4.

Note:

The number between brackets on the IL is what the active THC card indicates on their digital display when the IL is selected as a reference for the 5548C.


6-64


With respect to group configuration, this chart describes all of the possible configurations.

Input Port

Abbreviation

Input line abbreviation

(GROUP-LINE)

E1 IN1

E1 IN2

E1 IN3

E1 IN4 f IN1 f IN2 f IN3 f IN4

E1 IN1

E1 IN2

E1 IN3

E1 IN4 f IN1 f IN2 f IN3 f IN4

E1_1

E1_2

E1_3

E1_4

FREQ_1

FREQ_2

FREQ_3

FREQ_4

E1_1

E1_2

E1_3

E1_4

FREQ_1

FREQ_2

FREQ_3

FREQ_4

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

Cards

GPS 1

GPS GPS

GPS 2

Table 6-11 Possible Input Configurations

6.5.3 Retrieving Current Input Configuration

This section describes how to check the current Input Line (IL) and INput Card (INC) configuration.

 The Input Lines (IL)

For retrieving the configuration and editing the Input lines.

 The INput Card (INC)

For retrieving the status of the INC’s group, retrieving the active card (A or B) in each group, retrieving the SSM and the Performance state (ON, OFF, …)


6-65


This section describes how to retrieve and how to configure the configuration for the

Input lines in a global view. To learn about every single parameter, follow the next sections.

Note:

section to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

1-1

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

“

aid

:

opstate

,

ssm

, INPUT=input , ADM_STATE =adm_state , TERM=term ,

CODE=code , WTR=wtr , FRCD=frcd , OOF_DETECT=oof_detect ,

CRC4_DETECT=crc4_detect , BPV_DETECT=bpv_detect , SA4=sa4 ,

SA5=sa5 , SA6=sa6 , SA7=sa7 , SA8=sa8 , FREQ=freq , TAG=tag ”

;

To edit all configurations in one single line, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag ::[ INPUT=input ],[ ADM_STATE=adm_state ],

[ TERMINATION=termination ],[ CODE=code ],[ WTR=wtr ],

[ OOF_DETECT=oof_detect ],[ FRCD=frcd ],[ CRC4_DETECT=crc4_detect ],

[ BPV_DETECT=bpv_detect ],[ SSM_BIT=ssm_bit ],[ TAG=tag ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-2

: MYCTAG :: INPUT=E1_2 , ADM_STATE=ENABLED ,

TERMINATION=TERMINATED , CODE=HDB3 , WTR=1 ,

OOF_DETECT=ENABLED , FRCD=NONE , CRC4_DETECT=DISABLED ,

BPV_DETECT=DISABLED , SSM_BIT=SA4 , TAG=”My Second E1 Input Line” ;


6-66

Parameter name

AID

OPSTATE*


1-1…2-4, ALL*

OK, ALARM, WTR

Default parameters

OK


Description

This is the input line abbreviation.

The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number (1-1/2/3/4, 2-1/1/2/3/4).

There are different operational input line states:

OK: The line is running correctly

ALARM: The line is in alarm

WTR: The line is being in wait-torestore time mode

This is the input line SSM quality SSM*

INPUT

ADM_STATE

TERMINATION TERMINATED,

CODE

WTR

FRCD

PRC, SSU_A ,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

NONE, FAILED,

DISABLED

E1_1, E1_2, E1_3,

E1_4, FREQ_1,

FREQ_2, FREQ_3,

FREQ_4

DISABLED,

MONITORED,

ENABLED

NONE

BRIDGED, UNK*

HDB3, AMI

DISABLED, 1…12

PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

NONE

OOF_DETECT DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2

This is the port/connector assigned to the Input Line (IL).

ENABLED This is the status of the line:

DISABLED: The input line is disabled and hence cannot be selected by the 5548C.

MONITORED: The line is monitored but cannot be selected as reference by the 5548C.

ENABLED: The line is enabled and can be selected by the 5548C

TERMINATED Input connector connection type

HDB3

DISABLED

NONE

ENABLED

Code type of the E1 signal

This is the delay in minutes before that the 5548C is allowed to select an input line recovered

This is the forced SSM quality set for the corresponding line

Determine whether an Out Of

Frame alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 or 10-2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold (i.e.

10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2). In that case, an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number

(4000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected Threshold.


6-67

Parameter Possible name configurations

CRC4_DETECT DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2


DISABLED

BPV_DETECT

SA4*

SA5*

SA6*

SA7*

SA8*

SSM_BIT

FREQ

TAG

*

DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

SA4, SA5, SA6, SA7,

SA8, NONE

2.048M, 5M, 10M,

INVALID

”My Tag with up to

32 chars.”

DISABLED

SA4

2.048M


Description

Determine whether an CRC-4 alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold (i.e.

10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2) In that case, an alarm is produced when false CRC-4 values rate of the total number (1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected

Threshold.

Determine whether a Bipolar

Violation (BPV) alarm when using

AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 corresponds to the alarm detection threshold (i.e.

10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2). In that case, an alarm is produced when

BPV or CV rate of the total number

(2.048E

6

) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected Threshold.

Value of the Sa4 bit





Sa bit used to transmit the SSM quality

If the line is assigned to a frequency input, this is the frequency detected by the INC

Double quoted tag. Up to 32 characters, alphabetic upper and lower case, numeric and punctuation.

*

Not configurable with software


6-68


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  Input 1…8  Details

Input Line

Connector

Termination type

Sa Bit

E1 Code type

Wait To Restore

(WTR) Time function

Figure 6-12: SyncView: Input Configuration Window

Performance state

Input alarm detection types


6-69


This section explains how to retrieve the configuration of each INC group.

Important Note:

The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual INC card status.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-INC:

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-INC:

1

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

;

“

aid

:

opstate

:

SSM

=ssm , PERF=perf , SYS_MODE=sys_mode ”

Parameter name

AID

OPSTATE

SSM

PERF

SYS_MODE


1

EMPTY,

EXCTRACTED,

INIT,

DOWNLOAD,

OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR,

DEAD

OFF, ON

MST, EXP, INV


OK

OFF

OFF, ON, ALARM ON

MST

Description

This is the INC group number

There are different INC group states:

EMPTY

: The group slots are empty

EXTRACTED

: The group has been extracted from their respective slots

INIT

: The group is being restarted

DOWNLOAD


OK

: The group is running correctly

ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD


Indicates if the SSM is ON or OFF

Indicates if the PERFORMANCE

MEASUREMENT is activated, deactivated or in alarm

5548C system mode.

MST: MASTER shelf; EXP:

EXPANSION shelf; INV: Invalid


6-70


6.5.4 Input Connector Assignment

6.5.4.1 Editing the Input Lines

To assign an input line to any connector in the related group, the following command can be sent.

Note:

To retrieve current IL configuration, refer to section 6.5.3.

Read section Input connector to Input Line (IL) description to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input ports.


We recommend using any of the Input Connectors number 1 (E1_1 or

FREQ_1) for Input Line (IL) 1, Input Connector 2 for IL 2, Input

Connector 3 for IL3 and Input Connector 4 for IL 4.

So the user knows what Input Line corresponds to what connector without the need to access the shelf with software for retrieving and knowing current Input configuration.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: INPUT=input ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-3

: MYCTAG :: INPUT=E1_3 ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4

Description

INPUT E1_1, E1_2, E1_3,

E1_4, FREQ_1,

FREQ_2, FREQ_3,

FREQ_4

This is the input line abbreviation. The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number (1-1/2/3/4; 2-1/2/3/4).

This is the port/connector assigned to the related line.

Table 6-12 Input Line Editing Setting


6-71


Important:

We do not recommend selecting the same input connector to more than one input line (IL) for evident reason of operation reliability.

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  Input 1…8  Details

Input Line

Connector

Select the input type to be applied on the specified line.

 FREQ_1 to 4 are the

Frequency connectors (2.048, 5,

10 MHz)

 E1_1 to 4 are the E1 connectors.

(2.048 Mbit/s)

Figure 6-13: SyncView: Input Type configuration Window


6-72


6.5.5 Enabling, Disabling or Monitoring an Input Line

Disable any unused Input Lines to avoid alarms.

Use the Monitoring function to assess an Input Line prior to enabling that line into service.

The following example demonstrates the administration states of Enabled, Disabled and Monitored on any input line.

Note:


Using TL1

Read section Input connector to Input Line (IL) description to understand the concept of cross conection of input lines to physical input ports.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: ADM_STATE=adm_state ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-3

: MYCTAG :: ADM_STATE=ENABLED ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4


Description

ADM_STATE DISABLED,

MONITORED,

ENABLED

ENABLED

This is the input line abbreviation. The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number (1-

1/2/3/4; 2-1/2/3/4).

This is the administrative state of the line:

DISABLED: The input line is disabled and hence cannot be selected by the

5548C.

MONITORED: The line is monitored but cannot be selected by the 5548C.

ENABLED: The line is enabled and hence, can be taken by the 5548C

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  Input 1…8  Enabled /

Disabled

/ Monitored


6-73


6.5.6 Input Line Termination

It is important to set the input line termination before using its signal because it selects the corresponding input impedance.

Bridging

Configuration for derived input connection (-20dB). The input impedance is 1k ohms.

In Example, the E1 traffic line IN and OUT is connected in parallel to the same input connector.

Terminating

The input cable is terminated by the 5548C with an impedance of 75 ohms or 120 ohms with 120/75 ohms adapter (Balun).

Note:



Using TL1

The TL1 command to edit the termination is the following:

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: TERMINATION=termination ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-1

: MYCTAG :: TERMINATION=BRIDGED ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4

Default Description parameters


The first digit is the group number and the second digit is the input number (1-1/2/3/4; 2-1/2/3/4).

TERMINATED Input hardware connection type TERMINATION TERMINATED,

BRIDGED

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  Input 1…8  Details 

Termination


6-74


6.5.7 E1 Input Line Configuration

This section describes how to configure an E1 input lines. Different parameters can be provisioned, such as:

 Code (AMI or HDB3)

 Alarm detection (OOF, CRC-4, BPV, CV)

Two different E1 code types can be fed to the 5548C SSU, such as the following:

AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion

AMI is an encoding technique made by a synchronized clock and using bipolar pulses

(transmission of positive and negative pulses) to represent a logic state 1. A logic state 0 is not represented by any symbol and a logic state 1 by alternated pulses.

Example of AMI encoding:

Bits format

"1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0" is encoded as

"+ 0 0 0 0 - +"

HDB3: High Density Bipolar Order 3

HDB3 is bipolar signal based on the AMI encoding with a violation code insertion each time there is more than 3 logic states 0

Data transmitted Encoded by HDB3

0 0

1 Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

0000

000V (three 0 and a violation)

0000 0000 B00V B00V

Examples of HDB3 encoding

Example 1:

Binary codes combination

"1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0" is encoded by HDB3 in

"+ 0 0 0 V - + 0"

Exemple 2:

Binary codes combination

"1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0" is encoded in HDB3 in

"+ 0 - 0 0 0 V 0 + - B 0 0 V - + B 0 0 V 0 0"


6-75


Note:

U sing TL1

Input Syntax

To retrieve current IL configuration, refer to section 6.5.3


ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag ::[ CODE=code ];

Example :

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-3

: MYCTAG :: CODE=HDB3 ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4


Description

CODE HDB3, AMI HDB3



Code type of the E1 signal

Using SynManager

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Input 1…8  Details  Code

The 5548C has the capability to detect different alarms related to E1 signal. There is also the capability to set customized threshold for alarm detection.

The following thresholds can be selected for each type of alarm detection:

10E-04

, 10E-03 and 10E-02.

The alarms are:

 Out Of Frame (OOF) o

When SSM is enabled and frame type is PCM31 o

When 3 consecutive incorrect FAS words (ITU-T G.706) o

If Threshold alarm is enabled, additionally to the above criteria, when false words rate of the total number (4000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

 CRC-4 alarm


6-76


o

When at least 915 CRC-4 values are false on a total of 1000 (ITU-T

G.706) o

If Threshold alarm is enabled, additionally to the above criteria, when false CRC-4 values rate of the total number (1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

 BiPolar Violation (BPV) when the code is AMI or

Code Violation (CV)

when the code is HDB3 o

1 or more BPV or CV detected during an interval of 1s o

If Threshold alarm is enabled, additionally to the above criterias, when

BPV or CV rate of the total number (2.048E+06) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected.

Note:



Using TL1

The following command is required to retrieve the current configuration.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

1-1

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

“

aid

:opstate,ssm,INPUT=input,ADM_STATE=adm_state,TERM=te rm,CODE=code,WTR=wtr,FRCD=frcd, OOF_DETECT=oof_detect ,

CRC4_DETECT=crc4_detect , BPV_DETECT=bpv_detect ,SA4=sa4,

SA5=sa5,SA6=sa6,SA7=sa7,SA8=sa8,FREQ=freq,TAG=tag”

;

To edit the alarm detection configuration in one single line, the following command is required.

Input Syntax


6-77


ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: OOF_DETECT=oof_detect ,

CRC4_DETECT=crc4_detect , BPV_DETECT=bpv_detect ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-2

: MYCTAG :: OOF_DETECT=ENABLED ,

CRC4_DETECT=10-2 , BPV_DETECT=DISABLED ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4, ALL*

OOF_DETECT DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2

CRC4_DETECT DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2

BPV_DETECT DISABLED,

ENABLED, 10-4, 10-

3, 10-2


ENABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED

Description



Determine whether an Out Of

Frame alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 or 10-2 means that the alarms are enabled with a specific threshold (i.e. 10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-

2). In that case, an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number (4000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected

Threshold.

Determine whether an CRC-4 alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 enables the alarm detection threshold (i.e. 10E-

4, 10E-3 or 10E-2) In that case, an alarm is produced when false CRC-

4 values rate of the total number

(1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

Determine whether a Bipolar

Violation (BPV) alarm when using

AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 enables the alarm detection threshold (i.e. 10E-

4, 10E-3 or 10E-2). In that case, an alarm is produced when BPV or CV rate of the total number

(2.048E+06) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

*


Using SyncView


Input Alarm Detection


6-78


Out Of Frame

CRC-4

BiPolar Violation

CRC-4

Alarm Type

Out Of Frame

Configuration Description

 DISABLED

 ENABLED

 10-4

 10-3

 10-2

Determine whether an Out Of Frame alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 or 10-2 means that the alarms are enabled with a specific threshold (i.e. 10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2). In that case, an alarm is produced when false words rate of the total number (4000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected Threshold.

Determine whether a CRC-4 alarm should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 enables the alarm detection threshold

(i.e. 10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2) In that case, an alarm is produced when false CRC-4 values rate of the total number (1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected Threshold


6-79

BPV


Determine whether a Bipolar Violation (BPV) alarm when using AMI code or Code Violation alarm when using HDB3 code should be detected and generated or not.

10-4, 10-3 & 10-2 enables the alarm detection threshold

(i.e. 10E-4, 10E-3 or 10E-2). In that case, an alarm is produced when BPV or CV rate of the total number

(2.048E+06) during 1s, is higher or equal than the selected Threshold

6.5.8 Wait-To-Restore Time (WTR)

WTR time is an interval of delay in the acceptance of an input once it has been restored. This function is useful to avoid intermittent hysterysis switching affecting the

5548C clock stability. WTR interval is selectable from Disabled to 12 minutes.

The following is an example with two input lines, E1-a and E1-b set with a WTR time.

The E1-a line is set with the highest priority:

E1-a with 1st priority

To the 5548C

E1-b with 2nd priority

1. Steady state

Both E1-a & -b are currently working correctly. The E1-a is selected by the 5548C as it has the highest priority.


To the 5548C


2. Sudden line failure

Suddenly the E1-a line is broken for an unknown reason.

The 5548C has selected the E1-b line in consequence.


To the 5548C


3. Wait-To-Restore time

After a while, the E1-a line has been recovered.

But the 5548C waits for the WTR time to elapse before re-establishing the line.


6-80


To the 5548C


4. Line restoring

Once the WTR time has elapsed, the 5548C reselects the E1-a line as

1 st

priority.


Note:

Using TL1

Input Syntax



ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: WTR=wtr

;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-1

: MYCTAG :: WTR=10

;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4


Description

WTR DISABLED, 1…12 1



This is the delay in minute before that the 5548C is allowed to select a recovered input line


6-81


When a line is in Wait-to-restore time, it is possible to manually clear the remaining time using the following command:

Input Syntax

INIT-WTR::

aid

: ctag

;

Example:

INIT-WTR::

IL-1-1

: MYCTAG

;

Parameter name

AID

Possible Default configurations

IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS

parameters

Description

This parameter is the line to be configured to clear the remaining

WTR time

Using SyncView


Wait to restore Time

Enter here the delay of WTR. It must be between 1 and 12 minutes.

Figure 6-14: SyncView - WTR time


When the Input is being in WTR mode, the user can stop the WTR countdown by pushing the “Clear”

Button

Enable or Disable the

WTR function

6-82



Up to two GPS cards can be inserted in the OSA 5548C to get an additional PRS quality input line when GPS cards are locked on GPS signal.

The 5548C allows various properties on GPS input:

 GPS Card State

To retrieve the GPS cards operation status.

 GPS Input Properties

To retrieve the GPS Input properties configuration.

 GPS Position

To retrieve the current GPS position

 GPS Time

To retrieve the GPS time

6.6.2 GPS Card (GPS) Group State

This section explains how to retrieve the state of the GPS group.


The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual GPS card status.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPSC::: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPSC::: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

;

“

opstate

: SSM=ssm , PERF=perf , SYS_MODE=sys_mode ”


6-83

Parameter name

OPSTATE

SSM

PERF

SYS_MODE


EMPTY,

EXCTRACTED,

INIT,

DOWNLOAD,

OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR,

DEAD

OFF, ON

MST, EXP, INV


OK

OFF

OFF, ON, ALARM ON

MST


Description


EMPTY


EXTRACTED


INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD





5548C system mode.



6.6.3 GPS Input Properties

Various parameters can be configured and shown in the GPS according, such as:

PPS Offset

The user can set the GPS antenna cable propagation delay between GPS antenna and GPS receiver (3.92ns per meter for LMR-400 cable) in order to trig the PPS phase as close as possible to the UTC time. E.g for 60m + 10m of LMR-400 cable, the PPS offset would be: 70 x 3.92= 274 ns. Add 10ns when a GPS in-line amplifier is mounted along the cable.

Note:

The offset must be negative when setting the PPS delay from the

Antenna (e.g. -274 ns) as it is an anticipation of the GPS receiver clock of the time received on the GPS antenna

Changing the PPS offset affects the PPS output only. The GPS card indicates an alarm during a few seconds.

Administrative State

Like the Input Lines, the GPS input lines can be:

 Enabled to activate the selection and qualify the line,

 Monitored to allow the performance measurement of the line but ignoring it within the Input selection

 Disabled to deactivate the line.


6-84


Indoor

In “Urban Canyon” locations, the GPS can be set as Indoor mode to operate with only one GPS satellite tracked. The user must set manually the GPS position (latitude, longitude and altitude) when using the Indoor mode.

Elevation

To avoid receiving bad GPS signal from reflection an elevation mask can be set to decrease the reception angle of the antenna.

Elevation Mask

GPS Antenna

Forced

The GPS card can generate a user-defined SSM quality for input selection in SSM mode. When the Forced mode is not enabled, the SSM quality supplied are the following:



PRC when the GPS signal is tracked



DNU when the GPS signal is not tracked

Visible

Number of Satellites Vehicles available from the GPS antenna location.

Tracked

Number of Satellites vehicles currently tracked by the GPS receiver, at least 4 must be tracked to determine the GPS antenna position and one if the position is entered in

Indoor mode. The GPS receiver can track up to 12 Satellites vehicles at the same time.

Note:

The properties are those of the active GPS card


6-85


Using TL1

To retrieve the current GPS Properties, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

opstate

,

ssm

: PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset , ADM_STATE=adm_state ,

INDOOR=indoor , ELEVATION=elevation ,

FRCD=frcd , VISIBLE=visible , TRACKED=tracked "

;

To edit all the parameters, send the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GPS::: ctag ::[ PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset ],

[ ADM_STATE=adm_state ],[ INDOOR=indoor ],

[ ELEVATION=elevation ],[ FRCD=frcd ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-GPS::: MYCTAG :: PPS_OFFSET=274 , ADM_STATE=ENABLED ,

INDOOR=OFF , ELEVATION=15 , FRCD=NONE ;

Parameter name

OPSTATE


OK, ALARM,

PERFALARM


Depends on state.

SSM PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC,

DNU, NONE,

DISABLED

PRC when locked; DNU when unlocked

PPS_OFFSET -999'999..999'999 0

ADM_STATE ENABLED,

MONITORED,

DISABLED

ENABLED

Description

GPS Operation state:

OK: The system works correctly

ALARM: GPS reception in alarm

PRFALARM: Performance crosses the quality threshold

SSM quality supplied by the GPS group.

Administrative state of the line:

ENABLED: the line can be selected; MONITORED: the line is measured but ignored for selection; DISABLED:The line is deactivated


6-86

Parameter name

INDOOR


ON, OFF

ELEVATION 5 to 90


OFF

10


Description

Enable the GPS to track only one satellite instead of four. In that case a fixed position must be programmed.

Elevation mask in degrees.

Satellites below this mask are not taken into account.

FRCD

VISIBLE

TRACKED

PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC,

DNU, NONE

0…12

0…12

0

0

Number of available satellites

Number of tracked satellites

6.6.3.1 PPS Offser and Elevation Mask Setting

Using TL1

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GPS::: ctag ::[ PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset ],

[ ELEVATION=elevation ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-GPS::: MYCTAG :: PPS_OFFSET=274 , ELEVATION=15 ;

Parameter Possible Default name configurations parameters

PPS_OFFSET -999'999..999'999 0

ELEVATION 5 to 90 10

Description




6-87


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  GPS Input  Details 

General

tab

PPS Offset

Elevation mask


6-88


Using TL1

To enable or disable the Indoor mode, send the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GPS::: ctag ::[ INDOOR=indoor ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-GPS::: MYCTAG :: INDOOR=ON ;


6-89


To retrieve the position set, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-FPOS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-FPOS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

"

;

To edit the position, send the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-FPOS::: ctag ::

lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

;

Example:


lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

;

Parameter name

INDOOR


ON, OFF

N, S


OFF

N

Description


Latitude LAT

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

LONG

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

ALT

0…9999

E, W

0…9999

999..18'000

0

E

0

0

Fraction of minute

Longitude

Fraction of minute

Altitude in meters


6-90


Using SyncView


Position

tab

Indoor Mode activation

Position of GPS

Antenna location

Using TL1

To retrieve the number of available (visible) and tracked satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPS::: MYCTAG

;


6-91



Output Syntax

"opstate,ssm: PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset,ADM_STATE=adm_state,

INDOOR=indoor,ELEVATION=elevation,

FRCD=frcd, VISIBLE=visible , TRACKED=tracked "

;

To retrieve the list of Visible satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-VSAT::

aid

: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-VSAT::

1

: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: SAT_ID=sat_id , ELEVATION=elevation , BEARING=bearing ,

SNR=snr , HEALTH=health "

;

To retrieve the list of Tracked satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-TSAT::

aid

: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-TSAT::

1

: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: SAT_ID=sat_id "

;


6-92


Parameter Possible Default Description name

VISIBLE

TRACKED

AID

SAT_ID

configurations

0…12

0…12

1..12, ALL

parameters

0

0



Specify the Satellite number

ELEVATION 5…90 angle of the satellite in degrees

BEARING 0…359 Polar Coordinate in degrees

SNR 0…99

HEALTH NO_ALMANAC,

UNHEALTHY,

HEALTHY

Signal noise ratio in dBHz. Only available on tracked satellites.

Satellite’s health. Satellite must be healthy to be tracked.

Using SyncView


Satellites

tab

Description Parameter Possible name

ID

configurations

1…32

ELEVATION 5…90

BEARING 0…359

SNR 0…99

HEALTH

TRACKED

NO_ALMANAC,

UNHEALTHY,

HEALTHY

YES, NO

Identification number of satellite

Elevation angle of the satellite in degrees

Polar Coordinate in degrees



Whether satellite is tracked or not


6-93


Once the GPS card has tracked 4 satellites, or 1 in Indoor mode, it can show the antenna position.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-POS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-POS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

"

;

Parameter name

LAT

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

LONG

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

ALT


N, S

0…9999

E, W

0…9999

999..18'000


N

0

E

0

0

Description

Latitude

Fraction of minute

Longitude

Fraction of minute

Altitude in meters


6-94


Using SyncView


Position

tab

GPS Position


6-95


To retrieve the GPS time, send the following command

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPSTIME::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPSTIME::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

" WEEK=week,SEC=sec "

;

Parameter name

WEEK

SEC

Possible Default Description configurations

0…3182

parameters

Week number since 6. January

1980

0…604799 Degrees


6-96



Up to two GNSS cards can be inserted in the OSA 5548C to get an additional PRS quality input line when GNSS cards are locked on GNSS signal.

The 5548C allows various properties on GNSS input:

 GNSS Card State

To retrieve the GNSS cards operation status.

 GNSS Input Properties

To retrieve the GNSS Input properties configuration.

 GNSS Position

To retrieve the current GNSS position

 GNSS Time

To retrieve the GNSS time

6.7.2 GNSS Card (GNSS) Group State

This section explains how to retrieve the state of the GNSS group.


The command response refers to the INC group status and not to individual GNSS card status.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPSC::: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPSC::: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

;

“

opstate

: SSM=ssm , PERF=perf , SYS_MODE=sys_mode ”


6-97

Parameter name

OPSTATE

SSM

PERF

SYS_MODE


EMPTY,

EXCTRACTED,

INIT,

DOWNLOAD,

OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR,

DEAD

OFF, ON

MST, EXP, INV


OK

OFF

OFF, ON, ALARM ON

MST


Description


EMPTY


EXTRACTED


INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD





5548C system mode.



6.7.3 GNSS Input Properties

Various parameters can be configured and shown in the GNSS according, such as:

PPS Offset

The user can set the GNSS antenna cable propagation delay between GNSS antenna and GNSS receiver (3.92ns per meter for LMR-400 cable) in order to trig the

PPS phase as close as possible to the UTC time. E.g for 60m + 10m of LMR-400 cable, the PPS offset would be: 70 x 3.92= 274 ns. Add 10ns when a GNSS in-line amplifier is mounted along the cable.

Note:

The offset must be negative when setting the PPS delay from the

Antenna (e.g. -274 ns) as it is an anticipation of the GNSS receiver clock of the time received on the GNSS antenna

Changing the PPS offset affecst the PPS output only. The GNSS card indicates an alarm during a few seconds.

Administrative State

Like the Input Lines, the GNSS input lines can be:

 Enabled to activate the selection and qualify the line,

 Monitored to allow the performance measurement of the line but ignoring it within the Input selection

 Disabled to deactivate the line.


6-98


Indoor

In “Urban Canyon” locations, the GNSS can be set as Indoor mode to operate with only one GNSS satellite tracked. The user must set manually the GNSS position

(latitude, longitude and altitude) when using the Indoor mode.

Elevation

To avoid receiving bad GNSS signal from reflection an elevation mask can be set to decrease the reception angle of the antenna.

Elevation Mask

GNSS Antenna

Forced

The GNSS card can generate a user-defined SSM quality for input selection in SSM mode. When the Forced mode is not enabled, the SSM quality supplied are the following:



PRC when the GNSS signal is tracked



DNU when the GNSS signal is not tracked

Visible

Number of Satellites Vehicles available from the GNSS antenna location.

Tracked

Number of Satellites vehicles currently tracked by the GNSS receiver, at least 4 must be tracked to determine the GNSS antenna position and one if the position is entered in Indoor mode. The GNSS receiver can track up to 12 Satellites vehicles at the same time.

Note:

The properties are those of the active GNSS card


6-99


Using TL1

To retrieve the current GNSS Properties, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

opstate

,

ssm

: PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset , ADM_STATE=adm_state ,

INDOOR=indoor , ELEVATION=elevation ,

FRCD=frcd , VISIBLE=visible , TRACKED=tracked "

;

To edit all the parameters, send the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GNSS::: ctag :: GLN-A/GLN-

B:CTAG: [ PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset ],[ INDOOR=indoor ],

[ ELEVATION=elevation],[ANTENA_STATE=enable/disable],[GNSS_MODE=

GPS¦&GLONASS¦&SBAS];;

Example:

ED-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A:MYCTAG::PPS_OFFSET=274 ,

INDOOR=OFF , ELEVATION=15 , ANTENA_STATE=ENABLE,

GNSS_MODE=GPS&GLONASS

;

Parameter Possible name configurations

ALARM,

PERFALARM


Depends on state.

SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC,

PRC when locked; DNU

DNU, NONE,

DISABLED when unlocked

PPS_OFFSET -999'999..999'999 0

Description

GPS Operation state:

OK: The system works correctly

ALARM: GPS reception in alarm

PRFALARM: Performance crosses the quality threshold

SSM quality supplied by the GPS group.


6-100

ADM_STATE ENABLED,

MONITORED,

DISABLED

INDOOR ON, OFF

ELEVATION 5 to 90

ENABLED

OFF

10


Administrative state of the line:

ENABLED: the line can be selected; MONITORED: the line is measured but ignored for selection; DISABLED:The line is deactivated




FRCD PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC,

6.6.2.1 P

VISIBLE 0…32

TRACKED 0…24

0

0



6.7.3.1 PPS Offset and Elevation Mask Setting

Using TL1

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A:ctag ::[ PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset ],

[ ELEVATION=elevation ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-GPS:: GLN-A:MYCTAG :: PPS_OFFSET=274 , ELEVATION=15 ;


PPS_OFFSET -999'999..999'999 0

ELEVATION 5 to 90 10

Description




6-101


Using SyncView


General

tab

PPS Offset

Elevation mask


6-102


Using TL1

To enable or disable the Indoor mode, send the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A:ctag ::[ INDOOR=indoor ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A:MYCTAG :: INDOOR=ON ;

To retrieve the position set, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-FPOS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-FPOS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

"

;


6-103


To edit the position, send the following command.

Input Syntax


lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

;

Example:


lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

;

Parameter name

INDOOR


ON, OFF

N, S


OFF

N

Description


Latitude LAT

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

LONG

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

ALT

0…9999

E, W

0…9999

999..18'000

0

E

0

0

Fraction of minute

Longitude

Fraction of minute

Altitude in meters


6-104


Using SyncView


Position

tab

Indoor Mode activation

Position of GPS

Antenna location

Using TL1

To retrieve the number of available (visible) and tracked satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A/GLN-B:ctag;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS:: GLN-A:MYCTAG

;


6-105



Output Syntax

"opstate,ssm: PPS_OFFSET=pps_offset,ADM_STATE=adm_state,

INDOOR=indoor,ELEVATION=elevation,

FRCD=frcd,VISIBLE=visible,TRACKED=tracked"

;

To retrieve the list of Visible satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS-VSAT::

aid

: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS-VSAT::

1

: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: SAT_ID=sat_id , ELEVATION=elevation , BEARING=bearing ,

SNR=snr , HEALTH=health "

;

To retrieve the list of Tracked satellites, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS-TSAT::

aid

: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GNSS-TSAT::

1

: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: SAT_ID=sat_id "

;


6-106



VISIBLE

TRACKED

AID

SAT_ID

configurations

0…32

0…24

0..32, ALL

1…32 +37…69

parameters

0

0



Specify the Satellite number


ELEVATION 5…90 angle of the satellite in degrees

BEARING 0…359 Polar Coordinate in degrees

SNR 0…99

HEALTH NO_ALMANAC,

UNHEALTHY,

HEALTHY



Using SyncView


Satellites

tab

Description Parameter Possible name

ID

configurations

1…32

ELEVATION 5…90

BEARING 0…359

SNR 0…99

HEALTH

TRACKED

NO_ALMANAC,

UNHEALTHY,

HEALTHY

YES, NO


Elevation angle of the satellite in degrees

Polar Coordinate in degrees



Whether satellite is tracked or not


6-107


Once the GNSS card has tracked 4 satellites, or 1 in Indoor mode, it can show the antenna position.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-POS::: ctag

;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-POS::: MYCTAG

;


Output Syntax

"

lat

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

long

,

deg

,

min

,

frac_min

:

alt

"

;

Parameter name

LAT

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

LONG

DEG

MIN

FRAC_MIN

ALT


N, S

0…9999

E, W

0…9999

999..18'000


N

0

E

0

0

Description

Latitude

Fraction of minute

Longitude

Fraction of minute

Altitude in meters


6-108


Using SyncView


Position

tab

GPS Position


6-109


To retrieve the GPS time, send the following command

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-GPSTIME:::ctag;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-GPSTIME:::MYCTAG;


Output Syntax

"WEEK=week,SEC=sec"

;

Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations

WEEK 0…3182

parameters

Week

1980

SEC 0…604799 Degrees


6-110


6.8 Line Switching, Tracking & Holdover (THC), Signal

Filtering and Processing

This section includes information on what and how the 5548C can do with the signal processed by the INCs as per the previous section 6.5 and the SGCs & OUCs in section

6.9 according to the following points:

 The THC group state and configuration:

 The selection mode to configure the input line selection mode

(Automatic, Manual, …)

 The input line priorities to program the input selection to the user preferences

 The Signal tracking and filtering performed by the MADDS (Manual &

Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis) system embedded in the THCs

 The pass-through mode

Note:

The command response refers to the THC group status and not to individual THC card status.

The THC cards handle the input line switching, signal processing and filtering

For retrieving the current THC status, use the following command:

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-THC:: ctag ;

The response is formatted as below. The following description will focus only on the

THC configuration. Other parameters concerning the switching are presented in the next sections.

Output Syntax

"

opstate

:MAN_INPUT=man_input,MODE=mode,ACT_INPUT=act_input,

SSM=ssm , SYS_MODE=sys_mode "

;


6-111

Parameter name

OPSTATE

SSM

SYS_MODE


EMPTY,

EXTRACTED,

INIT,

DOWNLOAD,

OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR,

DEAD


OK

ON, OFF

MST, EXP, INV

OFF

MST


Description

There are different THC group states:

EMPTY


EXTRACTED


INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD


SSM state.

5548C system mode.

MST: MASTER shelf; EXP: EXPANSION shelf; INV: Invalid

The input selection can be set in different modes, such as Automatic, Manual and it is also possible to force the THC internal Oscillator to operate in Holdover mode.

Automatic Mode (AUTO)

This mode enables the 5548C to select the line according to priority criteria.

Example: If the line with priority 2 fails, the 5548C selects the line with the highest priority, when available and not in alarm.

To configure input priorities, please refer to the next section 6.8.3

The SSM mode is also an automatic method to select an E1 line according to a quality level. To enable this switching mode, please refer to section 6.10.

Manual Mode (MAN)

This condition forces the selection of one defined working input line (with no alarm).

Using this selection, the user must enter the line required to select with the parameter

“ MAN_INPUT ” within the TL1 command.

If the selected input line fails, the system immediately goes in Automatic mode.

Forced Holdover Mode (FHLDVR)

This selection mode forces the 5548C to work in holdover. The system will not select any input lines and the internal oscillator supplies synchronization source to the shelf.


6-112


Using TL1

Use the following command to obtain the state of the switching parameters.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-THC:: ctag ;


Output Syntax

"opstate: MAN_INPUT=man_input , MODE=mode , ACT_INPUT=act_input ,

SSM=ssm"

;

Note:


Read section Input connector to Input Line (IL) description to understand cross conection concept of input lines to physical input ports.

For editing the configuration in one single line, the following command is required. For more details on each parameter, refer to the next sections.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-THC::: ctag ::[ MODE=mode] ,[ MAN_INPUT=man_input ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-THC::: MYCTAG :: MODE=MAN , MAN_INPUT=IL-1-2 ;

Parameter name

MODE


AUTO, MAN,

FHLDVR


AUTO

Description

There are different modes of input selection:

AUTO: Automatic selection mode. i.e. when a line has failed, the

5548C will automatically switch to the line presenting the next priority.

MAN: Manual selection mode.

The user can select a specific input reference with the

MAN_INPUT parameter.

FHLDVR: Forced Holdover. This mode forces the THC to operate in Holdover mode.


6-113


MAN_INPUT IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS IL-1-1

ACT_INPUT * IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS,

NONE

IL-1-1

* Not configurable, only upon command answer


Description

When the MAN (Manual) mode is enabled, this variable identifies the specific line to be select.

This is the line currently selected by the 5548C

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  THC  Details

Selection of

Manual input when this mode activated

OSA

Clock

Switching mode

Figure 6-15: SyncView - THC Details


6-114


Note:



The OSA 5548C SSU can be fed with up to 9 inputs signal, 2x 4 from the INC groups and 1 from the GPS group, which can be configured with different priorities.

Example: If the IL-1-1 is fed with a signal coming from a Primary Reference Source

(PRS) and the IL-1-3 from an E1 leased line, it is possible to configure the priority #1 for the IL-1-1 and a lower priority for the IL-1-3.

Note:

The priorities are only taken in consideration when the switching mode is configured as AUTOMATIC and in case of SSM enabled when more than one E1 input lines have the same quality level.

For retrieving the current priority configuration, send the following command:

Input Syntax

RTRV-PRIO::: ctag ;

The answer is formatted as below.

Output Syntax

" IL-1-1=il-1-1 , IL-1-2=il-1-2 , IL-1-3=il-1-3 ,

IL-1-4=il-1-4 , IL-2-1=il-2-1 , IL-2-2=il-2-2 , IL-2-3=il-2-3 ,

IL-2-4=il-2-4 , GPS=gps "

;

For editing the priorities, send the following command:

Input Syntax

ED-PRIO::: ctag :: IL-1-1=il-1-1 , IL-1-2=il-1-2 , IL-1-3=il-1-3 ,

IL-1-4=il-1-4 , IL-2-1=il-2-1 , IL-2-2=il-2-2 , IL-2-3=il-2-3 ,

IL-2-4=il-2-4 , GPS=gps ;


6-115


Example :

ED-PRIO::: MYCTAG :: IL-1-1=1 , IL-1-2=2 , IL-1-3=3 , IL-1-4=4 ,

IL-2-1=5 , IL-2-2=6 , IL-2-3=7 , IL-2-4=8 , GPS=9 ;

Parameter name

IL-1-1

IL-1-2

IL-1-3

IL-1-4

IL-2-1

IL-2-2

IL-2-3

IL-2-4

GPS


1…9

parameters

1

1…9 2

1…9 3

1…9 4

1…9 5

Priority of input 1 of INC group.

1 has the most priority, 9 has the least priority.

1…9 6

1…9 7

1…9 8

1…9 9

Note:

Two or more input lines can have the same priority according to ITU-T

G.781 5.10. When it is the case the switching mode is non-revertive.

Example of Scenario:

1. Two input lines (IL) having the same priority are qualified by the

5548C.

2. One of these two IL is currently selected by the 5548C.

3. This selected IL suddenly fails.

4. The 5548C switches therefore to the second IL.

5. Later the failed IL recovers.

6. The 5548C remains on the current IL selection without switching to the recovered line and thus, does not introduce any instability caused by the input line switching.


6-116


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs  Input 1…8 / GPS  Set

Priority

1 has the most priority, 9 has the least priority.

Figure 6-16: SyncView - Priority Setting

Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis (MADDS)

The MADDS is an embedded engine in the THC card, which filters the signal received on the THC input.

 The MADDS can show different operating modes related to the THC status:

 TRACKED: the MADDS and THC are correctly tracking the currently selected input signal.

 WARMUP: this state is present while the internal THC oscillator is warming-up

(i.e. after shelf power-up or when inserting a new THC).

 FAST: this state should last approximately 1 minute. This is shown when the

MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal more rapidly.

 FREERUN: This status is shown when the MADDS and the rest of THC have never tracked any input signal since the shelf power-up.

 HOLDOVER: This status is shown when the MADDS and the rest of the THCs no longer have any input signals on their inputs, and hence, the internal oscillator provides the shelf synchronization source.




6-117


Using TL1

To retrieve the current status, the following command is required:

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-MADDS::: ctag ;


Output Syntax

" madds_state

:[ OSACLK=osaclk ]

,

OSACLKAVL=osaclkavl ,

SYS_MODE=sys_mode

"

;

To set the parameters, the following command should be sent:

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-MADDS::: ctag ::[ OSACLK=osaclk ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-MADDS::: MYCTAG :: OSACLK=OFF ;


MADDS_STATE* TRACKED,

WARMUP, FAST,

FREERUN,

HOLDOVER

OSACLK

1

OSACLKAVL *

SYS_MODE

ON, OFF

YES, NO

MST, EXP, INV


OFF

NO

MST

Description

This is the state of MADDS (THC)

TRACKED:

the MADDS is correctly tracking the selected input signal.

WARMUP:

this state is present while the internal THC oscillator is warming-up (i.e. after shelf power-up)

FAST:

this state should take approximately 1 minute. This is shown when the MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal rapidly.

FREERUN:

This status is shown when the

THC/MADDS have never tracked any input signal.

HOLDOVER:

This status is shown when the THC/MADDS no longer have any input signals on their inputs

OSAClock enable (ON) or disable(OFF)

YES if the OSAclock is available or NOT if not

5548C system mode.

MST: MASTER shelf; EXP: EXPANSION shelf; INV: Invalid

* Not configurable

1) this feature is not yet available


6-118


Using SyncView

Open the Logical View and check the THC symbol state

TRACKED:

the MADDS is correctly tracking the selected input signal.

HOLDOVER

or FREERUN: this status is shown when the

THC/MADDS have any input signals on their inputs

FAST:

this state should take approximately 1 minute. This is shown when the MADDS is changing its bandwidth in order to track the selected signal rapidly.

ALARM:

this state is shown when a failure is detected

The INC GROUP 1 and the GPS GROUP are able to supply a signal in case of either

THC removal or failure. This frequency is taken from the first available 2.048MHz or

E1 input signal of the GROUP according to the Input Line number, 1 as the highest priority to 4, as the lowest, and then from GPS-A and after GPS-B.

GPS

Antennas

48 VDC (A)

48 VDC (B)

(INC)

Text

Card 2

(INC)

GPS

Card

External

Alarm

Inputs

= 1:1 protection possible

Input

Selection

Pass-through functionality



MAnagement Card (MAC)

Status

LEDs

Alarm

Contacts

Tracking &

Holdover Card

(THC)

Tracking &

Holdover

Oscillator

Output

Phase

Alignement

COM

Ports

Signal

Generator

Card

(SGC)

Ethernet

Port

Pass-through signal

Figure 6-17 : Pass-through Mode redirection

OUtput

Card

Card

(OUC)

20 Outputs

OUtput

OUtput

Card

OUtput

OUtput

Card

NTP/SNTP server

IRIG-B

Up to 4 chained Slave or Expansion Shelves


6-119


Note:

The automatic switching between input lines is possible during Passthrough operation when a line is removed or fails. However, this can introduce phase jumps on output signal.

During the pass-through mode, the SSM code supplied on outputs is the one received by the Input Line (IL). A forced SSM value activated and defined on the IL is ignored during pass-through mode.

Note:

Refer to section 6.5 to retrieve input port and line configuration

In order to retrieve the current pass-through status, the following TL1 command is required.

Input Syntax

RTRV-PTHRGH::: ctag ;


Output Syntax

SSM

"

input

,

ssm

"

;

Parameter name

INPUT


IL-1-1, IL-1-2, IL-1-3,

IL-1-4, GPS-A,

GPS-B, NONE

PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

FAILED, DISABLED


IL-1-1

SEC

Description

Input line providing the passthrough signal

SSM quality of the pass-through signal

Note:

During pass-through mode, the f and E1 LEDs of the SGC card(s) flash

GREEN.


6-120


6.9 Signal Generation & Output Properties

In this section, we explain the parameters to set and how to proceed to obtain correct output frequency type as well as E1 code and frame types according to the user needs.

Here are the points treated in this section:

 Basics on SGC and OUC cards operation to better understand how to proceed with the following points in this section.

 SGC group state and parameters

 OUC group state and parameters

 Output signal type configuration

 Output Line state and output squelch configuration

 Output E1 code & frame configuration

6.9.1 The Basics of SGC & OUC Operation


To obtain clock signal on the output cards after the operation of input signal treatment and filtering, the SGC

(Signal Generation Card) cards generate all possible signal types supplied to the OUC (OUtput card) cards, the expansion shelves & PPS outputs as well as for 5548C options such as TCC-NTP and TCC-PTP cards. This is illustrated in the colored part of the following diagram: t Phase ement unctionality

Signal

Generator

Card

(SGC)

Ethernet

Port

2x PPS outputs

Figure 6-18 : SGC and OUC

Operation

OUtput

Card

Card

(OUC)

20 Outputs

20 Outputs

OUtput

OUtput

Card

(OUC)

20 Outputs

20 Outputs

OUtput

OUtput

Card

(OUC)

20 Outputs

20 Outputs

NTP/

SNTP server

PTP

Up to

3 slots

Up to 4 chained

Slave or

Expansion

Shelves


6-121


6.9.1.2 OUC Cards & Output Tiles Relation

On the shelf, the cards and output tile connectors are configured as illustrated below:

10 9 8 7 6 5 4

3

2

1


DC power S ources with Hazardous

E nergy. Disconnect both Power

S ources before replacing the shelf

Shelf is powered by redundant

DC power Sources with Hazardous

Energy. Disconnect both P ower

Sources before replacing the shelf

4

A B

5

A B

6

A B

7

A B

Figure 6-19 : Output Cards and Tiles Location

8

A B

9

A B

A B

10

A B

A B A B

1 2 3


6-122


Each OUtput Card (OUC) provides 2 output groups (OG) of 10 output connectors.

OUT 1-10

E1 f

Output Group (OG) 1

OUT 11-20

E1 f

Output Group (OG) 2

20x ASYMMETRICAL 20x SYMMETRICAL 10x SYM & 10x ASYM. for remote BNC panel

Output

Group 1

Output

Group 2

OUTPUTS ASYM.

OUTPUTS SYM.

1 6 11 16

1..10

OUT 1..10 SYM.

2 7 12 17

Output Group 1

3 8 13 18

Output

Output

4 9

14

19

11..20

5

10 15 20

Output Group 2

The OG are labeled within the TL1 commands as shown below:

“OUC Group” – “Output Group”

OUT 11..20 ASYM.


6-123


In the table below, “x” is the OUC group number (1…10)

Output Group (OG)

First output group (1…10)

Second output group (11…20)

Table 6-13 Output GroupTL1 Abbreviations

TL1 Abbreviation

x-1 x-2

Each OUtput Card (OUC) provides 20 outputs lines that are labeled within the TL1 commands as shown below:

“OUC Group Number” – “Output Line”

In the table below, “x” is the output OUC Group number (1…10)

Output Group 2 (OUT 11...20)

Output line TL1 Abbreviation

Output Group 1 (OUT 1…10)

Output line TL1 Abbreviation

#1 x-1

#2 x-2

#3 x-3

#4 x-4

#5 x-5

#6 x-6

#7 x-7

#8 x-8

#9 x-9

#10 x-10

Table 6-14 Output Line TL1 Abbreviation

#20 x-20


6-124


6.9.2 Signal Generation Card (SGC) Group Parameters and State

The SGC cards treat the signal received from the THC(s) or directly from the INC

Group when it is in pass-through operation mode and distribute it independently as the following signal types:

 E1 (option 1 & 2), 2.048 MHz, 1 PPS & 10MHz to each OUC group

 E1, 2.048 MHz and 1 PPS for expansion shelves (LINK A & B on the management tile)

 1 PPS for the PPS output BNC connectors 1 & 2 on the management tile

Group State

Note:

The distributed PPS signal is synchronized to the UTC (Universal

Coordinated Time) only when at least one GPS Input card is locked to

GPS.

SSM state and SSM output properties

Parameters generated

SSM

OQL



Configuration

Enable or disable

SSM Output quality level

Note:

The OQL parameter is the SSM status supplied on all E1 output ports


6-125


Properties of the signal generated for OUCs, NTP, PTP


E1 Option 1 status

E1 Option 2 status

2.048 MHz status

10 MHz status

PPS Timing

PPS General

*Not yet available

Configuration

OK

if everything is running fine

Failure

if any problem

Squelch

if the system has cut the signal

Passthrough

if the system is in “Pass-through” mode

Note:

PPS General

is for internal OSA 5548C SSU use only, i.e. to make the

LEDs blink.

Properties of the signal generated for expansion shelves (LINK A & LINK B)

Configuration Parameters generated

E1 status for expansion A

E1 status for expansion B

2.048 MHz status for expansion A

2.048 MHz status for expansion B

PPS status for expansion A

PPS status for expansion B

OK


Failure

mode

if any problem

Squelch


Passthrough

if the system is in “Pass-through”

Note:

The 10 MHz frequency is not supplied to the expansion shelves because they are able to generate this frequency by using the others.

Signal properties for PPS outputs 1 & 2 on the Management connector tile


PPS output 1

PPS output 2

Configuration

OK


Failure

if any problem

Squelch


Passthrough

if the system is in “Pass-through” mode


6-126


The following TL1 command is issued to retrieve the current status of the signal generation parameters:

Note:

The command response refers to the SGC group status and not to individual SGC card status.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-SGC::: ctag ;

The response is formatted as below:

Output Syntax

"

opstate

: SSM=ssm , OQL=oql , SYS_MODE=sys_mode :

e1_1

,

e1_2

,

e1_exp_a

,

e1_exp_b

,

freq_1

,

freq_exp_a

,

freq_exp_b

,

pps_gen

,

pps_timing

,

pps_exp_a

,

pps_exp_b

,

pps_out_1 , pps_out_2 , freq_2

"

;

Parameter name

OPSTATE

SSM


EMPTY,

EXTRACTED,

INIT,

DOWNLOAD,

OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR,

DEAD

OFF, ON


OK

OFF

Description

There are nine different SGC group states:

EMPTY


EXTRACTED

: The group has been extracted from its respective slots

INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD


This is the SSM state, either enabled or disabled

OQL

PRC, SSU_A,

SSU_B, SEC,

DNU, FAILED,

DISABLED

OK

This is the SSM quality level supplied by the SGC. This is also the SSM quality supplied by the 5548C


6-127


Parameter Possible Default Description name configurations

SYS_MODE MST, EXP, INV

E1_1

E1_2

E1_EXP_A

E1_EXP_B

FREQ_1

FREQ_EXP_A

FREQ_EXP_B

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

parameters

MST

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

5548C system mode.



This is the state of the configuration nr.1 of the E1 generated for OUCs.

This is the state of the configuration nr.2 of the E1 generated for OUCs.

This is the state of the E1 generated for expansion shelf A

(LINK A).

This is the state of the E1 generated for expansion shelf B

(LINK B).

This is the state of the Frequency line nr.1 generated for OUCs.

This is the state of the Frequency generated for expansion shelf A

(LINK A).

This is the state of the Frequency generated for expansion shelf B

(LINK B).

This is the state of the PPS generated for internal 5548C use.

PPS_GEN

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK

PPS_TIMING

PPS_EXP_A

PPS_EXP_B

PPS_OUT_1

PPS_OUT_2

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

This is the state of the PPS generated for OUCs (NTP/PTP).

This is the state of the PPS generated for expansion shelf A

(LINK A).

This is the state of the PPS generated for expansion shelf B

(LINK B).

This is the state of the PPS generated for the Management tile

PPS output 1.

This is the state of the PPS generated for the Management tile

PPS output 2.

FREQ_2

OK, FAIL, SQLCH,

PTHRGH*

OK

This is the state of the Frequency line nr.2 generated for OUCs.

*

:

OK

:

FAIL

: correct functioning on the generated signal.

This status is shown if any problem is encountered on the generated signal

SQLCH

: if the system has cut the signal. Usually when both the THCs haven’t ended their start-up procedure

PTHRGH

: if the system is in “Passthrough” mode. (The signal is provided directly to the SGCs without passing through the THC)

6.9.3 OUtput Card Group State (OUC)


6-128


Send the following TL1 command to retrieve the current OUC card group status (1 to

10):

Note:

The command response refers to the OUC group status and not to individual OUC card status.

Note:

For OUC cards and Output Tile relation, refer to section 6.9.1.2

For Output Group information, refer to section 6.9.1.3

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OUC::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OUC::

3

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

;

"

aid

: opstate ,SHORTED=shorted"

Parameter name



Description

AID

OPSTATE

1…10

EMPTY,

EXTRACTED, INIT,

DOWNLOAD, OK,

ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR, DEAD

OK

This is the card group on which you want to retrieve or to edit the configuration

There are nine different OUC group states:

EMPTY


EXTRACTED


INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD



6-129


Parameter name


SHORTED

ON,OFF, -


OFF

Description

When ON, OUC group detects and generates an alarm if any of its output lines are shorted (shortcircuit).

“-“, when no cards are active.

6.9.4 Output Signal Type and Configuration

Different output signal types can be supplied by the OSA 5548C SSU through its

OUC (OUtput Card) cards.

For the output signal type configuration (e.g. 2.048MHz, E1), the OSA 5548C SSU has to be configured by software.

3 configuration types can be applied to each of the Output Group (OG), as follow:

 2.048MHz according to ITU-T G.703.13



The E1 configuration nr.1 and nr.2 are customizable by software and allow the user to:

 select the code type (HDB3 or AMI)

CRC-4

 configure the Time Slot 16 (TS16) structure (CCS, CAS)

 configure Sa bits

 configure the Idle code

The next sections describe how to configure the 5548C to supply the Output Signal

Required.

6.9.4.1 Customization of E1 Configurations nr.1 and nr.2

Note:

Only one Sa bit can be configured as SSM!

Warning:

Do not set an idle code which has very few binary pulses (0x00, 0x01,

0x10). This configuration can introduce SGC and OUC output alarm.


6-130


Using TL1

To retrieve current setting of the E1 configuration nr.1 and nr.2, use the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-SGE::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: CODE=code , CRC4=crc4 , TS16=ts16 , SA4=sa4 , SA5=sa5 , SA6=s

a6

, SA7=sa7,SA8=sa8,IDLE=idle "

;

To set any of the two E1 configuration option, use the command below.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-SGE::

aid

: ctag ::[ CODE=code ],[ CRC4=crc4 ],[ TS16=ts16 ],

[ SA4=sa4 ],[ SA5=sa5 ],[ SA6=sa6 ],[ SA7=sa7 ],[ SA8=sa8 ],[ IDLE=idle ];

Example:

ED-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1

: MYCTAG :: CODE=HDB3 , CRC4=ON , TS16=CAS ,

SA4=SSM , SA5=ON , SA6=ON , SA7=ON , SA8=ON , IDLE=255 ;

Parameter name

AID

CODE

CRC4

TS16

SA4

SA5

SA6

SA7

SA8

IDLE



Description

E1-1, E1-2

This is the configuration. E1-1 is configuration nr.1 and E1-2 the nr.2

HDB3, AMI

OFF, ON

CCS, CAS

OFF, ON, SSM

SSM Sa4

ON: the Sa bit is

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

ON Sa5

ON Sa6 enabled

SSM: Configure the

OFF, ON, SSM

ON Sa7

OFF, ON, SSM

CAS Time Slot 16 structure

ON Sa8

Sa bit to carry the

SSM

0..255

255 Idle code of Time Slots (TS) 1 to 15 and 17


6-131


E1 codes

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  SGC  Details

Time Slot 16

Sa Bits

Idle code

E1 configuration nr.1 E1 configuration nr.2

CRC-4

Generation

Parameter name

CODE

CRC4

TS 16

SA4

SA5

SA6

SA7

SA8

IDLE


Description

HDB3, AMI

E1 code

OFF, ON

CRC-4 generation

CCS, CAS

Time Slot 16 structure

OFF, ON, SSM

Sa4 bit

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

Sa5 bit

Sa6 bit

Sa7 bit

ON: the Sa bit is enabled

SSM: Configure the Sa bit to carry the SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

Sa8 bit

0..255

Idle code of Time Slots (TS) 1 to 15 and 17


6-132


Note:

For OUC cards and Output Tile relation, refer to section 6.9.1.2


Using TL1

To retrieve the configuration of one of the two OG from an OUC group, use the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OG::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OG::

3-1

: MYCTAG ;

The response will answer as shown below.

Output Syntax

"

aid

: TYPE=type "

;

To configure the OG with one of the three configurations (2.048MHz, E1 configuration nr.1 or E1 configuration nr.2) use the following command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-OG::

aid

: ctag :: TYPE=type ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-OG::

2-1

: MYCTAG :: TYPE=E1_2 ;

The response will answer as shown below.

Output Syntax

;

"

aid

: TYPE=type "


6-133

Parameter name

AID

TYPE




1-1…10-2

E1_1, E1_2, FREQ

E1_1

Description

This is the OG specified, in the format X-Y. X is the OUC group and Y the OG.

Configuration specified for the OG

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Outputs  Group 1…10 Details

Output Group 1 Output Group 2

Output Group Configuration

 E1_1: E1 Configuration nr.1

 E1_2: E1 Configuration nr.2

 FREQ: Frequency (2.048MHz)


6-134


6.9.4.3 Output Line (OL) Configuration (Squelch & Tag)

In this section it is explained how to retrieve the current status for any of the 20 output lines from any OUC group.

Note:

For OUC cards and Output Tile correspondence, refer to section 6.9.1.2


Using TL1

The following TL1 command is required to find the actual OUC group configuration.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OL::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OL::

3-15

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

"

aid

: opstate , SQUELCH=squelch , TAG=\”My Tag up-to 32

chars.\”

"

;

To squelch an output line and/or to edit a Tag, the following TL1 command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-OL::

aid

: ctag ::[ SQUELCH=squelch ],[ TAG=tag ];

Example:


6-135

Parameter name

AID

OPSTATE*

SQUELCH

TAG



1-1…10-20

OK, ALARM,

SHORTED,

SQUELCHED

OK

ON, OFF

ON

\”My Tag up-to 32 chars.\”

*: not software configurable


Description

Output Line (OL) specified in the format X-Y. X is the OUC group,

Y is the OL.

This is the status of the output line

This is the output line squelch condition.

OFF:

the signal is supplied

ON:

the signal is squelched

Double-quoted tag with up to 32 characters, alphabetic upper and lower case, numeric and punctuation


6-136


Using SyncView


By checking the box, the corresponding output

Line will be squelched, so the signal will not be supplied

Setting an Output Tag:

 Right-click on any line and click the small box

 Then double-click on the line required and write the tag you need


6-137


6.9.4.4 Short-Circuit Detection on OL

The OSA 5548C has the capability to show a SHORTED alarm when it detects short circuit on any of an OUC’s Output Lines. To enable this function on any of the OUC group, follow this procedure.

Note:

For OUC cards and Output Tile correspondence, refer to section 6.9.1.2


Using TL1

To retrieve the current OUC state, use the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-OUC::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-OUC::

3

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

"aid:opstate: SHORTED=shorted "

;

To enable the SHORT CIRCUIT detection, send the below command.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-OUC::

aid

: ctag :: SHORTED=shorted ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-OUC::

2

: MYCTAG :: SHORTED=ON ;

Parameter name

AID


1…10


Description

This is the card group specified


6-138


Parameter name

OPSTATE*

SHORTED


EMPTY,

EXTRACTED, INIT,

DOWNLOAD, OK,

ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR, DEAD

ON,OFF, -


OK

OFF

Description

There are nine different OUC group states:

EMPTY


EXTRACTED


INIT


DOWNLOAD


OK


ALARM


DEGRADED


TESTERROR


DEAD


When ON, OUC group detects and generates an alarm if any of its output lines are shorted (shortcircuit).

“-“, when no card is inserted.

*: not software configurable

Using SyncView


Check the “Shorted” Checkbox to enable the Shorted alarm detection on all the 20 output lines related to the OUC group.


6-139


6.9.5 Time Code Card - NTP (TCC-NTP) State

Depends on network configuration, the NTP signal can be supplied by an NTP server or directly form the GPS card available in the 5548C.

Usually, the TCC-NTP card is plugged in one of the OUC (OUtput Card) group slot.

The NTP Output connector can be in front panel card access, on the front tile set or on the output remote panel (for E200).

Each TCC-NTP provides one NTP output.

This section describes how to configure the 5548C to supply the NTP signal.

First of all the general settings must be configured in correspondence to the network.

IP Address

Net Mask

Gateway

DHCP mode

Ethernet Speed Selection

Ethernet Speed

Duplex mode

Using TL1

To retrieve current setting of the TCC-NTP

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-TCC::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-TCC::

TCC-1-A

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

"aid:IPADDRESS=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx,NETMASK=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx,

GATEWAY=xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx,DHCP_MODE=ENABLED,ETHER_SDEF=MAN

UAL,ETHER_SPEED=100,DUPLEX_MODE=FULL”

;


6-140

The next sections describe how to configure the TCC-NTP


Up to 8 caracters : lower-case / upper-case and numbers 1-9

NTP authentication adds a level of security to your NTP configuration. You configure an NTP key string on each device. The key is encrypted using a Message Digest 5

(MD5) hashing algorithm, and the encrypted key is passed in each NTP packet.

Before an NTP packet is processed, the key is checked against the configured key on the receiving device.

Example configuration

GPS antenna

GPS antenna

NTP SERVER 1

Key 1 12563w5

Key 2

Key 3

12lopers

afsg2d

NTP SERVER 2

Key 1 apofn12

Key 2

Key 3

54snmn

wergcs

Key 8 wbcd12

STRATUM 1

5548C (TCC-NTP)

Key 8 qprtz98

STRATUM 1

5548C (TCC-NTP)


6-141


To set any of the two E1 configuration option, use the command below.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-TCC:: aid:CTAG::[IPADDRESS=###.###.###.###],[NETMASK=###.###.###.###

],[GATEWAY=###.###.###.###],[DHCP_MODE=ENABLED/DISABLED],[ETHE

R_SDEF=AUTO/MANUAL],[ETHER_SPEED=10/100],[DUPLEX_MODE=HALF/FUL

L];

Example:

ED-EQPT-TCC::

TCC-1-

A

: MYCTAG :: IPADDRESS=123.100.124.120 , GATEWAY=123.100.124.100 , DH

CP_MODE=ENABLE , ETHER_SDEF=AUTO , DUPLEX_MODE=FULL;

Parameter name

AID


TCC-1-A .. TCC-3-B


Description

IPADRESS

GATEWAY

DHCP_MODE xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx x :0 to 9 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx x :0 to 9

ENABLE/DISABLE

ETHER_SPEED

10 / 100

ENABLE

DUPLEX_MODE

HALF / FULL

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  TCC  Details


6-142

The next sections describe how to configure the TCC-NTP


Up to 8 caracters : lower-case / upper-case and numbers 1-9

NTP authentication adds a level of security to your NTP configuration. You configure an NTP key string on each device. The key is encrypted using a Message Digest 5

(MD5) hashing algorithm, and the encrypted key is passed in each NTP packet.

Before an NTP packet is processed, the key is checked against the configured key on the receiving device.

Example configuration

GPS antenna

GPS antenna

NTP SERVER 1

Key 1 12563w5

NTP SERVER 2

Key 1 apofn12

Key 2 54snmn

Key 2

12lopers

Key 3

Key 3 afsg2d

wergcs

Key 8 qprtz98

Key 8 wbcd12

STRATUM 1

5548C (TCC-NTP)

STRATUM 1

5548C (TCC-NTP)


6-143


6.9.6 Time Code Card - PTP (TCC-PTP) State

Configuring a network to use the TCC-PTP card basically consists of the following steps:

 PTP parameters configuration on the Grandmaster.

 PTP parameters configuration on the slaves, if any.

PTP Port

The SFP connector cage on the front panel hosts the SFP transceiver corresponding to the network in use: electrical or optical. Oscilloquartz supplies SFP transceivers upon request. The user may optionally integrate his own transceivers but without any warranty on the performances.

The TCC-PTP has only one PTP port. Thus, the port number, asked by several TL1 commands, shall always be 1.

The TCC-PTP card allows PTP connections with two transmission protocol: Ethernet and UDP. The system’s configuration may differ according to the chosen transmission protocol.

The Ethernet/IP configuration may be accomplished using the ED-EQPT-PTPC-IP

TL1 command.

TL1 Syntax

ED-EQPT-PTPC-IP:[TID]:PTPC-1-A..PTPC-10-

B:CTAG::PORT=1..2,[IPADDRESS=###.###.###.###],[NETMASK=###.###.

###.###],[GATEWAY=###.###.###.###],[DHCP_MODE=ENABLED/DISABLED]

,[ETHER_SDEF=AUTO/MANUAL],[ETHER_SPEED=10/100/1000],[DUPLEX_MOD

E=HALF/FULL];

Example:

ED-EQPT-PTPC-IP::PTPC-1-

A:A::PORT=1,IPADDRESS=145.133.40.122,NETMASK=255.255.255.0,GATE

WAY=145.133.40.122,DHCP_MODE=DISABLED;


6-144


Parameters descriptions

Parameter name

AID


PTP-1-A ..PTP-10-B


Description/Remarks

Card position

IPADRESS

GATEWAY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx x :0..255

10.16.1.108

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx x :0..255

10.16.1.1

PTP port IP address

PTP port gateway

NETMASK

DHCP_MODE xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx x :0..255

255.255.254.0 PTP port netmask

If ENABLED, the card

ENABLE/DISABLE

ENABLE asks request its own IP settings to a DHCP server.

The current release allows only 1Gb

ETHER_SPEED

100/1000

DUPLEX_MODE

HALF / FULL

AUTO

FULL connections. Ask

Oscilloquartz for 100Mb availability.

Configuring the PTP port in HALF duplex mode may worse PTP performances.

Retrieving the Ethernet/IP configuration

The RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-IP TL1 command can be used to retrieve and verify the

Ethernet/IP configuration.

TL1

Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-IP:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::PORT=1..2;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-IP::

PTP-1-A

: MYCTAG::PORT=1 ;


Output Syntax

“aid:IPADDRESS=###.###.###.###,NETMASK=###.###.###.###,GATEWAY=

###.###.###.###,DHCP_MODE=ENABLED,ETHER_SDEF=MANUAL],ETHER_SPEE

D=1000,DUPLEX_MODE=FULL;


6-145


The ED-EQPT-PTPC-PTP TL1 command can be used to configure the PTP parameters.

TL1 Syntax

ED-EQPT-PTPC-PTP:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-

B:CTAG::PORT=1..2,[ADM_STATE=ENABLED/DISABLED],[ADDR_MODE=UNICA

ST/MULTICAST/MIXED],[DOMAIN=0..99],[PROTOCOL=UDP/ETHERNET],[TWO

STEP=NO/YES],[MASTER_STATE=ENABLED/DISABLED],[SLAVE_STATE=ENABL

ED/DISABLED];

Example:

ED-EQPT-PTPC-PTP:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-

B:MYCTAG::PORT=1,ADM_STATE=ENABLED,ADDR_MODE=MIXED,DOMAIN=5,PRO

TOCOL=UDP,MASTER_STATE=ENABLED,SLAVE_STATE=DISABLED;



AID PTP-1-A ..PTP-10-B


ADM_STATE

ADDR_MODE

DOMAIN

ENABLED/DISABLED

UNICAST

MULTICAST

MIXED

0..99

Enabled

MIXED

0


Card position

The PTP port may be administratively disabled. In that case, no PTP traffic will be generated.

In MIXED mode both

UNICAST and

MULTICAST packets are sent to through the

PTP port.

PTP domain as specified by IEEE

1588v2

PROTOCOL

ETHERNET/UDP

TWOSTEP

SLAVE_STATE

NO/YES

MASTER_STATE

ENABLED

DISABLED

NO

ENABLED

DISABLED

Two step mode makes use of FollowUp messages. It can be used if the slave doesn’t support the

ONE STEP mode.

Use ENABLED only

Use DISABLED only


6-146


Retrieve the PTP configuration

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PTP

Syntax:

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PTP:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::PORT=1..2;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PTP::PTP-1-A-:MYCTAG::PORT=1;

Answer:

TEST 11-03-15 15-17-32

M a COMPLD

"PTPC-2-

A:PORT=1,PORT_STATE=PASSIVE,ADM_STATE=ENABLE,ADDR_MODE=UNICA

ST,DOMAIN=1,PROTOCOL=UDP,TWOSTEP=NO,MASTER_STATE=ENABLED,SL

AVE_STATE=DISABLED"

;

6.9.6.3 PTP Multicast configuration

The ED-EQPT-PTPC-MCAST TL1 command allows setting the multicast message rates.

Multicast addresses

In MIXED and MULTICAST mode PTP packets are sent to the following addresses according to the transmission protocol:

Ethernet:

UDP/IP:

TL1 Syntax

224.0.1.129

01:1B:19:00:00:00

ED-EQPT-PTPC-MCAST:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-

B:CTAG::PORT=1..2,ANNOUNCE_LOG2PERIOD=-7..3,SYNC_LOG2PERIOD=-

7..3,DELAY_LOG2PERIOD=-7..3;

Example

ED-EQPT-PTPC-MCAST::PTP-1-

A:MYCTAG::PORT=1,ANNOUNCE_LOG2PERIOD=-5,SYNC_LOG2PERIOD=-

5,DELAY_LOG2PERIOD=-5;

LOG2PERIOD is: 1/2

N

so if N=-5, the message is sent 1/2

-5

= 32 times per second.

NOTE: the current version of TCC-PTP can accept values between 3 and -6.

The Multicast configuration can be retrieved with the command RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-

MCAST


6-147


Parameter name

AID

TL1 Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-MCAST:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::PORT=1..2;

Example

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-MCAST::PTP-1-A:MYCTAG::PORT=1;

Answer:

TEST 11-03-15 15-17-32

M a COMPLD

"PTPC-2-A:PORT=1,ANNOUNCE_LOG2PERIOD=-1,SYNC_LOG2PERIOD=-

5,DELAY_LOG2PERIOD=-5"

;

Clock Quality Configuration

The ED-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO TL1 command allows configuring several parameters concerning the PTP clock quality.

TL1 Syntax

ED-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-

B:CTAG::REF=1..2,[PRIO1=0..254],[PRIO2=0..254],[TRACKED_CLOCK_CLASS=0..

254],[HLDVR_CLOCK_CLASS=0..254],[FREERUN_CLOCK_CLASS=0..254];

Example

ED-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO::PTP-1-

A:MYCTAG::REF=1,PRIO1=127,PRIO2=127,TRACKED_CLOCK_CLASS=6,HLDVR

_CLOCK_CLASS=7,FREERUN_CLOCK_CLASS=52;



PTP-1-A ..PTP-10-B



REF

PRIO1

PRIO2

TRACKED_CLOCK_

CLASS

HLDRV_CLOCK_CLA

A

1,2

0..254

0..254

0..254

0..254

1

127

127

6

7

Card position

TCC-PTP user shall enter 1.

Used by the Best

Master Clock Algorithm for master election.

Used by the Best

Master Clock Algorithm for master election.

Clock class value sent in the Announce messages when the shelf and the TCC-PTP card are locked.

Clock class value sent in the Announce messages when the shelf is in holdover.


6-148


FREERUN_CLOCK_

CLAA

0..254

52

Clock class value sent in the Announce messages at startup or if the PTP card as never been locked.

The Clock Quality configuration can be retrieved by the RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO command.

TL1 Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::REF=1..2;

Example

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO:[TID]:PTP-1-A:MYCTAG::REF=1;

Answer:

TEST 11-03-15 15-17-32

M a COMPLD

"PTPC-2-

A:REF=1,PRIO1=126,PRIO2=127,TRACKED_CLOCK_CLASS=6,HLDVR_CLOCK_

CLASS=7,FREERUN_CLOCK_CLASS=52;

;

The status of the TCC-PTP is returned by the front panel LEDS, by TL1 answers to specific commands and by its active alarm list stored in the MAC card.

For a description of the front panel LEDs meaning see the physical layout chapter.

The TCC-PTP card state can be requested by the RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-STATE command.

TL1 Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-STATE:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::PORT=1..2;

Example

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-STATE::PTP-1-A:MYCTAG::PORT=1;

Answer:

TEST 11-03-15 15-17-32

M a COMPLD

"PTPC-2-

A:PORT=1,STATE=MASTER,IS_TAI=TRUE,IS_LOCKED=TRUE,PTP_TIME=1300721333;

;


6-149


The input reference state can also be requested by the command RTRV-EQPT-

PTPC-REF-STATE.

TL1 Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO:[TID]:PTP-1-A..PTP-10-B:CTAG::REF=1..2;

Example

RTRV-EQPT-PTPC-PRIO:[TID]:PTP-1-A:MYCTAG::REF=1;

Answer:

Ex.:

TEST 11-03-15 15-17-32

M a COMPLD

"PTPC-2-A:REF=1,IS_TAI=TRUE,CLOCK_CLASS=6,TIME_SOURCE=GPS;


6-150


6.10 Synchronization Status Message - SSM


In addition to the timing, E1 lines can carry Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) which is information about the timing quality level. The ITU-T G.781 Second

Generation SSM norms define these messages.

The OSA 5548C SSU includes provisions for enhanced E1 interfaces with

Synchronization Status Message detection and generation that:

 Select the best input line according to the SSM received

 Allow the operator to force a defined quality level on an input without a SSM capable signal

 Transmit the quality level received or defined on the 5548C’s E1 (2.048 Mbit/s) outputs

Currently defined SSMs and quality levels are shown in the following table.

Quality

Level

Clock

Code

PRC

Primary Reference

Clock

G.811 PRC 0010

SSU-A Primary level SSU G.812 Type I or V 0100

SSU-B Second level SSU G.812 Type VI 1000

SEC SDH Equipment Clock

G.813 SDH Equipment

Clock Option I

1011

DNU Do Not Use - 1111

FAILED

UNKNOWN

When a SSM code was previously received and suddenly not anymore

SSM quality unknown. Any SSM code combinaison which is not listed in the column on the right

- XXXX

- XXXX

Table 6-15 SSM & Quality Levels


6-151


In this section, it is explained how to set the OSA 5548C to work with SSM.

Note:

To retrieve current SSM quality supplied by the 5548C’s E1 outputs, refer to section 6.9.2.1

6.10.2.1 Turn SSM On or Off

Using TL1

The following TL1 command will turn on the SSM function in the whole OSA 5548C

SSU.

Input Syntax

SET-SSM::: ctag :: ON ;

To turn off the SSM, simply send this below command.

Input Syntax

SET-SSM::: ctag :: OFF ;

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  SSM 

Then Select SSM Enabled or SSM Disabled according to your needs.

6.10.2.2 Input signal with SSM Quality Forced

When connecting an input which does not carry any SSM quality status, it is possible to force the SSM quality level in order to be transmitted through the OSA 5548C SSU.

Example:

In the application of a PRC frequency input line (i.e. 10MHz), which cannot carry SSM messages; it is possible to force SSM input quality level such as the “PRC”.

Note:

section to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input port and to retrieve the current configuration.


6-152


Using TL1

The following command is required to check what the current status is. Many parameters will be returned, these pertinent instructions are highlighted in blue and boldface type, below:

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

1-3

: MYCTAG ;

The response is formatted as shown below.

Output Syntax

“

aid

:opstate,

ssm

,INPUT=input,ADM_STATE=adm_state,

TERM=term,CODE=code,WTR=wtr, FRCD=frcd ,FREQ=freq,TAG=tag”

;

To force the SSM quality in the line, insert the SSM quality into the parameter

“FRCD”, the other ones are just necessary to configure correct frame and code to transmit the SSM.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: FRCD=frcd ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-2

: MYCTAG :: FRCD=SSU_A ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4, ALL*


Description

NONE


The first digit is the INC group number and the second digit is the input number (1-1/2/3/4; 2-

1/2/3/4).


FRCD

PRC, SSU_A , SSU_B,

SEC, DNU, NONE,

DISABLED

PRC, SSU_A , SSU_B,

SEC, DNU, NONE

 Not software configurable

NONE This is the forced SSM quality set for the corresponding line


6-153


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View 

Elements

 Inputs  Input 1…8 /

GPS

 Force SSM Quality

Then select the quality required to force on the specified Input.

6.10.2.3 SSM Configuration

The OSA 5548C SSU allows editing of various parameters to configure the SSM operation.

Unknown (UNK) quality

The “Unknown” quality message (UNK) is the quality supplied when the system cannot recognize the SSM quality on inputs. The factory default SSM quality is “SEC”.

Forced (FRCD) quality

The OSA 5548C can be configured to force a SSM quality on its outputs.

Using TL1

To retrieve the current SSM configuration, the following command is required.

RTRV-SSM::: ctag ;

Then you should be prompted as below.

;

“ HLDVR=hdlvr , UNK=unk , FRCD=frcd ”


6-154

To configure the SSM parameters, this command is required:

Input Syntax


ED-SSM::: ctag ::[ UNK=unk ],[ FRCD=frcd ];

Example:

ED-SSM::: MYCTAG :: UNK=DUS

;

Parameter name

HLDVR

UNK

FRCD


SSU_A

Default

Parameter

SSU_A

PRC, SSU_A ,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

NONE

PRC, SSU_A ,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

NONE, DISABLED

SEC

NONE

Description

This is the quality supplied when the THC runs in holdover. The

5548C always supply a SSU_A quality when it is running in holdover.

This is the value supplied when the system cannot recognize the

SSM on the input

This is the override quality level, and supersedes the input SSM level

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  SSM  Details

Unknown Map

Select the SSM Quality to supply when the SSM on the specified is unknown.

Output Forced

Select the SSM Quality to force on all E1 output lines.


6-155


6.10.2.4 Sa bit Configuration on Input Lines

This section describes how to configure the Sa bit to receive SSM from the E1 input line (IL). The Sa bit selection depends to the E1 signal connected to the 5548C.

Note:

section to understand the concept of cross connection of input lines to physical input port and to retrieve the current configuration.

Note:

To configure the Sa bit in the E1 signal supplied by the 5548C, refer to section 6.9.4.1 and 6.9.4.2.

Using TL1

To retrieve the current Sa bit configuration, send the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-EQPT-IL:

1-1

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

;

“aid:opstate,

ssm

,INPUT=input,ADM_STATE=adm_state,

TERM=term,CODE=code,WTR=wtr,FRCD=frcd,

OOF_DETECT=oof_detect,CRC4_DETECT=crc4_detect,

BPV_DETECT=bpv_detect, SA4=sa4 , SA5=sa5 , SA6=sa6 , SA7=sa7 ,

SA8=sa8 ,FREQ=freq,TAG=tag”


6-156

To edit Sa configurations, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-IL::

aid

: ctag :: SSM_BIT=ssm_bit ;


Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-2

: MYCTAG :: SSM_BIT=SA4 ;

Parameter name

AID


1-1…2-4, ALL


Description




SA4*

SA5*

SA6*

SA7*

SA8*

PRC, SSU_A ,

SSU_B, SEC, DNU,

FAILED, NONE,

DISABLED

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

OFF, ON, SSM

SSM_BIT SA4, SA5, SA6, SA7,

SA8, NONE

*


NONE

SA4






Sa bit used to transmit the SSM quality

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View 

Elements

 Inputs  Input 1…8 

SSM Bit

Select the Sa bit which carries the SSM according to your network requirements.


6-157


6.11 Alarms & Events

Alarms & events are transmitted independently by all the 5548C’s cards to the MAC card, which gathers, manages them; keep the history log, manages the condition; shows the current active alarms & events. The 5548C can also escalate the alarm severity to a higher level after a configurable delay.

In addition to the alarms which can be shown by each card LEDs, physically, the MAC shows alarm severity level (Critical, Major, Minor) with the 3 pairs of LEDs on its front panel and on its output alarm relays, which are located on the Management connector tile and labeled ALARM OUT Group 1 and Group 2.

When receiving alarms through software, many details about each event and alarm are reported, as listed below.



Element in alarm



Condition type and description



Transient events, a transient state of the card



Alarm severity (Critical, Major, Minor)



If the service is affected or not



If the alarm/event is stored in the history log (by default or by user configuration)



Note:

For the complete list of all available alarms and events, please refer to

Error! Reference source not found.

.


6-158


6.11.1 Buzzer, Alarm Cutoff (ACO) and MAC State

The MAC cards (slots A17 and A36) have various LEDs on their front panel. This section concentrates on Alarm levels and cutoff function

STATUS

USC

CR

MJ

MIN

1 2

ACO

ACO

MST

RMT

EXP

A 0 x x x x

MAC

OSCILLOQUARTZ

Alarm level

CR: CRITICAL

MJ: MAJOR

MN: MINOR

Alarm cutoff

ACO: ALARM CUT-OFF

ACO switch: CUT-OFF current active alarms

6.11.1.1 Retrieving MAC Configuration and State

To retrieve the current MAC configuration and status, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

RTRV-EQPT-MAC::: ctag ;


Output Syntax

;

“ opstate : BUZZER=buzzer , ALMESC=almesc , ACO=aco

,

SYS_MODE=sys_mode ,[ EXP_NR=exp_nr ]”


6-159

Parameter name

OPSTATE

BUZZER

ACO

ALMESC

SYS_MODE

EXP_NR


OK, ALARM,

DEGRADED,

TESTERROR

OFF, CR, MJ, MN MJ

1, 2, BOTH, NONE 1

0, 6…48

INV, MST, EXP

1…4


OK

24

MST

Description


There are nine different MAC group states:

OK

: The card is running correctly

ALARM

: The card is in alarm

DEGRADED


TESTERROR


This parameter is the level to trigger the MAC Card buzzer sound.

This is the parameter to choose for applying the cutoff on the range 1, 2, both ranges or none

This is the delay in hour after which a severity of an active alarm is escalated to an higher level. 0 means no escalation.

System mode

INV: INVALID

MST: MASTER

EXP: EXPANSION

When the system is an EXPANSION shelf, this parameter returns the expansion number

6.11.1.2 Editing Buzzer sound

There are different types of alarm conditions, these levels are CR (CRITICAL), MJ

(MAJOR) and MN (MINOR).

The MAC card can make a sound using its on-board buzzer on any of these 3 alarm severities when an alarm occurs to user defined levels, listed below:

 OFF: buzzer not activated

 CR: buzzer audibly sound on critical alarms only

 MJ: buzzer audibly sound on major and critical alarms

 MN: buzzer audibly sound on minor, major and critical alarms

Note:

Retrieve current configuration in section 6.11.1.1


6-160


Using TL1

To edit the alarm level to make a sound, the following TL1 command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-MAC::: ctag :: BUZZER=buzzer ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-MAC::: MYCTAG :: BUZZER=CR ;

Parameter name

BUZZER

Possible Default configurations parameters

OFF, CR, MJ, MN MJ

Description

This parameter is the level on which you want the MAC card making a sound

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements 

MAC

 Buzzer

Select Alarm criteria required to make a sound.

6.11.1.3 Editing Alarm CutOff (ACO)

ACO is provided to suppress any audible office row alarms, to allow operators to suppress alarms bells while the alarm is being addressed. Subsequent alarms should reset the ACO latch operation. The 5548C ACO operation is fully programmable on one or both of two groups. Pressing ACO does not clear the alarm cause or condition.

Internal buzzer and relay output are disabled when ACO is activated.

To physically cutoff alarms

To extinguish any alarm LED, press the switch labeled ACO, which is located on the bottom of the MAC. Except any specific configuration as per shown in the next section, deactivating an alarm turns off the three CR, MJ and MN LEDs. However, the

MAC cards continue to report the alarm message until the original alarm condition is cleared.


6-161


To cutoff alarms using software

Using TL1

The following TL1 command remotely performs the same function as pressing the

ACO switch physically on the MAC card.

Input Syntax

OPR-ACO-ALL::: ctag ;

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  MAC  Set Alarm Cutoff

Cutoff alarm configuration

Note:


On the MAC card’s front panel there are two colomns of Alarm level LEDs labeled 1 &

2. It is possible to cutoff the LEDs on first, second, both ranges, or disabling the ACO

(none).

Using TL1

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-MAC::: ctag :: ACO=aco ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-MAC::: MYCTAG :: ACO=2 ;

Parameter name

ACO

Possible Default configurations parameters

1, 2, BOTH, NONE 1

Description

This is the parameter to choose for applying the cutoff on the range 1,

2 both ranges or none


6-162

Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements 

MAC

 Alarm Cutoff

Select the colomn 1, 2 or both.


6.11.1.4 Alarm Escalation

The OSA 5548C SSU has the capability to escalate the severity of an active alarm to a higher level after a defined time (24 hours by default).

Example:

After a delay of 24 hours an active alarm with a Minor (MN) severity will escalate to a

Major (MJ) severity.

Note:


Using TL1

To modify the escalation delay, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

ED-EQPT-MAC::: ctag :: ALMESC=almesc ;

Example:

ED-EQPT-MAC::: MYCTAG :: ALMESC=48 ;

Parameter name

ALMESC


0, 6…48


24

Description

This is the delay in hour after which a severity of an active alarm is escalated to a higher level. 0 means no escalation.


6-163


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View

 Elements  MAC  Alarm

escalation

Set “ON” to enable the alarm escalation function and then configure a time between 6 and 48 hous.

6.11.2 Retrieving Current Active Alarms with Software

This section explains how to retrieve current active Alarms Reported by the shelf and the syntax.

Note:

For retrieving all the alarms and events, refer to section 6.11.4

There are many parameters in response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active alarms, which are described below:

 Element on which the alarm status is requested (AID)

The Cards Group’s current active alarms, as well as alarms from the entire shelf.

 Notification Code (NTFCNCDE)

This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm (Critical, Major, Minor or

Non-Alarmed).

 Condition Type (CONDTYPE)

This is the type of the alarm condition, which is written as an alarm abbreviation, i.e. LOS for Loss Of Signal.

 Service Effect (SRVEFF)

This parameter reports whether the service is affected (SA) or not (NSA).

 Location (LOCN)

This parameter indicates the location of alarm. If the alarm concerns the card itself, the response is called “NEAR END” (NEND) and if the alarm occurs on a distant device that is connected to the card, it is called “FAR END” (FEND).

 Direction (DIRN)

This is the direction of the alarm condition, which can be Transmitted (TRMT),

Received (RCV), Both Transmitted and Received (BTH) or Non Applicable

(NA).

 Time period (TMPER)

Accumulation time period for Performance Measurement parameters.


6-164


 Occurrence Date (OCRDATE)

This is the date when the event/alarm occurred.

 Occurrence Time (OCRTM)

This is the time when the event/alarm occurred.

 Condition Description (CONDESCR)

This parameter describes the alarm condition in up to 64 characters.

 Detailed information of the element (AIDET)

Detailed and supplementary information of the card or element of details of the current alarm, to identify the location of the reported trouble.

 Observed Behavior (OBSDBHVR)

This concerns the behavior observed resulting from the trouble reported by this alarm. It is limited to 512 characters.

 Expected Behavior (EXPTBHVR)

This concerns the behavior expected. Its deviation is described in the observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble. It is limited to 512 characters.

 Diagnostic Type (DGNTYPE)

Type of the diagnostic routine used to isolate the trouble.

 Trouble Isolation (TBISLT)

Significance of the isolation information provided by the card or element in question included in this message.

Using TL1

The following TL1 command is required to retrieve the current active alarms.

Input Syntax

RTRV-ALM::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

RTRV-ALM::

THC

: MYCTAG ;


Output Syntax

“

aid

:

ntfcncde

,

condtype

,

srveff

,[

ocrdat

],[

ocrtm

],[

locn

],[

dirn

],[

tmper

]:[

conddescr

],[

aiddet

],[

obsdbhvr

],[

exptdbhvr

]:[

dgntype

],[

t blislt

]”

;


6-165


Parameter name

AID

NTFCNCDE

CONDTYPE

SRVEFF

OCRDAT*

OCRTM*

LOCN

DIRN

TMPER

CONDDESCR*

AIDDET*

OBSDBHVR*

EXPTDBHVR*

DGNTYPE*

TBLISLT*


INC-1, INC-2, INC,

GPS, THC, SGC,

OUC-1..OUC-10,

OUC, MAC, ALL

CR, MJ, MN, NA


NULL

Description

Cards from which the active alarms are requested

CONDTYPE

SA, NSA

2004-01-01..2099-

12-31

NULL

NULL

00-00-00..23-59-59 NULL

NEND, FEND

TRMT, RCV, BTH,

NA

\"CONDDESCR\"

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

Notification code associated with the alarm conditions being retrieved.

Type of alarm condition.

Effect on service caused by the alarm. SA: Service Affecting; NSA: on Service Affecting.

Date when the triggering event occurred.

Time when the triggering event occurred.

Single location for which an alarm condition is reported.

Direction of the alarm condition, relative to the identified entity.

Accumulation time period for PM

(Performance Measurement) parameters.

Detailed text description of the trouble. Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes. identification used to identify the location of the reported.

Observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble. Limited to

512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

Expected behavior whose deviation is described in observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble. Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

Type of diagnostic routine used to isolate the trouble.


*: Not software configurable


6-166

Using SyncView


Open the Event Viewer and look at the Active tab

Note:

Refer to the SyncView manual for EventViewer description and use.

This section explains how to retrieve alarm conditions, which means all alarms and events reported by the shelf and their syntax.

The parameters in the response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active alarms are the following:


The Cards Group’s current active alarms and events, as well as alarms and events from the entire shelf.



 Location (LOCN)

This parameter indicates the location of alarm. If the alarm concerns the card itself, the response is called “NEAR END” (NEND) and if the alarm occurs on a distant device that is connected to the card, it is called “FAR END” (FEND).


6-167


 Direction (DIRN)

This is the direction of the alarm condition, which can be Transmitted (TRMT),

Received (RCV), Both Transmitted and Received (BTH) or Non Applicable

(NA).

 Time period (TMPER)

Accumulation time period for Performances Measurement parameters.


This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm (Critical, Major, Minor or Non

Applicable).


This parameter inform if the service is affected (SA) or not (NSA).






This parameter describes the alarm condition



Input Syntax:

RTRV-COND:: aid :

ctag

::[

condtype

],[

locn

],[

dirn

];

Example:

RTRV-COND:: OUC-2 :

MYCTAG

::,,;


Output Syntax

“

aid

:[

ntfcncde

],

condtype

,[

srveff

],[

ocrdat

],[

ocrtm

],[

locn

],[

dir n

],[

tmper

],[

conddescr

]”;

Parameter name

AID

NTFCNCDE

CONDTYPE

LOCN

DIRN

TMPER


INC-1, INC-2, INC,

GPS, THC, SGC,

OUC-1..OUC-10,

OUC, MAC, ALL

CR, MJ, MN, NA

CONDTYPE

NEND, FEND

TRMT, RCV, BTH,

NA


NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

Description

Cards from which the alarms conditions are requested








6-168



SRVEFF*

OCRDAT*

configurations

SA, NSA

2004-01-01..2099-12-

31

parameters

NULL

NULL

Effect on service caused by the alarm. SA: Service Affecting;

NSA: on Service Affecting.


OCRTM* 00-00-00..23-59-59 NULL Time when the triggering event occurred.

CONDDESCR* \"CONDDESCR\" NULL Detailed trouble. Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

*: Not software configurable

6.11.4.1 Overview

The OSA 5548C SSU can store up to 256 alarms & events in its memory for history log purposes. Once the memory has reached this number of items, it overwrites the old ones to store the new ones, as a FIFO (First alarm IN – First alarm OUT) system.

Should a greater number of historical alarms be required, SyncView PLUS software is recommended, which stores an unlimited number of alarms and events.

6.11.4.2 Retrieving the Alarm History

The parameters in the response of the TL1 command to retrieve the active alarms are the following:


The Cards Group’s historic of alarms and events, as well as historic of alarms and events from the entire shelf.


This is the alarm severity associated to the alarm (Critical, Major, Minor or Non

Applicable).




This parameter inform if the service is affected (SA) or not (NSA).

 Automatic message TAG (ATAG)

Unique identifier of the set message. It is an integer number called

Autonomous message TAG (ATAG).






6-169


 ATAG for the Cleared Alarm (CLRATAG)

Once the alarm cleared, the 5548C generates a unique identifier number called the Autonomous message TAG (ATAG).

 Date of the Cleared Alarm (CLRDAT)

This is the date when the alarm has been cleared.

 Time of the Cleared Alarm (CLRTM)

This is the time when the alarm has been cleared.


This parameter describes the alarm condition.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

RTRV-ALM-HIST::: ctag ::[

ntfcncde

],[

condtype

],[

srveff

];

Example

RTRV-ALM-HIST::: MYCTAG ::

MJ

,,

NSA

;

The response is formatted such as below.

Output Syntax

“

aid

:

atag

,

ntfcncde

,

condtype

,

srveff

,

ocrdat

,

ocrtm

,[

clratag

],

[

clrdat

],[

clrtm

]:[

conddescr

]”;

Parameter name

AID

NTFCNCDE


INC-1, INC-2, INC,

GPS, THC, SGC,

OUC-1..OUC-10,

OUC, MAC, ALL

CR, MJ, MN, NA


NULL

Description

Cards needed to request the active alarms

CONDTYPE

SRVEFF

LOCN*

DIRN*

TMPER*

OCRDAT*

OCRTM*

CONDTYPE

SA, NSA

NEND, FEND

TRMT, RCV, BTH,

NA

2004-01-01..2099-12-

31

00-00-00..23-59-59

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL



Effect on service caused by the alarm








6-170



CLRTAG*

configurations

0…65535

parameters

NULL ATAG of the clear message

CLRDAT*

CLRTM*

2004-01-01..2099-12-

31

00-00-00..23-59-59

NULL

NULL

CONDDESCR* \"CONDDESCR\" NULL

Date when the triggering event has been cleared.

Time when the triggering event has been cleared. text description of the trouble. Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

*: Not software configurable with the command RTRV-ALM-HIST

Using SyncView

Open the Event Viewer and look at the History tab. For the occurrences, which have not been acknowledged yet, they are shown on the Active Window.

Note:

Refer to the SyncView manual for EventViewer description and use.

6.11.4.3 Erasing the Alarm History

Should it is needed to clear the complete alarm & event history stored in the OSA

5548C, the following TL1 command is required.

Input Syntax

INIT-ALM-HIST::: ctag ;


6-171


6.11.5.1 Message types

An autonomous message is information spontaneously sent by the OSA 5548C SSU when something happens in the system. The following types of autonomous messages are available:

 Alarm message (ALM)

Message sent as soon as an alarm is detected in the shelf

 Event message (EVT)

Message sent as soon as an event is detected in the shelf

 Performance message (PM)

This message reports the performances being measured.

 Switching message (SW)

This message is reported when an active card (typically card A) has switched to a standby card, i.e. INC-1-A to INC-1-B.

6.11.5.2 Alarm Code Parameters in Autonomous Alarm Messages

(almcde)

When receiving automatic alarm messages, a couple of characters are written at the beginning of the message, this is called “almcde”.

Example of autonomous alarm message:

MAC-ACK 118-29-01 00-36-43

**

2784 REPT ALM

"SGC: MJ ,EQPT,SA,2005-29-01,00-36-43,,NA:\"Output failure\""

;

Alarm code

*C

**

*

A

Description Abbreviation

Critical Alarm condition

Major Alarm condition

Minor Alarm condition

Non-alarmed or cleared autonomous message.

CR

MJ

MN

CL or NA


6-172


6.11.5.3 Message Format

Given the message type definitions previously explained, this is an example of message format:

Output Syntax almcde ctag REPT

rept

“[

message

]”

;

Possible configurations for

rept

ALM

EVT

PM

SW

Description

Alarm message

Event message

Performance Measurement message

Switching card message

Note:

To understand the

message

given in the autonomous message, read the next chapters accordingly.

6.11.5.4 Message encapsulated in Alarm (ALM) report

This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when an alarm occurs.

Output Syntax almcde ctag REPT ALM

“

aid

:

ntfcncde

,

condtype

,

srveff

,[

ocrdat

],[

ocrtm

],[

locn

],[

dirn

],

[

tmper

]:[

conddescr

],[

aiddet

],[

obsdbhvr

],[

exptdbhvr

]:[

dgntype

],

[

tblislt

]”

;


6-173

Parameter name

AID

NTFCNCDE


INC-1, INC-2, INC,

GPS, THC, SGC,

OUC-1..10, OUC,

MAC, ALL

CR, MJ, MN, NA



Description

Card related to the alarm report

NULL

CONDTYPE CONDTYPE

SRVEFF SA, NSA

LOCN

DIRN

NEND, FEND

NULL

NULL

NULL

TRMT, RCV, BTH, NA NULL

TMPER NULL

OCRDAT

OCRTM

2004-01-01..2099-12-

31

00-00-00..23-59-59

CONDDESCR \"CONDDESCR\"

AIDDET

OBSDBHVR

EXPTDBHVR

DGNTYPE

TBLISLT

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL



Effect on service caused by the alarm

Single location for which an alarm


Accumulation time period for

PM (Performance

Measurement) parameters.



Detailed text description of the trouble. Limited to 64 characters enclosed within escaped quotes. identification used to identify the location of the reported.

Observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble. Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

Expected behavior whose deviation is described in observed behavior that resulted in this reported trouble. Limited to 512 characters enclosed within escaped quotes.

Type of diagnostic routine used to isolate the trouble.



6-174


6.11.5.5 Message Encapsulated in Event (EVT) Report

This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when an event occurs.

Output Syntax almcde ctag REPT EVT

“

aid

:[

ntfcncde

],

condtype

,[

srveff

],[

ocrdat

],[

ocrtm

],[

locn

],

[

dirn

],[

tmper

]”

;

Parameter Possible name

AID

configurations

INC-1, INC-2, INC, GPS,

THC, SGC, OUC-

1…OUC-10, OUC, MAC,

ALL

NTFCNCDE CR, MJ, MN, NA

CONDTYPE CONDTYPE

SRVEFF SA, NSA

LOCN

DIRN

OCRDAT

OCRTM

TMPER

NEND, FEND

TRMT, RCV, BTH, NA


NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

NULL

2004-01-01..2099-12-31 NULL

00-00-00..23-59-59 NULL

NULL

Description

Cards related to the event report

Notification code associated with the event conditions being retrieved.

Type of event condition.

Effect on service caused by the event

Single location for which an alarm




Accumulation time period for

PM (Performance

Measurement) parameters.


6-175


6.11.5.6 Message Encapsulated in Switching (SW) Report

This message is spontaneously reported by the OSA 5548C SSU when two cards from the same group have swapped, i.e. THC-A becomes in stand-by and THC-B becomes active.

Output Syntax almcde ctag REPT SW

“

actid

,

stbyid

”

;

Parameter name

ACTID


STBYID

INC-1-A…INC-2-B, ,GPS-A,

GPS-B, THC-A, THC-B, SGC-

A, SGC-B, MAC-A, MAC-B

INC-1-A…INC-2-B, ,GPS-A,

GPS-B,THC-A, THC-B, SGC-

A, SGC-B, MAC-A, MAC-B

Description

This is the card which was in Stand-by and now has became as Active

This is the card which was Active and now has became in Stand-by

6.11.5.7 Message Encapsulated in Database Change (DBCHG) Report

This function is not implemented yet.

6.11.5.8 Message Encapsulated in Performance Measurement (PM)

Report

Refer to section 6.12

6.11.5.9 Retrieving all Autonomous Messages

To retrieve a list of queued autonomous messages or a missing one, use the following TL1 command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-AO::: ctag ::[ ATAGSEQ=atagseq ],[ MSGTYPE=msgtype ],

[ DBCHGSEQ=dbchgseq ];

Example:

RTRV-AO::: MYCTAG :: MSGTYPE=PM ;

Output Syntax sid date time

ctag

/* message */

;


6-176

Parameter name

ATAGSEQ

MSGTYPE

DBCHSEQ

MESSAGE*


1…9999


ALM, EVT, PM

1…99999

SA, NSA

NULL

NULL

NULL

Description


This is the ATAG of the autonomous message to be retrieved. Multiple or range values can be specified by using “&” or “&&” notation.

This message can be used together with the MSGTYPE parameter. It is not usable if DBCHSEQ is configured

Type of message to be retrieved

Sequence number of DBCHG

(Database Change) messages.

This is the autonomous message

6.11.5.10 Deleting Autonomous Messages

It is possible to clear the entire automatic message log or any specified autonomous message contained in the log.

The following command is required.

Input Syntax

INIT-AO::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

INIT-AO::

ALM

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID


ALM, EVT, PM,

DBCHG, SW, ALL

Description

This is the type of autonomous message that you want to clear.

ALM: Alarm

EVT: Events

PM: Performance Measurement

DBCHG: Database Change

SW: Switching


6-177


6.12 Performance Measurement (PM)

6.12.1 Overview

6.12.1.1 Introduction

The OSA 5548C SSU is able to make performance measurements of signals fed into its input and therefore provides information about the signal quality.

The measurement system is embedded in the INC cards, which compare the input signal against a reliable frequency reference produced by the signal filtered and processed by the active THC card.

The user can also define a performance threshold to disqualify and reject input signals that fail to meet this programmable threshold.

The OSA 5548C SSU measures and calculates performances in Ym (fractional frequency), TDEV (Time DEViation) and MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error).

6.12.1.2 Requirement

The performance measurements can be performed when the input line to be measured meets one of the following criteria:

 Enabled: the line is activated to select an input reference.

 Monitored: the input line is not enabled, nor disabled, just monitored in order to assess (measure) the signal.

The Performance Measurement must be enabled and should not be in alarm or disabled.

One of the input references must be enabled and selected (qualified) by the OSA

5548C SSU. This active input is used as the Performance Measurement reference, once it has been processed by THC filtering

Note:

One of the input references must be enabled and selected (qualified) by the OSA 5548C SSU. This active input is used as the Performance

Measurement reference, once it has been processed by THC filtering.


6-178



The OSA 5548C SSU performs the input signal measurement every second within a period of 3 hours, to create a performance measurement set. The OSA 5548C can store up to 8 sets of measurements over 24 hours. To store and display more measurement results (sets), we recommend SyncView PLUS remote management software.

Characteristics Description

PM resolution

Sampling rate

Duration of an interval for the calculation & measurement of a PM set

Resolution of the measurement (the smallest unit measured)

This is the rate of the measurement sampling. So, each second the system measures the input signal quality

The duration of a PM set. As soon as an input reference is detected as good (OK), the measurement process starts for 3 hours, thereafter; it restarts a new set, and so on until that an alarm or a PM deactivation is detected.

Value

1 ns

1 s

3 h

6.12.2.1 Turn ON or OFF the PM

To turn on the performance measurement function, the following TL1 command is required.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

SET-PM::: ctag ::

pmon

;

Example:

SET-PM::: MYCTAG ::

ON

;

Parameter name

PMON


ON, OFF


ON

Description

ON to activate the Performance

Measurement process and OFF to disable it.


6-179


Using SyncView

Open the Physical or Logical View  Elements  Inputs 

Then select Perf Enabled or Perf Disabled

6.12.2.2 Initializing PM

Note:

As long as a PM set (3 hours of measurement) is not terminated, it can be reset.

To reset all the on-going performance measurements (on all the input lines), the user can turn off the PM process and then turn-on to restart a new one.

To reset the on-going PM set on a specific input line, the following TL1 command is required.

Input Syntax

INIT-PM::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

INIT-PM::

IL-2-1

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID


IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS

parameters

Description

This parameter is the input line to be reset.

6.12.3 Delays to Retrieve the 1 st

Result and Time

Intervals for Updates

There is no need to wait 3 hours to get a measurement result or a measurement update once the first result has been received. The first measurements can be seen after the time specified in the tables below and then, each time interval written in the column on the right of the below MTIE and TDEV tables.


6-180


6.12.3.1 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results

PM observation time

MTIE-1S

MTIE-1M

MTIE-15M

MTIE-30M

MTIE-1H

Delay to get the first

PM result

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

1800s (30min)

3600s (1h)

Time interval to get a new PM update after the 1 st

measurement

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

No update as it is the latest value of the time interval

Table 6-16 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve MTIE PM Results

6.12.3.2 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results

PM observation time

TDEV-1S

TDEV-4S

TDEV-16S

TDEV-64S

TDEV-256S

Delay to get the first

PM result

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

1800s (30min)

3600s (1h)

Time interval to get a new PM update after the 1 st

measurement

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

900s (15min)

No update as it is the latest value of the time interval

Table 6-17 Delays and Intervals to Retrieve TDEV PM Results

6.12.3.3 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM results

PM observation time Delay to get the PM result

Table 6-18 Delays to Retrieve Ym PM Results


6-181


For retrieving the current measurement results or one the 8 previous ones stored in the OSA 5548C SSU, the following command is required.

Using TL1

Input Syntax

RTRV-PM::

aid

: ctag ::

kind

,[

set

];

Example:

RTRV-PM::

IL-1-2

: MYCTAG ::

MTIE

,

2

;


Output Syntax

ctag

“

aid

:

kind

,

date

,

time : point1 , point2 , point3 , point4 , point5 , point6

”

;

Parameter name

AID

KIND

SET

DATE*

TIME*

POINT1*

POINT2*

POINT3*

POINT4*

POINT5*


IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS

parameters

MTIE, TDEV, YM

This parameter is the input line to select for retrieving its PM results

This is the type of value to retrieve

1…9 1 This is the PM set to retrieve, 1 is the currently calculated (result by default). 2 is the previously stored and the 9 is the oldest one.

This is the PM set date 2004-01-01..2099-

12-31

00-00-00..23-59-59 This is the PM set time

1E-9..1E0 For MTIE: MTIE_1S

For TDEV: TDEV_1S

For YM: YM_60S

1E-9..1E0 For MTIE: MTIE_1M

For TDEV: TDEV_4S

For YM: YM_540S


For TDEV: TDEV_16S

For YM: YM_15M


For TDEV: TDEV_64S

For YM: YM_1H

1E-9..1E0 For MTIE: MTIE_1H

For TDEV: TDEV_256S

For YM: YM_2H


6-182


Parameter name

POINT6*

Possible Default Description configurations parameters


For TDEV: TDEV_1000S

For YM: YM_3H

*: Not software selectable

Using SyncView

Open Performances

Note:

Refer to the SyncView manual for Performances Interface description and use.


6-183


6.12.5 Receiving Spontaneous Measurement Results

Once the OSA 5548C SSU is able to provide a first PM result or an update, it will show it as an autonomous message formatted as below.

Output Syntax atag REPT

“

aid

:

kind

,

date

,

time : point1 , point2 , point3 , point4 , point5 , point6

”

;

Parameter name

AID

KIND

DATE

TIME

POINT1


IL-1-1…IL-2-4,

GPS

MTIE, TDEV, YM

parameters

2004-01-01..2099-

12-31

00-00-00..23-59-59

1E-9..1E0

POINT2

POINT3*

POINT4*

POINT5*

POINT6*

1E-9..1E0

1E-9..1E0

1E-9..1E0

1E-9..1E0

1E-9..1E0

Description

This parameter is the input line from which the result is received

This is the type of value received

This is the PM set date

This is the PM set time

For MTIE: MTIE_1S

For TDEV: TDEV_1S

For YM: YM_60S

For MTIE: MTIE_1M

For TDEV: TDEV_4S

For YM: YM_540S

For MTIE: MTIE_15M

For TDEV: TDEV_16S

For YM: YM_15M

For MTIE: MTIE_30M

For TDEV: TDEV_64S

For YM: YM_1H

For MTIE: MTIE_1H

For TDEV: TDEV_256S

For YM: YM_2H

For MTIE: MTIE_3H


For YM: YM_3H


6-184


The OSA 5548C SSU can be configured to disqualify an input line based on performance outside a user define MTIE, TDEV or Ym threshold.

6.12.6.1 Default MTIE Threshold

According to ITU-T G.812 clock input section 9.1.1, the default MTIE threshold (mask) configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table below:

MTIE TAU MTIE [S]

MTIE-1S 0.75E-6

MTIE-1M 2.0E-6

MTIE-15M 4.5E-6

MTIE-30M 5.0E-6

MTIE-1H 5.0E-6

MTIE-3H 5.0E-6

Table 6-19 Default MTIE Threshold

Figure 6-20 : Default MTIE Threshold


6-185


6.12.6.2 Default TDEV Threshold

According to ITU-T G.812 clock input section 9.1.2, the default TDEV threshold

(mask) configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table below:

TDEV TAU TDEV [S]

TDEV-1S 0.34E-7

TDEV-4S 0.34E-7

TDEV-16S 0.34E-7

TDEV-64S 1.08E-7

TDEV-256S 1.70E-7

TDEV-1000S 1.70E-7

Table 6-20 Default TDEV Threshold

Figure 6-21 : Default TDEV Threshold


6-186


6.12.6.3 Default Ym Threshold

According to GR-1244 section R3-30 related to ST3, the default Ym threshold (mask) configured in the OSA 5548C SSU is described in the table below:

Ym time

Ym-60S

Ym-540S

Ym-15M

Ym-1H

Ym-2H

Ym-3H

Ym

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

± 1.2E-5 (12ppm)

Table 6-21 Default Ym Threshold

df/F(mean)

-2.0E-6

-4.0E-6

-6.0E-6

-8.0E-6

-1.0E-5

-1.2E-5

1.2E-5

1.0E-5

8.0E-6

6.0E-6

4.0E-6

2.0E-6

0

0 1000 2000

Ym-15M

Ym-540S

Ym-60S

3000 4000

Ym-1H

5000 6000 7000

Ym-2H

8000 9000 10000 11000

Ym-3H

Time [s]

Figure 6-22 : Default Ym Threshold


6-187


6.12.6.4 Editing the PM threshold

The PMthreshold can be modified by the user for any input line.

The following command is required to retrieve the actual mask.

Input Syntax

RTRV-PM-TH::

aid

: ctag ::

kind

;

Example:

RTRV-PM-TH::

IL-2-3

: MYCTAG ::

TDEV

;


Output Syntax

ctag

“

aid

:

kind : point1 , point2 , point3 , point4 , point5 , point6

”

;

To set a threshold, the following TL1 command is necessary

Input Syntax

ED-PM-

TH::

aid

: ctag ::

kind : point1 , point2 , point3 , point4 , point5 , point6

;

Example:

ED-PM-TH::

IL-1-2

: MYCTAG ::

YM : 5.2E-6 , 5.2E-6 , 5.2E-6 , 5.2E-6 , 5.2E-

6 , 5.2E-6

;

Parameter name

AID

KIND

POINT1

POINT2


IL-1-1…IL-2-4, GPS

parameters

MTIE, TDEV, YM

This parameter is the input line for which you want to retrieve or edit the mask

This is the type of mask

1E-9..1E0 For MTIE: MTIE_1S

For TDEV: TDEV_1S

For YM: YM_60S


For TDEV: TDEV_4S

For YM: YM_540S


6-188

Parameter name

POINT3

POINT4

POINT5

POINT6


Possible Default Description configurations parameters


For TDEV: TDEV_16S

For YM: YM_15M


For TDEV: TDEV_64S

For YM: YM_1H


For TDEV: TDEV_256S

For YM: YM_2H



For YM: YM_3H

6.13 Firmware Download

6.13.1 Overview

The OSA 5548C SSU incorporates a FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client which allows upgrading all its cards remotely from a FTP server.

FTP

Firmware files download

LAN/WAN Ethernet

FTP

TL1

OS

A 55

48C

SS

U

T

L1

Remote 5548C user

Figure 6-23 : Firmware Download Overview


Local 5548C user

6-189


The remote or the local user should configure the FTP server parameters in the

5548C SSU. Then, the user downloads the firmware files to the OSA 5548C SSU.

Once the download completed, the firmware files are stored in the MAC card.

Thereafter, the user can upgrade any card in the shelf by transferring the firmware from the MAC card to the intended card.

6.13.2 Prerequisites

6.13.2.1 FTP Server

An FTP server on the OSA 5548C network requires downloading files to the shelf. IP address, username and password access of that server are required.

6.13.2.2 Firmware Files

Before gaining FTP server access from within the 5548C, the firmware files are placed in a folder in the FTP root of the server.

The complete files contain 1 file per card type, 4 files for the MAC cards and 1 catalog

(CATALOG.CAT) file.

6.13.3.1 FTP Parameters Configuration

The first step in the download procedure is to configure the FTP client parameters in the OSA 5548C SSU.

The following parameters can be configured in the OSA 5548C SSU.

 IP Address (FTP)

This is the external FTP server’s IP address

 Source Path (SRC_PATH)

This is the path to the directory where the firmware files are located from the root of the external FTP server

 User (USER)

This is the user identification to access the external FTP server

 Password (PWD)

This is the password identification to access the external FTP server

IMPORTANT:

The password must contain only uppercase characters (A-Z), spaces and numbers (1-9)


6-190


Using TL1

To set the FTP server parameter in the OSA 5548C, the following command is required.

Input Syntax

SET-DNLD::: ctag ::

ftp

,

src_path

,

user

,

pwd

;

Example:

SET-DNLD::: MYCTAG ::

149.133.41.52

,

5548C_V2

,

USER20

,

PWD99

;

To retrieve or to check the configuration, use the following command.

Input Syntax

RTRV-DNLD::: ctag ;


Output Syntax

;

USER

PWD*

“

ftp

Parameter name

FTP

SRC_PATH

,

src_path

,

user

”

Possible configurations Default

0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 or the FTP domain name

parameters

Description

IP address of the FTP server where the firmware files can be downloaded

This is the path where the folder is located from the root of the FTP server.

User name to access the

FTP server

Password to access the

FTP server

Table 6-22 Not retrievable with TL1 commands for evident security reason


6-191

Using SyncView

Go to Configuration  FTP Downloader


Go to Options  FTP Configuration

Introduce the FTP IP Address, the path (FTP Server Path) to where the Firmware files are located in the server from the root, the FTP User Name and Password and click OK


6-192


6.13.3.2 Downloading Files from the FTP Server

After setting-up the FTP configuration in the OSA 5548C SSU, the download of the firmware files from the FTP server to the MAC card can be executed.

Note:

After download completes, the files are stored in the MAC card, however, cards are not upgraded yet. For card upgrading, follow the next section.


Check that the Ethernet connection between the FTP server and the

OSA 5548C SSU is correctly established prior to starting the file download.

Using TL1

The following TL1 command is required to start the download.

Input Syntax

OPR-DNLD::: ctag ;

During the download progress, you should receive the following message.

Output Syntax

;

Note:

ABT-DNLD::: ctag ;

Once the download is successfully completed, the message below is displayed.

Output Syntax

If it is required to abort the download progression, use the following command.

Input Syntax

;


6-193


Using SyncView

Tthe main window will show the following. Select the Equipment type, the available version required to be downloaded and click on the Download Button to execute the download process.

Select the equipment type

Select the Firmware file located in the

FTP Server

List of Firmware contained in the above selected file.


6-194


6.13.3.3 Installing New Firmware into a Card

Once the MAC card receives the downloaded files, the user can transfer the file to any card.

The user can install new firmware in a single card (recommended) or in a card group, in the A or B card of the same card type.


While a card is being upgraded with a new firmware, its function will be interrupted, causing a possible signal output outage. Single card upgrade operations are recommended to avoid shelf synchronization service outages on the whole shelf.

Example: if you need to install the firmware into the INC-1-A, verify that the INC-1-B protection mate is installed to protect it as the A card will not be able to supply signal when it is being initialized.

A few exceptions can avoid the loss of synchronization service, such as the following examples

1. If an INC card is unprotected and you have at least one THC installed in the shelf, the THC will run in holdover during the firmware installation of the INC in question and continue to provide a good signal on the output.

2. If you have only one THC card installed and at least one INC in the group 1 (INC-1-A or INC-1-B), the shelf will continue in pass-through mode during THC download.

Note:

The MADDS is a component embedded in the THC cards, which needs to be upgraded right after the THC card itself.

MADDS-A is embedded in THC-A and MADDS-B in THC-B.

Note:

If it is required to do a roll back to the previous card version, follow the next section.


6-195


Using TL1

The following command is required to install new firmware in any card from the MAC card.

Input Syntax

ACT-DNLD::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

ACT-DNLD::

MADDS-B

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID


INC-1-A..INC-2-B, INC-A, INC-B,

INC, GPS-A, GPS-B, GPS, THC-

A, THC-B, THC, MADDS-A,

MADDS-B, MADDS, SGC-A,

SGC-B, SGC, OUC-1-A..OUC-10-

B, OUC-A, OUC-B, OUC, MAC-A,

MAC-B, MAC

Description

This is the card or the card group where you want to install the new firmware


6-196


Using SyncView

Open the Downloader



Select the card to upgrade by clicking on the checkbox “Dwnld”; and then start the upgrade process by clicking the Download button.

The list of number on each card can be used to make an upgrade sequence of card upgrade strating from one to the highest number set. The Download Method can be set to upgrade all cards at the same time.


6-197


6.13.3.4 Roll Back to the Previous Firmware Version

1

In case of unexpected condition or eventual firmware issues after upgrade, the OSA

5548C is able to reinstall the previous version. The following command is required.


It is recommended to contact a Customer Support Representative before applying this command.

Input Syntax

DLT-DNLD::

aid

: ctag ;

Example:

DLT-DNLD::

THC-A

: MYCTAG ;

Parameter name

AID


INC-1-A..INC-2-B, INC-A, INC-B,

INC, GPS-A, GPS-B, GPS, THC-

A, THC-B, THC, MADDS-A,

MADDS-B, MADDS, SGC-A,

SGC-B, SGC, OUC-1-A..OUC-10-

B, OUC-A, OUC-B, OUC, MAC-A,

MAC-B, MAC

Description

This is the card or the card group where you want to reapply the previous version.

1

Not implemented yet


6-198

Chapter

7. Commissioning

Including:

 Introduction

 Configuration & Provisioning Procedures

 Test and Verification Procedure

Commissioning


7-1


Commissioning


7-2

Commissioning

7.1 Introduction

7.1.1 Overview

This chapter contains quick configuration and test procedures in order to set-up the

OSA 5548C SSU rapidly with fewer details than the previous chapter.

7.1.2 Prerequisites

Chapter 3 and 4 must be read before following this chapter, chapter 6 is an asset to better understanding the configuration protocols described in this chapter.

7.1.3 Requirements

To make configuration and tests, the following material and elements are required:

For basic tests and configuration

 The OSA 5548C SSU has already powered-up and the MAC card has ended its starting procedure as per described in chapter 5.

 A computer or laptop with the SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS software installed

 A serial NULL MODEM or AT-LINK cable with SUB-D 9 pins RS-232C terminations

 A multimeter and an oscilloscope bandwidth of at least 30 MHz

 A flat screwdriver

For remote Ethernet connection

 A LAN/WAN Ethernet network

 A 100 Base-T cable with RJ-45 terminations (10 Base-T is also working)

 A computer with Ethernet card embedded

 An IP address for the OSA 5548C SSU itself, the Mask address of the

LAN/WAN, the eventual Gateway IP addresses and mask addresses

 Optional: It is also possible to use a cross-connected 100 Base-T cable with

RJ-45 in order to make direct connection between your computer and the OSA

5548C SSU without passing through a LAN


7-3

Commissioning

7.2 Configuration & Provisioning Procedures



This section describes the main procedures to make the OSA 5548C working as required.

7.2.1.2 Requirements

The user should have a basic knowledge of TL1 command format and rules, such as described in chapter 6.

The SyncTerminal should be used to send TL1 commands as the most efficient way to configure and provision the OSA 5548C SSU.

7.2.2.1 Serial Connection & Login

STEP ACTION

1

Connect one serial cable end to the front or the rear LOCAL COMM.

Port

2

Connect the second serial cable end into the serial port of your computer

3

4

Start the SyncView software

Connect the 5548C via RS-232 using the default login and password

5

Launch the SyncTerminal interface


7-4

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

6

A new window on the right where it should be written:

Connecting to COM1 (or COM2)

Connected

Procedure 7-1 Serial Connection

Note:

For the first time, you need to configure the Ethernet network parameters via serial connection.

STEP ACTION

1

Enter the following TL1 command in one single line:

ED-COM-SYS::: CTAG ::[IPADDRESS=

###.###.###.###

],

[NETMASK=

###.###.###.###

],

[GW1ADDRESS=

###.###.###.###

],

[GW1NETMASK=

###.###.###.###

],

[GW2ADDRESS=

###.###.###.###

],

[GW2NETMASK=

###.###.###.###] ,

[ETHER_SPEED=

10/100

];

Follow what the SyncTerminal prompt to set the parameters and press enter.

2

Then, if the configuration has been settled correctly, you should be prompted with the following answer

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

3

Then, it is necessary to reboot the MAC card with the following command:

INIT-SYS::MAC-A: CTAG ::WARM;

4

Wait until the MAC has ended its reboot cycle

Procedure 7-2 Ethernet Configuration

7.2.2.3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration

STEP ACTION

1

To check if the Ethernet configuration has been done correctly, send


7-5

2

3

Commissioning

the following TL1 command:

RTRV-COM-SYS::: CTAG ;

Then if the configuration has been settled correctly, you should be prompted with the following answer

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

Here are the parameters you have configured

"

;

If the OSA 5548C is already connected to an Ethernet network, you can send a “PING” (START > RUN > CMD > write “PING xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

” replacing the x with the IP address) from any computer or device connected in the same network to query the connection.

Procedure 7-3 Verifying the Ethernet Configuration

STEP ACTION

1

Connect a 10 or 100 Base-T cable with RJ-45 terminations into the connector labeled “LAN COMM.” and the other end plugged into the

Ethernet network LAN/WAN.

2

3

If not yet done, connectyour computer to the same Ethernet Network and control that your IP address, Subnet Mask address as well as the

Gateway setting are correctly configured to work within the LAN.

Run the SyncView software


7-6

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

4

Connect the 5548C via TCP/IP using the

IP configured in the shelf.

6

Right-click on the 5548C Symbol and select SyncTerminal

7

Then the SyncTerminal shold be shown with the following sentence:

Connecting to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8000...

Connected

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address of the shelf

Procedure 7-4 Ethernet Connection

7.2.2.5 NTP Connection Procedure

STEP ACTION

1

Connect a 10 or 100 Base-T cable with RJ-45 terminations into the connector labeled “NTP.” and the other end plugged into the Ethernet network LAN/WAN.

2

3

If not yet done, connectyour computer to the same Ethernet Network and control that your IP address, Subnet Mask address as well as the

Gateway setting are correctly configured to work within the LAN.

Run the SyncView software or Syncterminal

4

Open the right windows

Using SyncView software

Click right mouse on the equipment and select physical or logical view


7-7

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

Using Syncterminal software


7-8

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

5 Using Syncview software (logical view)

Click right mouse on the TCC area and select “details…”


Select the “ED-EQPT-TCC” command.


7-9

ACTION

Using Syncview software

Commissioning


Example:

ED-EQPT-TCC::

TCC-1-

A

: MYCTAG :: IPADDRESS=123.100.12

4.120

, GATEWAY=123.100.124.100 ,

DHCP_MODE=ENABLE , ETHER_SDEF=AU

TO

, DUPLEX_MODE=FULL;

Procedure 7-5 NTP Connection


7-10

Commissioning

When an shelf upgrade is required, proceed as follow.

STEP ACTION

1

Install the FIRMWARE on a FTP server, which can be acceded by the

OSA 5548C SSU

2

Configure the FTP parameters with following command:

SET-DNLD::: CTAG ::

ftp_server_ip_address

,

directory_name

,

user_name

,

password

;

Example:

SET-DNLD::: CTAG ::

149.133.41.123

,

MAC48C

,

MYNAME

,

MYPWD

;

3

Check the parameters with the following command:

RTRV-DNLD::: CTAG

4

Download the firmware files from FTP to 5548C with the following command:

OPR-DNLD::: CTAG ;

The following answer should be shown during download process:

IP CTAG

<

IP CTAG

<

IP CTAG

<

Once completed, it is written an information as:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

5

;

To install the new firmware in any card, use the following command.

CAUTION:

Serious outage can result if the firmware installation is performed on an active card, as the card will not operate during download.

It is recommended to upgrade card by card during the maintenance window or before placing the shelf in service.

ACT-DNLD::

INC/INC-1-A..INC-2-B/INC-A/INC-B/GPS/GPS-

A/GPS-B/THC/THC-A/THC-B/MADDS/MADDS-A/MADDS-

B/SGC/SGC-A/SGC-B/OUC/OUC-1-A..OUC-10-B/OUC-A/OUC-

B/MAC/MAC-A/MAC-B/ALL

:CTAG;


7-11

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

If the shelf is physically visible, the operator should see the STATUS

LED in ORANGE during firmware installation.

After sending the above command, the following answer should be shown during installation process:

IP CTAG

<

IP CTAG

<

IP CTAG

<

Once completed, it is written an information as:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Note:

Do not forget to upgrade MADDS when upgrading the

THC, as they belongs to the same card.

Procedure 7-6 Firmware Upgrade


7-12

Commissioning

7.2.4.1 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name (SID)

STEP ACTION

1

Retrieve current name (SID) of the 5548C shelf:

RTRV-HDR:::CTAG;

And the answer should be shown as below:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

2

To edit the name, enter the following TL1 command in one single line:

SET-SID::: CTAG ::

MY5548C

;

Replace “MY5548C” with the name you want and press enter

3

Then, if the configuration has been settled correctly, you should be prompted with the following answer. The name should be shown instead of “MY5548C”

MY5548C DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Procedure 7-7 Setting the OSA 5548C SSU Name (SID)


7-13

Commissioning

7.2.4.2 Setting the Date and Time

STEP ACTION

1

Retrieve current Date and Time set in the 5548C shelf:

RTRV-HDR:::CTAG;

And the answer should be shown as below:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

2

Enter the following TL1 command in one single line:

ED-DAT::: CTAG ::

YYYY-MM-DD

,

HH-MM-SS

,

HH-MM

;

Replace “

YYYY-MM-DD

” by the date

Replace “

HH-MM-SS

” by the time (on 24 hours)

Replace”

HH-MM

” by the UTC offset (from -12-00 to 12-00)

Example:

ED-DAT::: MYCTAG ::

2006-02-18

,

09-30-00

,

02-00

;

3

Then, if the configuration has been settled correctly, you should be prompted with the following answer with the date and time you have set.

SID

YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Procedure 7-8 Setting the Date and Time


7-14

Commissioning

7.2.4.3 Disabling Empty (Unused) Slots

To avoid receiving alarms (e.g. IMPROPER REMOVAL) from empty slots, we recommend disabling (delete) the empty slots.

STEP ACTION

1

Locate the empty slot(s)

2

3

Send the following command, selecting the corresponding slot:

DLT-EQPT::

INC-1-A..INC-2-B/GPS-A/GPS-B/THC-A/THC-

B/SGC-A/SGC-B/OUC-1-A..OUC-10-B/MAC-A/MAC-B

: CTAG ;

Verify then, that no alarms are reported by the slots deleted sending the following command:

RTRV-ALM::

INC/INC-1/INC-2/GPS/THC/SGC/OUC/

OUC-1..OUC-10/MAC/ALL

: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-9 Disabling Empty (unused) Slots

7.2.5.1 E1 Input Line Configuration

STEP ACTION

1

Check the E1 port where the input line (IL) you want to configure is connected.

2

Configure the connector (E1_1 to E1_4) required to attribute to any of the 4 possible input lines (between 1-1 and 1-4) sending the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::INPUT=

E1_connector

;

Example:

3

4

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-1

:MYCTAG::INPUT=

E1_1

;

Configure the administration state of the line:

“Enabled” to allow the 5548C to use it,

“Disable”, to deactivate the line,

“Monitored” to allow the OSA 5548C to measure performance without using it:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::

ADM_STATE=

ENABLED/DISABLED/MONITORED

;

Configure the connection type made on the E1 connector (Bridged or

Terminated) with the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::

TERMINATION=

TERMINATED/BRIDGED

;


7-15

5

6

7

8

9

10

Commissioning

Configure the code (AMI/HDB3) used in the E1 signal with following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::CODE=

AMI/HDB3

;

Configure the Wait-To-Restore time (WTR) which is a configurable delay to make the 5548C waiting before selected a line recovered. The delay can be disabled or configured between 1 and 12 minutes.

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::WTR=

1..12/DISABLED

;

If necessary, attribute a tag to the input line, using the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::

TAG=

\”My Input Line Tag\”

;

Once the configuration finished you can check it with the following command:

RTRV-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ;

Then the SyncTerminal should show the following message in one single line where you can check the bold/blue parameters:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

input_line

:

OK

,


,

PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE/DISABLED:

INPUT=

E1_connector

,

ADM_STATE=


,

TERM=

TERMINATED/BRIDGED

,

CODE=

B8ZS/AMI

,

WTR=

1..12/DISABLED

,

FRCD=PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE,

OOF_DETECTION=DISDABLED/ENABLED/10-4/10-3/10-2,

CRC4_DETECTION=DISDABLED/ENABLED/10-4/10-3/10-2,

BPV_DETECTION=DISDABLED/ENABLED/10-4/10-3/10-2,

SA4=OFF/ON/SSM,SA5=OFF/ON/SSM,SA6=OFF/ON/SSM,

SA7=OFF/ON/SSM,SA8=OFF/ON/SSM,FREQ=2.048M",

TAG=


"

;

On the active INC card of the corresponding group, the LED related to the Input Line you configured, should either flashes in Green due to

Wait-To-Restore time, or lights permanently in Green.

Procedure 7-10 E1 Input Line Configuration


7-16

Commissioning

Note:

Further details on alarm detection (OOF, CRC-4, BPV and CV) configuration are described in section 6.5.7.2

STEP ACTION

1

Check the FREQ. BNC connector where the line you want to configure is connected.

2

Configure the connector (FREQ_1 to FREQ_4) required to attribute to any of the 4 possible input lines (between 1-1 and 1-4) sending the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::INPUT=

FREQ_connector

;

Example:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-2

:MYCTAG::INPUT=

FREQ_1

;

3

4

Configure the administration state of the line:

“Enabled” to allow the 5548C to use it,

“Disable”, to deactivate the line,

“Monitored” to allow the OSA 5548C to measure performance without using it:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::

ADM_STATE=


;

Configure the Wait-To-Restore time (WTR) which is a configurable delay to make the 5548C waiting before selected a line recovered. The delay can be disabled or configured between 1 and 12 minutes.

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::WTR=

1..12/DISABLED

;

5

6

7

If necessary, attribute a tag to the input line, using the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::

TAG=


;

Once the configuration finished you can check it with the following command:

RTRV-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ;

Then the SyncTerminal should show the following message in one single line where you can check the bold/blue parameters:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

input_line

:

OK

,


,

PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/FAILED/NONE/DISABLED:

INPUT=

FREQ_connector

,


7-17

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

8

ADM_STATE=


,

TERM=TERMINATED,

CODE=B8ZS/AMI,

WTR=

1..12/DISABLED

,

FRCD=PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE,





SA7=OFF/ON/SSM,SA8=OFF/ON/SSM,FREQ=

the frequency fed

",TAG=


"

;

On the active INC card of the corresponding group, the LED related to the Input Line you configured, should either flashes in Green due to

Wait-To-Restore time, or illuminates in solid Green.

Procedure 7-11 Frequency Input Line Configuration

7.2.5.3 Disabling an Unused Input Line

The purpose of disabling an unused input line, is to suppress alarms.

STEP ACTION

1

2

3

To discover which cards are unused, check the INC card input LEDs for RED condition after configuring the lines, and connecting them.

Then simply send the following command to all the unused lines:

ED-EQPT-IL::

input_line

: CTAG ::ADM_STATE=

DISABLED

;

Once the command is sent, the Red LED should be extinguished

Procedure 7-12 Disabling an Unused Input Line


7-18

7.2.6 Input Line Switching, Selection & Priorities

Commissioning

STEP ACTION

1

Establish and plan how to configure the selection mode between the input lines when one is rejected or failed:

 Switching mode over the input line

- Automatic (by default)

- Manual (only one specific input line)

- Forced Holdover

2

Configure the switching mode with the following command:

ED-EQPT-THC::: CTAG ::

MODE=

AUTO/MAN/FHLDVR

,

[MAN_INPUT=

IL-1-1/IL-1-2/IL-1-3/IL-1-4/IL-2-1/

IL-2-2/IL-2-3/IL-2-4/GPS

]

4

;

Configure the parameter “MAN_INPUT” with the input line you want only if you selected the Manual mode (MAN).

Verify the parameters settled with the below TL1 command:

RTRV-EQPT-THC::: CTAG ;

5

The response is formatted such as below:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

" OK :MODE=

AUTO/MAN/FHLDVR

,

MAN_INPUT=

IL-1-1/IL-1-2/IL-1-3/IL-1-4/IL-2-1/

IL-2-2/IL-2-3/IL-2-4/GPS

,

ACT_INPUT= IL-1-1/IL-1-2/IL-1-3/IL-1-4/IL-2-1/

IL-2-2/IL-2-3/IL-2-4/GPS,SSM=OFF/ON,SYS_MODE=MST"

;

Procedure 7-13 Switching and Selection Mode Configuration


7-19

Commissioning

When the selection mode has been set as AUTOMATIC, this configuration is required to set the priority on the input line. When two Input Lines (IL) are set with the same priority, the system selects the IL in non-reversive mode.

STEP ACTION

1

1 is the highest priority and 9 the lowest. To set the priorities, send the following TL1 command:

ED-PRIO::: CTAG ::IL-1-1=

1..9

,IL-1-2=

1..9

,

2

IL-1-3=

1..9

,IL-1-4=

1..9

, IL-2-1=

1..9

,IL-2-2=

1..9

,

IL-2-3=

1..9

,IL-2-4=

1..9

,GPS=

1..9

;

Verify the priority setting with the following TL1 command:

RTRV-PRIO::: CTAG ;

3


SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"IL-1-1=

1..9

,IL-1-2=

1..9

,IL-1-3=

1..9

,

IL-1-4=

1..9

, IL-2-1=

1..9

,IL-2-2=

1..9

,IL-2-3=

1..9

,

IL-2-4=

1..9

,GPS=

1..9

"

;

Procedure 7-14 Input Line Priorities Configuration

Note:

The line currently selected is shown on the digital display on the currently active THC card.


7-20

Commissioning

Two E1 configurations options can be applied to all Output Groups (OG).

Note:

One OG contains 10 Output Lines (OL). Each OUC groups provide 2 OG

(OL 1 to 10 and OL 11 to 20) for a total of 20 OL.

STEP ACTION

1

Configure one of the two E1 options (E1-1 or E1-2) with the following parameters:

 Code : HDB3 or AMI

 CRC-4 (CRC4): ON or OFF

 Time Slot 16 (TS16): CCS or CAS

 Idle code (IDLE): 0…255

ED-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1/E1-2

: CTAG ::

CODE=

HDB3/AMI

,CRC4=

OFF/ON

,TS16=

CCS/CAS

,IDLE=

0…255

;

2

Check the quality configured with the following command:

RTRV-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1/E1-2

: CTAG ;

3

4

Check the value written in blue:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

E1-1/E1-2

:CODE=

HDB3/AMI

,CRC4=

ON/OFF

,TS16=

CCS/CAS

,


SA7=OFF/ON/SSM,SA8=OFF/ON/SSM,IDLE=

0…255

"

;

Select the E1 configuration option (TYPE) to the Output Group (OG) required.

ED-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ::TYPE=

E1_1/E1_2

;

5

6

Retrieve the E1 configuration option with the following command.

RTRV-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ;

Check the value written after the “TYPE=”:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

1-1…10-2

:TYPE=

E1_1

,

E1_2

"

;

Procedure 7-15 E1 Output Signal Type Configuration


7-21

Commissioning

Note:

One OG contains 10 Output Lines (OL). Each OUC groups provide 2 OG

(OL 1 to 10 and OL 11 to 20) for a total of 20 OL.

STEP ACTION

1

Set the Frequency configuration option (TYPE) to the Output Group (OG) required.

ED-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ::TYPE=

FREQ

;

2


RTRV-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ;

3


SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

1-1…10-2

:TYPE=

FREQ

"

;

Procedure 7-16 Frequency Output Signal Configuration

STEP ACTION

1

If section 6.9.5 is properly done and section 8.2.1.7 succefully run. NTP output signal works properly.

Procedure 7-17 NTP Output Signal Configuration


7-22

Commissioning

To switch on the SSM mode, follow the next.

STEP ACTION

1

To switch the SSM on, the following command is required:

SET-SSM:::CTAG::

ON

;

2

Verify if the SSM is enabled with the following TL1 command:

RTRV-EQPT-THC::: CTAG ;

3

Check that it is written SSM=ON:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"OK:MODE=AUTO/MAN/FHLDVR,MAN_INPUT=IL-1-1…IL-2-4,

ACT_INPUT=IL-1-1…IL-2-4,SSM=

ON

"

;

Procedure 7-18 Enabling SSM Configuration


7-23

Commissioning

7.2.8.2 Forcing a SSM Quality Level on an Input Line

To force a quality on an available Input Line use the following procedure:

STEP ACTION

1

To force an SSM quality level, use the following command and choose the quality required among the different possibilities:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/2-4

: CTAG ::

FRCD=

PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE

;

2


RTRV-EQPT-IL::

1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/2-4

: CTAG ;

3

Check the value written after the “FRCD=”:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"input_line:OK,ENABLED/DISABLED/MONITORED,

PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE/FAILED/DISABLED:

INPUT=FREQ_connector,

ADM_STATE=ENABLED/DISABLED/MONITORED,

TERM=TERMINATED,

CODE=B8ZS/AMI,

WTR=1..12/DISABLED,

FRCD=


,





SA7=OFF/ON/SSM,SA8=OFF/ON/SSM,FREQ=the frequency fed",

TAG=\”My Input Line Tag\”"

;

Procedure 7-19 Forcing SSM Quality Level on Input Line


7-24

Commissioning

7.2.8.3 Generate a specific SSM quality on outputs and configuration of the Unknown SSM Quality Translation

When the SSM quality on the input lines is unknown, the 5548C is able to generate a specific SSM quality. The 5548C has also the capability to generate a defined SSM quality. The following procedure describes how to set these SSM configurations.

STEP ACTION

1

To force (FRCD) the SSM Quality and to generate a specific SSM quality when the SSM is unknown (UNK) on the input lines, use the following command:

ED-SSM::: CTAG ::UNK=


,

FRCD=


;

2

3


RTRV-SSM::: CTAG ;

Check the values written after the “UNK=” and “FRCD=”:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

" HLDVR=PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE,

UNK=


,

FRCD=


"

;

7.2.8.4 Sa bit configuration on Input Line

To set the Sa bit utilized to to supply SSM to the 5548C, use the following procedure.

STEP ACTION

1

To force an SSM quality level, use the following command and choose the quality required among the different possibilities:

ED-EQPT-IL::1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/2-4: CTAG ::

SSM_BIT=

SA4/SA5/SA6/SA7/SA8/NONE

;

2


RTRV-EQPT-IL::

1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/2-4

: CTAG ;


7-25

3

Commissioning

Check the value written after the “FRCD=”:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"input_line:OK,ENABLED/DISABLED/MONITORED,

PRC/SSU_A/SSU_B/SEC/DNU/NONE/FAILED/DISABLED:

INPUT=FREQ_connector,

ADM_STATE=ENABLED/DISABLED/MONITORED,

TERM=TERMINATED,

CODE=B8ZS/AMI,

WTR=1..12/DISABLED,

FRCD=


,




SA4=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA5=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA6=

OFF/ON/SSM

,

SA7=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA8=

OFF/ON/SSM

,FREQ=the frequency fed",

TAG=\”My Input Line Tag\”"

;

Procedure 7-20 Sa bit Configuration on Input

7.2.8.5 Sa bit configuration on Output Lines

To set the Sa bit required to supply the SSM on output, use the following procedure.

STEP ACTION

1

Configure one of the Sa bit (SA4 to SA8) as SSM in one of the two E1 options (E1-1 or E1-2)

ED-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1/E1-2

: CTAG ::

SA4=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA5=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA6=

OFF/ON/SSM

,

SA7=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA8=

OFF/ON/SSM

;

2


RTRV-EQPT-SGE::

E1-1/E1-2

: CTAG ;

3

4

5

Check the value written after the “SAX=”:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"E1-1/E1-2:CODE=HDB3/AMI,CRC4=ON/OFF,TS16=CCS/CAS,

SA4=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA5=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA6=

OFF/ON/SSM

,

SA7=

OFF/ON/SSM

,SA8=

OFF/ON/SSM

,IDLE=0…255"

;

Select the E1 configuration option (TYPE) to the Output Group (OG) required.

ED-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ::TYPE=

E1_1/E1_2

;


RTRV-EQPT-OG::

1-1…10-2

: CTAG ;


7-26

6


SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

1-1…10-2

:TYPE=

E1_1

,

E1_2

"

;

Procedure 7-21 Sa bit configuration on Output Line

Commissioning

Should you need to restore the factory default parameters, the following procedure is required.

Note:

When sending the following command the card’s function will be stopped during a few seconds and will affect the synchronization distribution if it is not 1:1 protected.

CAUTION:

Serious outage can result if the default setting is reverted on an active card as it will lost its current configuration.

STEP ACTION

1

Locate the card that you need to restore the factory settings

2

Send the following command accordingly:

INIT-SYS::

INC-1-A..INC-2-B/GPS-A/GPS-B/THC-A/

THC-B/SGC-A/SGC-B/OUC-1-A..OUC-10-B/MAC-A/MAC-B/

ALL

: CTAG ::

COLD

;

Procedure 7-22 Restoring Factory Parameters


7-27

7.3 Test and Verification Procedure

Commissioning

CAUTION:

This section can be performed only before placing the shelf in service as it can create outages while shelf is in service.



This chapter presents some basic testing and checking procedure which can be used to check that the OSA 5548C SSU is working properly after installation and configuration completion.

7.3.1.2 Requirements

The shelf must have completed its starting procedure, which means that the THC cards must be operational (i.e. not in warm-up or in fast start-up). The configuration shall be already completed, but it is not mandatory.

7.3.2 Serial Connection Test Procedure

STEP ACTION

1

Write the following command in the bottom of the right window which has appeared once you have been connected:

RTRV-HDR::: CTAG ;

2

3

Then if the communication is working correctly, you should be prompted with the following answer:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Redo the same test on the second serial RS-232C connector (one is located on the POWER-B card and the other on rear side, on the

Management connector tile)

Procedure 7-23 Serial Connection Test


7-28

Commissioning

7.3.3 Ethernet Connection Test Procedure

STEP ACTION

1

Start the SyncTerminal interface

2

If you were not able to communicate until now, despite you followed the correct Ethernet connection procedure, read the follow below information:

 If the IP address is already configured in the SyncTerminal:

Go in the menu TOOLS > Ping Current Connection, then check that the IP address answers

 If the IP address is not yet configured in the SyncTerminal:

Go in the menu TOOLS > Ping Specific Address > Enter the IP address, then check that the IP address answers

If the connection cannot be established by the PING, check that the cat.5 10 or 100 Base-T Ethernet cable is OK and well connected. If the problem persists, contact an IT person to check that the network connection corresponds to the network rules.

3

4

If you were able to establish the communication, send the following command:

RTRV-HDR::: CTAG ;

The SyncTerminal should show you the following message:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Procedure 7-24 Ethernet Connection Test


7-29

Commissioning

7.3.4 Verifying Shelf Inventory

STEP ACTION

1

Enter the following TL1 command in one single line to retrieve the OSA

5548C type information:

RTRV-NETYPE::: CTAG ;

2

Then the SyncTerminal should prompts the following answer

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

VENDOR,MODEL,TYPE,RELEASE

"

;

3

4

5

6

To retrieve the serial number of the shelf, send the following command:

RTRV-INV-SYS::: CTAG ;

You should receive the following answer:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

SERIAL NUMBER

,

SHELF TYPE

"

;

To retrieve the inventory of all cards, send the following command:

RTRV-INV::ALL: CTAG ;

The SyncTerminal will respond with the following answer:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"

card:slot_number,article_number,serial_number, clei_number,eci_number,hardware_version, software_version,testing_date,last_upgrade_date

"

;

Procedure 7-25 Verifying Shelf Inventory


7-30

Commissioning

7.3.5 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode

With the procedure below, the user can check the shelf type configured.

STEP ACTION

1

Look at the MAC card and check it lights the corresponding LED according to the shelf type:

 MST for a MASTER shelf

 EXP for an Expension shelf

2

To check via software, send the following command:

RTRV-EQPT-MAC::: CTAG ;

The shelf will answer the following:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

"OK: BUZZER=OFF/CR/MJ/MN , ACO=1/2/BOTH/NONE ,

ALMESC=0/6..24 , SYS_MODE=INV/MST/EXP "

;

The SYS_MODE parameter is the shelf operation mode, the INV means “INVALID”. The EXP means Expansion Shelf. The MST means

MASTER shelf (by default).

If the shelf operation mode is wrong, it is mandatory to power-off the shelf to change the configuration with the rotary switch located on the

Management tile.

Procedure 7-26 Verifying the Shelf Operation Mode

7.3.6 LEDs Operation Test Procedure

Below is a LAMP test procedure to be done physically on the shelf and via software.

STEP ACTION

1

Push the switch labeled “LAMP TEST” on the POWER A card and check that:

 The test lasts about 10 seconds

 All LEDs have lit during all the test duration

 The bicolor LEDs have been RED during 5 seconds and then

GREEN during the remaining 5 seconds

2

Do the same observation after sending the following TL1 command:

OPR-LEDS::: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-27 LEDs Operation Test


7-31

Commissioning

7.3.7 Input Line Priority Configuration Testing

Procedure

This procedure tests if the priority configuration and selection works correctly

STEP ACTION

1

Check the current priority setting with the following TL1 command:

RTRV-PRIO:::CTAG;

2

3


SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

" IL-1-1=

1..9

,IL-1-2=

1..9

,IL-1-3=

1..9

,

IL-1-4=

1..9

, IL-2-1=

1..9

,IL-2-2=

1..9

,IL-2-3=

1..9

,

IL-2-4=

1..9

,GPS=

1..9

"

;

Take note of the current priority configuration

4

5

6

Disable one by one the input line starting from the highest priority to the lowest one with the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

IL-1-1/IL-1-2/IL-1-3/IL-1-4/IL-2-1/

IL-2-2/IL-2-3/IL-2-4/GPS

:

CTAG ::ADM_STATE=

DISABLED

;

After each input line disabled, check that the active THC card shows the line number corresponding to the line with the next lower priority than the one just disabled.

1 to 8 on the THC corresponds to IL-1-1 to IL-1-4 and G corresponds to GPS

Note: If the new selected line has a WTR time configured, wait until that the delays has elapsed or initialize the WTR with the following TL1 command before disabling the next input line.

INIT-WTR::

1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4

: CTAG ;

Enable the lines to restore them as per their initial configuration status:

ED-EQPT-IL::

IL-1-1/IL-1-2/IL-1-3/IL-1-4/GPS

:

CTAG ::ADM_STATE=

ENABLED

;

Procedure 7-28 Input Line Priority Configuration Test


7-32

Commissioning

7.3.8 Redundant Card (Stand-by) Test Procedure

When there are two cards in the INC group, in the GPS group or in the THC group, one of the cards is in active mode and the second in stand-by.

Follow the below procedure to test if the stand-by card is working properly.

STEP ACTION

1

Send the following TL1 command selecting the group you want to swap the cards:

SW-DX::

INC-1/INC-2/GPS/THC/MAC

: CTAG ;

2

3

4

Verify that you have received an autonomous message such as below:

SID DATE TIME

A ATAG REPT SW

"

new active card,previous active card

"

;

You should see on the shelf that the new active card is working like the same status as the previous active one. Just allow sometime to the

THC card to complete its stating sequence.

Once the test done, reconfigure the A card as the active one with the same command:

SW-DX::


: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-29 Redundant Card (stand-by) Test


7-33

Commissioning

This section is the procedure to test each alarm level such as Minor, Major and

Critical.

7.3.9.1 Minor Alarm (MN)

STEP ACTION

1

Enable an input line to a port which is not connected with an input reference signal or set a wrong input signal type, with the following command:

ED-EQPT-IL::

1-1/1-2/1-3/1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/2-4

: CTAG ::

INPUT=

E1_1/E1_2/E1_3/E1_4/FREQ_1/FREQ_2/FREQ_3/FREQ_4

,

ADM_STATE=

ENABLED

;

It is also possible to remove or deactivate an input signal

Check that the MAC card shows a Minor alarm (MN)

2

3

Check that the minor alarm is reported after sending the following command:

RTRV-ALM::

ALL

: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-30 Minor Alarm (MN) Test

7.3.9.2 Major Alarm (MJ)

STEP ACTION

1

Remove any card from its slot

2

Check that the MAC card shows a Major alarm (MJ)

3

Check that the major alarm is reported after sending the following command:

RTRV-ALM::

ALL

: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-31 Major Alarm (MJ) Test


7-34

Commissioning

7.3.9.3 Critical Alarm (CR)

STEP ACTION

1

Remove a protected pair of cards from its slot or leave a group of card

(e.g INC) empty.

Check that the MAC card shows a Critical alarm (CR)

2

3

Check that the critical alarm is reported after sending the following command:

RTRV-ALM::

ALL

: CTAG ;

Procedure 7-32 Critical Alarm (CR) Test

7.3.10.1 Testing E1 Output

An oscilloscope with a test load impedance of 75 Ω (± 5%) or 120 Ω (± 5%), depending on the Output tile, is necessary to execute the following test. Then connect the oscilloscope input to a provisioned output E1 port and verify the following information.

Output Tile CEI connectors or BNC

Remote panel

With Sub-D connectors or with CEI/BNC connected with Balun

(75Ω to 120Ω adapter)

Cable type

Test load impedance

Asymmetrical

75 ohms

Symmetrical

120 ohms

Nominal peak voltage of a pulse

Unit Interval (UI) width

Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and negative pulses at the centre of the pulse interval

Ratio of the widths of positive and negative pulses at the nominal half amplitude

Pulse shape

2.37 V

488.28 ns

0.95 to 1.05

0.95 to 1.05

3 V

Rectangular

An isolated pulse shall fit the template shown in the Figure 7-1 : E1 Pulse Template.

The negative pulse is the upside-down representation of the following Figure.


7-35

269 ns

194 ns

219 ns

244 ns

Figure 7-1 : E1 Pulse Template

Template

Commissioning

Nominal Pulse

488 ns

7.3.10.2 Testing Frequency Output

An oscilloscope with a test load impedance of 75 Ω (± 5%) or 120 Ω (± 5%) depending on the Output Tile is necessary to test a Frequency Output Line. Then connect the oscilloscope input to a provisioned Frequency output port and verify the following information.


7-36

Commissioning

Frequency

Pulse shape

Output Tile

2048 kHz ± 50 ppm

The signal must conform with the mask (Figure 7-2)

The value V corresponds to the maximum peak value

The value V1 corresponds to the minimum peak value

CEI connectors or BNC

Remote panel

With Sub-D connectors or with

CEI/BNC connected with

Balun (75Ω to 120Ω adapter)

Cable type Asymmetrical

Test load impedance 75 ohms

Maximum peak voltage (Vop)

Symmetrical

120 ohms

1.5 1.9

Minimum peak voltage (Vop)

0.75 1.0

An isolated pulse shall be shown, as in the following Figure. An isolated pulse is defined as a pulse preceded by a bipolar violation, followed by a sequence of 3 negatives and 3 positives pulses and ended by a bipolar violation (two consecutives intervals at the same value).

T

30

T

30

T

30

T

30

T

30

T

30

+V

T

4

T

4

T

4

T

4

+V1

0

-V1

-V


7-37

Commissioning

7.3.10.3 Testing NTP Output

STEP

1

ACTION Server card

Set up the server card network parameters refer to section 7.2.2.5.

2

3

4

Change your computer time

Use a program to synchronize the computer time to the NTP server card

(stratum 1) (Yats 32)

Verify the synchronization

Procedure 7-33 NTP Output Test

7.3.10.4 Testing PTP Output

STEP

1

2

3

4

ACTION Server card

Set up the Ethernet parameters for PTP output (IP address, mask, gateway)

Configure the same PTP domain in the TCC-PTP (Grandmaster) and in the slave (ie OSA 5320).

Configure the TCC-PTP addressing mode respectively as MIXED or

UNICAST

Configure the slave addressing mode respectively as MULTICAST or

UNICAST

Only for UNICAST : Enter the PTP IP address of TCC-PTP used in the

Acceptable Master Table (AMT) of the slave

5

6

Verify that one master is visible in the slave PTP Status page and that the

Master address corresponds to the one previously configured

Procedure 7-x PTP Output Test


7-38

Commissioning

OSA 5548C

1 or many L2 switches

OSA 5320

PTP

tra ffi c

PTP

tra ffic

Figure 7-3 : PTP set-up testing


7-39

Commissioning

7.3.11.1 Alarm and History Flushing

Prior to complete commissioning, it is recommended to flush all logs related to commissioning procedure.

STEP ACTION

1

Check current Active alarms with the following command:

RTRV-ALM::

ALL

: CTAG ;

2

3

If no alarm is answered, go to the next step, if there is alarms like

“IMPROPER REMOVAL, send the following command to the empty slots:

DLT-EQPT::

INC-1-A…INC-2-B/GPS-A/GPS-B/THC-A/THC-

B/SGC-A/SGC-B/OUC-1-A..OUC-10-B/MAC-A/MAC-B

:CTAG;

If there is any other alarm, refer to section 0 for troubleshooting.

And resend the command RTRV-ALM::ALL:CTAG; for verification.

Flush the Alarm History with this command:

INIT-ALM-HIST::: CTAG ;

4

5

6

Check that history is empty with this command:

RTRV-ALM-HIST::: CTAG ::;

The answer should be such as follow:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

;

Flush the Automatic Message with this command:

INIT-AO::

ALL

: CTAG ;

Check that Automatic Messages are empty with this command:

RTRV-AO::: CTAG ::;

The answer should be such as follow:

SID DATE TIME

M CTAG COMPLD

/* */

;

Procedure 7-34 Alarm and History Flushing


7-40

Commissioning

7.3.11.2 Last Verification

If installation and commissioning have been successfully performed, you should not see any alarms, except those expected (i.e. due to the pre-configuration).

7.3.11.3 End of Commissioning Check List

In order to verify that all the basic points related to the commissioning have been executed, please read the following table.

Item Tasks Done

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

14

15

The Installation check list in section 4.8 has been duly followed

The serial and/or remote communication has been successfully established. (see section 7.2.2)

General configuration has been made with the shelf name the date and the time and empty slots disabled. (see section 7.2.4)

Input lines have been configured (ports attribution, E1 configuration, WTR,…). (see section 7.2.5)

The selection mode has been configured (Automatic, Manual and priorities). (see section 7.2.6)

The output configuration has been done (E1 configuration options, Frequency, etc.) (see section 7.2.7)

If necessary, the SSM configuration has been set (see section

7.2.7.3)

Both serial and Ethernet connections have been tested (see sections 7.3.2 and 7.3.3)

The inventory of the shelf has been checked and eventually noted

(see section 7.3.4)

The shelf operation mode has been checked (see section 7.3.5)

The LEDs have been successfully tested with the LAMP TEST function (see section 7.3.6)

The input line priority configuration has been successfully tested

(see section 7.3.7)


7-41

Commissioning

Item Tasks Done

16

17

18

The stand-by cards (INC, THC, MAC) have been successfully tested (see section 7.3.8)

The alarm levels have been successfully tested (see section

7.3.9)

The output ports have been successfully tested (see section

7.3.10)

All alarms and events have been flushed (see section 7.3.11)

19

Table 7-1 End of Commissioning Check List

The commissioning procedure is complete. The OSA 5548C

SSU is ready to be placed in service!

Work done

Installation

Location

Comments

First name, Last Name of the responsible Date of completion

Configuration

Test


7-42

Chapter

8. Maintenance & Troubleshooting

Including:

 Maintenance

 Troubleshooting



Cards & Tiles Replacement or Addition

 Fuse Replacement

 Repair & Return

 Oscilloquartz Contact Information

Maintenance & Troubleshooting


8-1




8-2


8.1 Maintenance

The OSA 5548C SSU does not require any routine maintenance. However, in order to ensure correct functioning of the LEDS and the cards operating in stand-by mode, a regular (once a year) preventive maintenance is recommended.

The following is a LAMP test procedure to be done physically on the shelf and/or via software.

STEP ACTION

1

Push the switch labeled “LAMP TEST” on the POWER A card and check that:

1. The test lasts about 10 seconds

2. All LEDs have lit during all the test duration

3. The bicolor LEDs have lit in RED during 5 seconds and then

GREEN during the remaining 5 seconds

2

Repeat the lamp test after sending the following TL1 command:

OPR-LEDS:::CTAG;

Procedure 8-1 LEDs Maintenance Test


8-3


8.1.2 Stand-by Cards Test

When the shelf has a complete card group, e.g. INC-1-A & INC-1-B, which means that most of the time, the slave card remains in stand-by, it is recommended to check it in order to ensure that it is still working correctly.

For that purpose, use the following procedure.

STEP ACTION

1

Study the card configuration to check if it contains:



2x INC card in the same group



2x GPS card



2x THC card



2x MAC card

2

3

If you get one or more of the above conditions, you can swap the stand-by card to become active with the following command

SW-DX::


: CTAG ;

Check that the card which has became active is working like the previous one. Allow for THC card settling time.

Procedure 8-2 Stand-by Cards Maintenance Test


8-4


8.2 Troubleshooting

The OSA 5548C SSU can report many alarms and event messages to alert the user about any problem. The alarms can be seen on the cards LEDs or in detail with software such as SyncTerminal or SyncView PLUS.

This section guides the user to determine the cause of failure which might happen on the OSA 5548C SSU

8.2.1 Alarm Behavior - Visible on Front LEDs

8.2.1.1 INput Card (INC)

LED

STATUS

IN1…IN4

IN1…IN4

State Description

GREEN

RED

The card is working correctly

The card is currently not working

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a short while. If the LED stays in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization tentative

Download the correct firmware in the card RED Flashing

ORANGE

OFF

There is a firmware version error with the command “ACT-DNLD” after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card.

A new card’s firmware is being downloaded No action needed

Dead, no power is supplied to the card Test the INC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

GREEN The input line is correctly configured to receive the signal assigned. The signal is qualified. The line is either ENABLED.

GREEN Flashing The line is in Wait-to-restore time and will be recovered once the time elapsed.

No action needed, the line is perfectly configured

Wait until the WTR time has elapsed or initialize it with the command “INIT-WTR”


8-5

Description

The line is being MONITORED


LED State

ORANGE

RED The line is either ENABLED or

MONITORED and at least one of the below criteria is detected:

With E1 signal:

LOS: Loss Of Signal

The signal is lower than -15dB with terminated connection

The signal is lower than -35dB with a bridged connection

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal

OOF: Out Of Frame

SSM is enabled and frame type is PCM31

3 consecutive incorrect FAS words (ITU-T

G.706)

If Threshold alarm is enabled: o

When false words rate of the total number (4000) during

1s, is higher or equal than the

Threshold selected

CRC-4

 915 CRC-4 values or more are false


The 5548C measures the line built cannot select it as an Input Reference.

Check the Input signal connected and if necessary, configure IL parameters with the command “ED-EQPT-IL”

8-6

LED State

RED Flashing


8-7


Description

on a total of 1000 (ITU-T G.706)

 If Threshold alarm is enabled: o

When CRC-4 rate of the total number

(1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

BPV : Bipolar Violation (with AMI Code) or

CV : Code Violation (with HDB3)

 1 or more BPV or CV detected during an interval of 1s


When BPV or CV rate of the total number (2.048E+06) during 1s, is higher or equal than the Threshold selected

With Frequency signal:

LOS: Loss Of Signal

 Signal level is lower than 200mV rms with sine wave

 Signal level is lower than 0.6V

OOL: Out Of Limit

 The frequency is not recognised by the system

 Relative Frequency Offset ∆f / f >

50ppm

Performance Measurement failure: MTIE Check the quality of the input line

LED

OFF


error, TDEV error, Ym Error, MTIE and/or

TDEV and/or Ym beyond of the specified mask

The disabled and the unused lines have their LED extinguished. Only 4 LEDs can be illuminated on the active INC card. The stand-by INC card remains with all its input

LEDs extinguished.

Table 8-1 Input Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs


connected. Modify the Performance threshold if necessary.

If it is required to use the line, enable and configure it with the command “ED-EQPT-

IL

”


8-8


LED

STATUS

GPS

8.2.1.2 GPS card (GPS)

OFF

RED

State

GREEN

RED

RED Flashing

ORANGE

GREEN

RED Flashing

Description


The card is currently not working or not delivering a qualified signal

The firmware version installed in the card does not correspond or is outdated compared the rest of the shelf version

A new card’s firmware is being downloaded

Dead, no power is supplied to the card


ORANGE

GPS signal is received

The GPS input is being monitored

No or not enough GPS signal available. PPS input not available. This state is present during about 5 min after powered-on the card.

No connection to the antenna. The GPS cable can be shorted or opened.

Action

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a while. If the LED stays in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair.

Download the correct firmware in the card with the command “ACT-DNLD” after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card.

No action needed

Test the THC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

No action needed


No action needed. Select the line “enable” to make it available for reference.

1. Check that the GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky and respects the conditions described in section

3.5.

2. Check that a in-line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters

When only the GPS LED is flashing:

1. Check that the GPS antenna cable is correctly connected to the antenna,


8-9

LED State Description

When both GPS and OCXO LEDs are in RED flasing state, this means that the input is ejected due to performance alarm.

OCXO

OFF

RED

RED Flashing

OFF

The GPS input is set as “disable” or the GPS card is in stand-by mode.

GPS card’s internal oscillator failure. The system has detected a failure on the internal oscillator

The GPS card is in pre-tracking sequence.

This state takes about 200s.

When both GPS and OCXO LEDs are in RED flasing state, this means that the input is ejected due to performance alarm.

The oscillator is operating correctly. The card can be in stand-by if the GPS LED is als OFF

Table 8-2 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs


Action

to the EMP arrestor and to the

5548C

2. Check that the EMP capsule is not blown

3. Measure the GPS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about 5 Volts

4. Check the GPS antenna

When both GPS and OCXO are flashing: ensure that the threshold set is lower than

G.811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCs at this point.

If it is required to use the line, enable it.

The card should be returned to factory for repair.

No action needed

When both GPS and OCXO are flashing: ensure that the threshold set is lower than

G.811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCsat this point.

No action needed.


8-10


8.2.1.3 GNSS card (GLN)

LED

STATUS

GNSS

GREEN

RED

RED Flashing

YELLOW

OFF

GREEN GPS and/or Glonass signal is received


YELLOW

RED

State

RED Flashing

Description






The GNSS input is being monitored

No or not enough GPS signal available. PPS input not available. This state is present during about 5 min after powered-on the card.

No connection to the antenna. The GNSS cable can be shorted or opened.


Action

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a while. If the LED stays in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair.


No action needed

Test the GPS’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

No action needed


No action needed. Select the line “enable” to make it available for reference.

3. Check that the GNSS antenna has a clear view of the sky and respects the conditions described in section

3.5 and in the GNSS installations documentation.

4. Check that a in-line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters (loss depend of cable used)

When only the GNSS LED is flashing:

8-11


When both GNSS and XO LEDs are in RED flashing state, this means that the input is ejected due to performance alarm.


Action

1. Check that the GNSS antenna cable is correctly connected to the antenna, to the EMP arrestor and to the 5548C

2. Check that the EMP capsule is not blown.

3. Measure the GNSS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about 5 Volts

4. Check the GNSS antenna

When both GNSS and XO are flashing: ensure that the threshold set is lower than

G.811 requirements as the GPS line is not filtered by the THCs at this point.

If it is required to use the line, enable it.

OCXO

OFF

RED

RED Flashing

OFF

The GNSS input is set as “disable” or the

GNSS card is in stand-by mode.

GNSS card’s internal oscillator failure. The system has detected a failure on the internal oscillator

The GNSS card is in pre-tracking sequence.

This state takes about 200s.

When both GNSS and XO LEDs are in RED flashing state, this means that the input is ejected due to performance alarm.

The oscillator is operating correctly. The card can be in stand-by if the GNSS LED is als OFF

Table 8-3 GNSS Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs

The card should be returned to factory for repair.

No action needed

When both GNSS and XO are flashing: ensure that the threshold set is lower than

G.811 requirements as the GNSS line is not filtered by the THC sat this point.

No action needed.


8-12


8.2.1.4 Tracking & Holdover Card (THC)

LED

STATUS

HOLDOVER

State

GREEN

RED

Description



RED Flashing The firmware version installed in the card does

ORANGE

OFF

RED not correspond or is outdated compared the rest of the shelf version



FREE RUN condition if after the warmup mode, the OSA 5548C is not connected to input reference signal

HOLDOVER condition when the OSA 5548C has lost all its input references

HOLDOVER

RED Flashing FAST-START, before entering in normal operation, fast tracking mode is used to quickly reduce the frequency offset between internal


Action

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a while depending on the internal oscillator. If the LED stays in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair.


No action needed

Test the THC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

If this situation was expected, no action are needed, otherwise, follow the next:

1. Check that the INC cards are plugged properly

2. Verify that the INC cards have no alarms

3. Verify that at least one input reference is connected and configured correctly

4. Verify the revertive mode (if a line has been lost in non-revertive mode, it will not been reselected)

5. Control that no lines are being in Wait-

To-Restore time mode

6. If the SSM mode is enabled, control that the input reference DS1 got an higher quality level than the one configured for the holdover mode

No action needed. Usually this status remains approximately 1 minute.

8-13

LED

OFF

OSCILLATOR

RED


oscillator and input reference

The system is correctly driven by the input reference with to the bandwidth specified

OSCILLATOR FAILURE, the system has detected a failure on the internal oscillator


Action

No action needed, except if the STATUS

LED is extinguished.

The active THC should have switched on the second one if 1:1 protected hence, the

THC card should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization.

No action needed RED Flashing WARM-UP, the THC is in warm-up condition during the oscillator’s heating period – after

OFF

Power on

The Oscillator has reached its normal operating temperature

Table 8-4 Tracking Holdover Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs

LED

STATUS

8.2.1.5 Signal Generator Card

State

GREEN

RED

Description


The card is currently not working or not delivering a valid signal

STATUS

RED Flashing

ORANGE

OFF

There is a firmware version error




No action needed, except if the STATUS

LED is extinguished.

Action

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a short while. If the LED stay in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization tentative


No action needed

Test the SGC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

8-14

f

E1



Action

No action needed GREEN

GREEN Flashing

RED

RED Flashing

OFF

GREEN The Frequency and PPS signal function and distribution are working correctly

GREEN Flashing The 5548C is in Pass-through mode

RED Alarm on at least one of the Frequency and/or

PPS signals distributed by the SGC card

RED Flashing

OFF

The E1 signal function and distribution are working correctly

The 5548C is in Pass-through mode

Alarm on at least one of the E1 signal distributed by the SGC card.

No reference is fed to the SGC to generate E1 signal


No reference is fed to the SGC to generate

Frequency and/or PPS signal


Check the THC cards operation states.

The SGC may be in trouble and should be returned for repair after a last unsuccessful firmware initialization

Check the upstream cards operation (THC and INC)


No action needed

Check the THC cards operation states.


Check the upstream cards operation (THC and INC)



8-15


8.2.1.6 OUtput Card (OUC)

LED

STATUS

OUT 1-10

E1

OFF

RED

State

GREEN

RED

RED Flashing

ORANGE

GREEN

Description



There is a firmware version error



The function is working and the E1 signals are distributed correctly

An alarm has been detected on at least one of the 10 outputs 1 to 10

Action

No action needed

During the power-up sequence, the LED can remain red for a short while. If the LED stays in this status longer, it means that the card is defective and should be returned for repair.


No action needed

Test the OUC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

No action needed

RED Flashing No E1 signal is received, to be processed and distributed by the OUC card


1. Verify that the output lines connected are not shorted if you have enabled this alarm detection

2. Measure each output ports and check that the level and shape are correct

3. If the card is protected (1:1) and the second card does not show any alarm, it is recommended to return this card for repair

During the turn-up procedure, it is normal to get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards. However, if this status remains longer, follow this

8-16

LED

OUT 1-10 f

OFF

GREEN

RED

State

The output line group is not configured as E1 or no output tile is installed if the f LED is also

OFF

Description


Action

procedure:

1. Verify the SGC cards operation and configuration

2. Verify the THC cards operation and configuration

3. Verify the INC cards operation and configuration

4. Verify the input lines configuration

5. Verify the input ports cabling

If the description does not correspond to the behavior currently shown by the shelf, follow the next:

1. Verify that output configuration is correct

2. Verify that Output Tile is present

3.

No action needed The function is working and the Frequency signals are distributed correctly






8-17

OUT 1-10 f

LED

OUT 11-20

E1

OFF

RED

State

GREEN

Description

RED Flashing No Frequency signal is received, to be processed and distributed by the OUC card

The output line group is not configured as

Frequency or no output tile is installed if the E1

LED is also OFF

The function is working and the E1 signals are distributed correctly



Action

During the turn-up procedure, it is normal to get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards. However, if this status remains longer, follow this procedure:









No action needed





8-18

f

LED

OUT 11-20

E1

OUT 11-20

OFF


RED Flashing No E1 signal is received, to be processed and distributed by the OUC card

The output line group is not configured as E1 or no output tile is installed if the f LED is also

OFF


Action

During the turn-up procedure, it is normal to get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards. However, if this status remains longer, follow this procedure:









No action needed GREEN

RED

RED Flashing

The function is working and the Frequency signals are distributed correctly


No Frequency signal is received, to be




During the turn-up procedure, it is normal to

OUT 11-20


8-19

f

LED

OFF


processed and distributed by the OUC card

The output line group is not configured as

Frequency or no output tile is installed if the E1

LED is also OFF


Action

get such alarm until the shelf is able to provide a valid signal to the OUC cards. However, if this status remains longer, follow this procedure:









Table 8-5 OUtput Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs


8-20


LED

STATUS

8.2.1.7 Time Code Card (TCC-NTP)

State

GREEN

RED

Description



RED Flashing There is a firmware version error

ORANGE

OFF



NTP SYNC

ETHERNET

RED

RED Flashing

The card system is currently in power up mode, wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure.

Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC GPS not already received.

GREEN The card is working correctly

GREEN Flashing TOD UTC GPS lose, NTP is waiting locked.

ORANGE

GREEN

OFF


Ethernet cable connected

Etthernet cable disconnected

Table 8-6 Time Code Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs

Action

No action needed



No action needed


Check the server availability, check if the

GPS card is working fine.

No action needed

No action needed

Check the GPS card

No action needed

No action needed

Connect the RJ45 cable


8-21


Note:

The following procedure is shown when a valid and well NTP server and

RJ45 cable is connected to the related input connector.

Seq.

1

2

STATUS

RED

GREEN

RED

NTP Sync

RED flashing

3 GREEN GREEN:

Table 8-7 Time Code Card Turn-up Status

Ethernet

RED

GREEN

GREEN

DESCRIPTION

Initialization

Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC GPS received or valid NTP server available.

NTP worked properly


8-22


8.2.1.8 MAnagement Card (MAC)

LED

STATUS

STATUS

RED

State

GREEN

GREEN Flashing

Description


The card is being initialized

The card is defective

RED Flashing The firmware version installed in the card does not correspond or is outdated compared the rest of the shelf version.

ORANGE A new card’s firmware is being downloaded

ORANGE Flashing The MST LED should also blink in GREEN.

It means that the MAC internal flash memory is corrupted.

OFF Dead, no power is supplied to the card

MST

GREEN

GREEN Flashing

The 5548C is a master shelf

The master shelf is being started.

Or when the STATUS LED is orange and

Flashing, the internal MAC flash memory is corrupted.

Or when RMT & EXP LEDs are Flashing together with the MST, the network parameters have not been found in the

POWER B card.


Action

No action needed

This status is normal at the start-up. If it remains permanent after 3 minutes, follow this procedure:

1. Plug-out and reinsert the MAC card.

2. If the previous action did not recover the card, return it for repair



No action needed

Please contact Oscilloquartz for technical support.

Test the MAC’s fuse and replace it if necessary or return the card for repair

No action needed

No action needed, the 5548C is starting as starting as a master shelf.

If internal flash memory is corrupted, contact

Oscilloquartz for support.

If network parameters have not been found, insert the POWER B card or send it for repair after a last plug-in/out manipulation.

8-23

RMT

EXP

USC

CR

MJ

MN

LED

OFF

OFF

GREEN

GREEN Flashing

OFF

State

ORANGE

OFF

RED

OFF

ORANGE

OFF

YELLOW


Action Description

The 5548C is not recognize as a master shelf

Not used in 5548C SSU

The 5548C is an expansion shelf

The expansion shelf is being started.

When MST & RMT LEDs are Flashing together with the EXP, the network parameters have not been found in the

POWER B card.

The 5548C is not recognize as an expansion shelf

At least one user is logged and handled by the security management

No user is logged into the security management

A critical alarm has been reported by the shelf

No critical alarm is currently active or the alarm has been cut-off

A major alarm has been reported by the shelf

No major alarm is currently active or the alarm has been cut-off

A minor alarm has been reported by the shelf

No action needed, this LED can be off during the start-up sequence

No action needed

No action needed, the 5548C is starting as starting as an expansion shelf.

If network parameters have not been found, insert the POWER B card or send it for repair after a last plug-in/out manipulation

No action needed, this LED can be off during the start-up sequence

No action needed

No action needed

Check the current active alarms of the whole shelf

No action needed


No action needed



8-24

LED

OFF

RED


No minor alarm is currently active or the alarm has been cut-off

At least one alarm has been cut-off

ACO

OFF No alarm is currently cut-off

Table 8-8 MAnangement Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs


Action

No action needed

If you do not know which alarm has been cutoff, control the current active alarms.

No action needed


8-25


LED

STATUS

8.2.1.9 Time Code Card (TCC-NTP)

State

GREEN

RED

Description



RED Flashing There is a firmware version error

ORANGE

OFF



NTP SYNC

ETHERNET

RED

RED Flashing

The card system is currently in power up mode, wait TOD UTC GPS or server failure.

Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC GPS not already received.

GREEN The card is working correctly

GREEN Flashing TOD UTC GPS lose, NTP is waiting locked.

ORANGE

GREEN

OFF


Ethernet cable connected

Etthernet cable disconnected

Table 8-9 Time Code Card NTP Troubleshooting - visible LEDs

Action

No action needed



No action needed


Check the server availability, check if the

GPS card is working fine.

No action needed

No action needed

Check the GPS card

No action needed

No action needed

Connect the RJ45 cable


8-26


Note:

The following procedure is shown when a valid and well NTP server and

RJ45 cable is connected to the related input connector.

Seq.

1

2

3

4

STATUS

RED

RED

RED

GREEN

OFF

NTP Sync

RED flashing

RED flashing

RED flashing

5

6

GREEN

GREEN

RED

GREEN:

Table 8-10 Time Code Card NTPTurn-up Status

Ethernet

OFF

OFF

GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

DESCRIPTION

Initialization

Initialization

RJ45 cable connected

Waiting synchronization, TOD UTC GPS received or valid NTP server available.

No GPS TOD received, check GPS card

NTP worked properly


8-27

LED

STATUS

8.2.1.10 Power Card (POWER)

State

GREEN

RED

Description

The card is working and the power is distributed correctly

No power is detected

The POWER card’s fuse is failed


No action needed

Action

1. Measure the voltage on the power connectors and verify that it is inside the specified range

2. Measure the fuse located on the front panel of the MAC card and replace it if necessary

3. If the card doe not work after the fuse replacement, return it for repair

Table 8-11 Power Card Troubleshooting - visible LEDs


8-28


8.2.2 Alarm Behavior - Visible with Software

Condition

Description

Active Input

Changed

Cond. Type

ACTINP

Alarm Cut-Off ACO

AIS

Sev.

N/A

N/A

Cards in cause

THC

MAC

Description

The THC has selected another input as reference.

The alarm cut-off has been activated, either physically with the pushbutton on the MAC or remotely with the TL1 command.

MN INC-1, INC-2 Alarm indication signal alarm.

Action

Check the previously selected input.

No action needed, if yopu are enar the shelf, check that all

LEDs have lit.

Check the E1 signal in question.

Alarm

Indication

Signal

Antenna failure

ANT MJ GPS-A,

GPS-B

No connection to the GPS antenna. The cable can be openend or shorted

Bad Position

PROGFLT N/A All The card is inserted in the wrong slot.

1. Check that the GPS antenna cable is correctly connected to the antenna, to the EMP arrestor and to the 5548C

2. Check that the EMP capsule is not blown

3. Measure the GPS antenna cable on the antenna side and check that there is about

5 Volts

4. Check the GPS antenna

Locate the card and move it to the correct slot. You can use the drawings situated at the end of this user manual


8-29

Condition

Description

Bipolar

Violation

Cond. Type

BPV

Code

Violation

CV

Sev.

Cards in cause

Description

MN INC-1, INC-2 Bipolar Violation with AMI code:

 1 or more BPV detected during an interval of 1s


When BPV rate of the total number

(2.048E+06) during


Threshold selected

MN INC-1, INC-2 Bipolar Violation with HDB3 code:

 1 or more CV detected during an interval of 1s


When CV rate of the total number

(2.048E+06) during


Threshold selected


Action




8-30

Condition

Description

CRC-4

Cond. Type

CRC4

Dead

EGC Link

Broken

External

Alarm

EQPT

LNKBRK

EGC Link

Signal Failure

LNKSIG

EXT

Cards in

Sev. cause

MN INC-1, INC-2

MJ

MJ

MJ

CR,

MJ,

MN,

N/A

All

EGC-A,

EGC-B

EGC-A,

EGC-B

EXT-

1…EXT-10

Description


Action

 915 CRC-4 values or more are false on a total of 1000

(ITU-T G.706)


When CRC-4 values rate of the total number (1000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the

Threshold selected

The system is not able to communicate with the card


No signal at all is received by the

EGC card

One signal is not received by the

SGC card

External alarms coming from third party equipment connected to the input port alarm on the

Management tile.

EXT-1..3=CR; EXT-4..6=MJ; EXT-

7..9=MN; EXT-10=N/A

1. Initialize the card in question

2. Pull it out and reinsert it

3. If the above action did not clear this alarm, return the card for repair

Check the cable connected to

LINK A and/or LINK B connector on Management Tile.

Check the cable connected to

LINK A and/or LINK B connector on Management Tile.

Check the device connected to the alarm input which presents an alarm.


8-31

Condition

Description

Fast Start

Cond. Type

FSTSYNC

Free Run

General failure redundant ko

General failure redundant ok

GPS OCXO

Failure

FRNGSYNC

EQPT

EQPT

GPSOCXO

Cards in

Sev. cause

N/A THC

MJ

CR

MJ

MJ

THC

All

All

Description

The THC card is in fast-start mode in order to synchronize its system against the input signal selected rapidly.

The THC card has not been fed with input signal reference since it has been powered-up

A general failure has been detected on a card and its redundant card is not OK

A general failure has been detected on a card but its redundant is OK


No action needed, leave the

THC ending their fast start procedure.

Action

If this behavior was not excepted, follow this procedure:

1. Check the INC cards configuration and operation

2. Check the Input Line configuration

3. Check the input lines connected to the shelf

1. Verify the status of the card




1. Check the status of the card




The GPS card’s internal

Oscillatore is deftective and the card should be returned to the factory for repair.


8-32

Condition

Description

Holdover

Improper

Removal

Cond. Type

GPS Receiver GPSRCVR

HLDOVRSYNC

IMPRPRMVL

Cards in

Sev. cause

MJ GPS-A,

GPS-B

MJ

MN

THC

All


Description Action

Not enough satellites are received 1. Check that the GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky and respects the conditions described in section 3.5.

2. Check that a in-line amplifier is mounted if the cable length is longer than 70 meters

The THC card has lost its input signal reference and hence generate the signal itself to rest of the shelf

If this behavior was not excepted, follow this procedure:

1. Check the INC cards configuration and operation

2. Check the Input Line configuration

3. Check the input lines connected to the shelf

When a card is removed from its slot while it is operating

1. If the slot in question is supposed to remain empty, disable the slot with the following command:

DLT-EQPT::

INC-1-A…INC-2-

B/GPS-A/GPS-B/THC-A/THC-

B/SGC-A/SGC-B/OUC-1-

A..OUC-10-B/MAC-A/MAC-

B

:CTAG;

2. Otherwise, reinsert the corresponding card in the slot


8-33

Condition

Description

Cond. Type

Internal Error

INTERR

Loss Of

Signal

MTIE Alarm

LOS

PRFMTIE

Sev.

Cards in cause

N/A All

Description

An internal error has been detected in the card system


Action

1. Check the status of the card



If the above action did not clear this alarm, return the card for repair

Check the signal level in question.

MN

MJ

INC-1, INC-2 With E1 signal:

 The signal is lower than -

15dB with a terminated connection

 The signal is lower than -

35dB with a bridged connection

INC-1, INC-2,

GPS

With Frequency signal:

 Signal level is lower than

200mV rms with sine wave

 Signal level is lower than

0.6V

The MTIE threshold has been crossed over by the current

Performance Measurement

Check and measure the stability of the signal in question.


8-34

Condition

Description

Cond. Type

No Reference

NOREF

Out Of Frame

Out Of Limits

OOF

OOL

Sev.

MN

MN

Cards in cause

Description

MJ SGC, OUC The card is not fed with signal


Action

1. Check the status of the

OUC and SGC cards

2. Check the configuration and operation of the THC card

Check the E1 signal in question

INC-1, INC-2 SSM is enabled and frame type is

PCM31

3 consecutive incorrects FAS words (ITU-T G.706)

If Threshold alarm is enabled: o

When words rate of the total number (4000) during 1s, is higher or equal than the

Threshold selected

INC-1, INC-2 With Frequency signal:

 The frequency is not recongnised by the system

 Delta f / f > 50ppm

Check the signal in question


8-35

Condition

Description

Output

Failure

Output

Shorted

Output

Squelched

Performance

Failure

Power Failure PWR

Redundancy

Failure

Cond. Type

EQPT

SHORTED

SQLCH

PRF

EQPT


Sev.

MJ

Cards in cause

OUC, SGC

Description

A failure has been detected on an output line (OL)

Action

MN

N/A

OUC

OUC

A output Line (OL) has been detected as shorted

Check the output cable and its connectors

The output line (OL) is squelched No action needed. To unsquelch the port, simply deactivate it with the command “ED-EQPT-OL”.

MN INC-1, GPS A failure of Performance

Measurement has been detected

Control and measure the wander of the signal in question.

MN PWR-A,

PWR-B

1. Verify the output signal

2. Check the OUC configuration and operation

3. Check the SGC configuration and operation

Check the THC configuration and operation

CR INC, GPS,

THC, SGC,

OUC

A power failure has been detected 1. Measure the power on the power connectors

2. Check the fuse embedded in the POWER card in question

3. Return the card for repair if the above action could not determine the cause of failure.

The card group is in failure 1. Check the status of the cards

2. Initialize the cards in question




8-36

Condition

Description

Reference

Passthrough

Cond. Type

REFPT

Reference

THC-A

Reference

THC-B

Software download

SWFTDWN

SSM Failure

SSM

SSM IQL

Changed

REFA

REFB

SSMIQL


Sev.

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cards in cause

SGC

SGC

SGC

Description

The SGC card has detected that the INC card provides the signal directly to itself, without passing through the THC cards. The shelf is so in pass-through mode.

The SGC card has detected that the signal fed to itself is provided by the THC-A card

The SGC card has detected that the signal fed to itself is provided by the THC-B card

Action

No action needed. If this behavior was not expected, control and check the configuration and status of the

THC cards

No action needed except if a failure has been detected in

THC-B. If you prefer to get the

THC-B active, simply send the command “SW-DX”.

No action needed except if a failure has been detected in

THC-A. If you prefer to get the

THC-A active, simply send the command “SW-DX”.

N/A All The card is currently downloaded No action needed. Wait until the end of the download.

MN INC-1, INC-2 When unknown SSM value is decoded for more than 10

Check the SSM information carried in the DS1 input seconds, once valid SSM value has already been read reference in question.

N/A INC-1, INC-2,

GPS

The input SSM quality has changed

No action needed. Check the

SSM sent to the input in question.


8-37

Condition

Description

SSM OQL

Changed

Cond. Type

SSMOQL

System Mode

Error

System

Reboot Cold

System

SYSBOOT

Reboot Warm

TDEV Alarm

PRFTDEV

Test Date

Error

EQPT

SYSBOOT

PROGFLT

Version Error

PROGFLT

Sev.

N/A

Cards in cause

N/A THC

MAC

Description

The output quality has changed

The rotary switch located on the management tile is not correctly configured

N/A

N/A

MJ INC-1, INC-2,

GPS

MJ

All

All

All

The system is rebooting applying factory default parameters

The system is rebooting keeping user-configured parameters

The TDEV threshold has been crossed over by the current


The date when the card has been factory tested is not correct

MJ All


Action

Retrieve which event has made the SSU shelf to change its output quality.

It can be a reference input switching, the input quality has changed or the SSU is in holdover.

Turn the rotary switch with a flat screwdriver to the correct position:

0: MASTER

1: Not Used

2: EXPANSION 1

3: EXPANSION 2

4: EXPANSION 3

5: EXPANSION 4

No action needed. Wait until reboot completion.

No action needed. Wait until reboot completion.



Unplug and plug-in the card and if it doesn’t resolve the problem, return the card for factory repair.

Download the correct firmware in the card with the command

“ACT-DNLD” after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card.


8-38

Condition

Description

Wait To

Restore

Warmup

Wrong

MADDS version

YM Alarm


Cond. Type

WTR

WARMUPSYNC

PROGFLT

PRFYM

Cards in

Sev. cause

N/A INC-1, INC-2,

GPS

MJ

CR

THC

THC

MJ INC-1, INC-2,

GPS

Description

The input line has been recovered and qualified by the system but will be available for selection only once the WTR time elapsed.

Action

No action needed, however, it is possible to initialize the WTR time with the TL1 command:

INIT-WTR::

1-1/1-2/1-3/

1-4/2-1/2-2/2-3/

2-4

:CTAG;

No action needed. The THC oscillator must warm-up before going in fast-start mode.

The THC internal oscillator is warming up. The time depends on the type of oscillator (Quartz or

Rubidium)

The MADDS (Manual & Automatic

Direct Digital Synthesis) system embedded in the THC got a wrong version compared to the release version of the shelf.

The YM threshold has been crossed over by the current


Download the correct firmware in the MADDS with the command

“ACT-DNLD” after verified that the firmware is in the MAC card.


Table 8-12 Troubleshooting - visible with Software


8-39




8-40

8.3 Cards & Tiles Replacement or Addition


8.3.1 Overview

The modular flexibility of the OSA 5548C SSU prevents major service availability malfunction the system, increasing the OSA 5548C SSU reliability. All cards and rear tiles can be replaced without affecting the other groups of cards or tiles.

Each slot has a specific number (A1 to A37), a DIN connector and a locating tooth to avoid incorrect slot insertion.

The OSA 5548C is able to detect hot module insertion or extraction. All cards are “hot plug and play”, which means that you can add, remove or replace a card at any time, under power, without disturbing the system.

8.3.2.1 Before Replacing any Card

If a card is alone in its group (unprotected), e.g. if there is the THC-A but not the THC-

B, if you replace the card with a new one, it is necessary to reconfigure the replaced card once installed.

However, if the group is fulfilled with its two possible cards (protection 1:1), the remaining card will transfer its configuration to the newest installed.

The factory recommends that the following commands be executed, and the response stored before removing an unprotected card (to be used to restore configuration on replacement).

INC cards:

To store the parameters

 RTRV-EQPT-IL

To restore the parameters

 ED-EQPT-IL

For THC cards:


 RTRV-EQPT-THC

 RTRV-PRIO

 RTRV-EQPT-MADDS


8-41



 ED-EQPT-THC

 ED-PRIO

 ED-MADDS



For SGC cards:


 RTRV-EQPT-SGC


 ED-EQPT-SGC

For OUC cards:


 RTRV-EQPT-OL

 RTRV-EQPT-OG

 RTRV-EQPT-OUC


 ED-EQPT-OL

 ED-EQPT-OG

 ED-EQPT-OUC



For MAC cards:


 RTRV-EQPT-MAC


 ED-EQPT-MAC



Note:

The SyncView PLUS management software has a back-up tool which can save the configuration and restore it in any shelf.


8-42


8.3.2.2 Card Addition or Replacement Procedure

The procedure is identical for each type of card

CAUTION

 When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards, use a grounded wrist strap to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge)

 Avoid touching components or connectors

 Avoid placing the card on an ungrounded surface

 Avoid placing the card on or near insulated elements and/or surfaces

STEP ACTION

1

Locate and verify the slot you want to insert the card.

2

3

If a card or tile already occupies the slot, unscrew it using a flathead screwdriver and pull it out carefully, still using ESD precaution.

Align the card edge with the top and bottom metallic slides until you can slide the module inside.

CAUTION

Prior to insert any card, verify that currently inserted cards have their locking screws well tightened!

4

5

6

Slide the card in carefully, until it sits well on the rear DIN connector.

Verify that the card has been correctly inserted.

Tighten the two screws of the card located on the top and the bottom of its front panel.

Procedure 8-3 Card Addition or Replacement


8-43


8.3.3 Connector Tile Insertion

The output tiles automatically configure the output when inserted.

STEP ACTION

1

Locate and verify the position in which to insert the tile.

2

If a tile is already fixed, unscrew it using a flathead screwdriver

3

4

5

Insert the tile slowly into the green printed connector card.

Verify that the connection has been correctly installed.

Tighten the four screws of the connector tile.

Procedure 8-4 Connector Tile Insertion

Green printed connector card

Back connector panel

Connector Tile

Figure 8-1 : Input Connector Tile Insertion


8-44



The power is distributed from the power connector tiles through the POWER A & B cards which provide a first power security with the fuse positioned on the front panel.

Then the power is distributed to each single card in the shelf, and then is distributed to each single card in the shelf, which converts the shelf power to card power. Each card has an independent on-board fuse.

8.4.2 Conditions for Replacing the Fuse

8.4.2.1 POWER Card Fuse

If the either POWER Cards LED is not lit Green despite correct power applied to the shelf, check the front panel shelf fuse.

8.4.2.2 Single Card Fuse

If a card cannot light its LEDs anymore, the fuse might be the cause of such behavior.

Note:

Fuse specifications and Order Numbers are described in 0

If the replaced fuse blows again, replace the card


8-45


8.4.3.1 POWER Card Fuse

The fuse is located on the front panel of the POWER A & POWER B cards


All the cards, except POWER A & POWER B, have their fuse at the same place, as shown here below:

LOCATING TEETH

DIN CONNECTOR

SERIAL NUMBER

S TATUS

FRONT PANEL

CARD ABBREVIATION

& PART NUMBER

DS 1

CC

OUT 11-20

DS 1

CC

BAIL HANDLE

A 0 x x x x

OUC


Figure 8-2 : Single Card Fuse Location

FUSE

LOCKING SCREWS


8-46


8.4.4.1 POWER Cards Fuse

STEP ACTION

1

Unscrew the fuse with a flat screwdriver doing a ¼ CCW turn rotation.

2

Pull out the fuse from its holder socket

Remove the fuse from the black fuse holder

3

4

5

Measure the fuse resistance with an ohmmeter and check that the value is infinite. If the resistance is at 0 ohms, the fuse is not the cause of the trouble; you should check the power fed.

If necessary replace the fuse with a new one

6

Insert it in the black fuse holder

7

Insert the fuse in its holder socket on the POWER card

Screw it doing ¼ CW turn rotation

8

9

Check that the POWER card LED lights in Green. If it is not the case, measure the power feed.

Procedure 8-5 Power Card Fuse Replacement


8-47



CAUTION

 When handling the OSA 5548C SSU unit or spare cards, use a grounded wrist strap to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge)

 Avoid touching components or connectors

 Avoid placing the card on an ungrounded surface

 Avoid placing the card on or near insulated elements and/or surfaces

STEP ACTION

1

Unscrew the two locking screws of the intended card

2

Remove the card carefully with its bail using ESD protection

3

Put the card on an ESD protected surface

4

Pull out the cylindrical fuse located on the erar bottom of the card

5

6

Measure the fuse resistance with an ohmmeter and check that the value is infinite. If the resistance is at 0 (zero) ohms, the fuse is not the cause of the trouble; the card might be failed and should be returned to your Oscilloquartz representative for repair.

If necessary replace the fuse with a new one

7

Insert the fuse in its socket holder.

9

Plug the card in its slot

CAUTION

Prior to insert the card, verify that currently inserted cards have their locking screws well tightened!

10

11

Check that the card lights its STATUS LED GREEN and make a LAMP

TEST to confirm

Tighten the card locking screws

Procedure 8-6 Single Card Fuse Replacement


8-48


8.5 Repair & Return

When you need to return a defective part for factory repair, follow this procedure.

STEP ACTION

1

Gather the following information:

 a full description of the trouble (alarms, behavior, etc.)

 part or article number

 serial version

2

3

Contact the Oscilloquartz technical support, if you are not sure about the trouble.

Fill a RMA-request form and send it to your Oscilloquartz representative.

4

5

We in turn will issue a RMA number (ex: I001234) and inform you of a standard repair cost (if applicable) and an estimated repair time. If not, we will quote you the repair price after evaluation of the part.

Once you receive the RMA number you can then proceed in returning the faulty material to our premises stating the RMA number on your export documents.

1. Place your packing slip / delivery note inside the original parcel or contact Support if cartons are required, and state: "Repair &

Return

" and the "RMA" given above.

2. The material must be returned in the original packaging or approved replacement packaging with ESD (Electro-Static

Discharge) protection for the warranty to be respected.

3. Shipment has to be made from your location to our factory on a

"CIP” basis (Incoterms 2000).

4. Please include copies of the shipping documents (delivery note and proforma invoice) inside and outside the parcel.

5. After shipping, please fax us full shipping details for follow up from our end.

6. For warranty repairs, state OSA Delivery note or invoice number on your packing slip / delivery note / proforma invoice.

.

Procedure 8-7 Repair & Return


8-49


STEP ACTION

6

During the warranty period, the costs of shipping the faulty material to OSA or to return it to the customer will be born by OSA (with exception of transportation like DHL, FEDEX, or other, local taxes, customs clearance, etc...).

Outside the warranty period, these costs will be borne by the Customer.

7. Ship the material insured to one of the addresses below:

Oscilloquartz SA

Attn. "Repair & Return"

16, Rue de Brévards

2002 Neuchâtel 2

SWITZERLAND

If the material is out of the warranty period, we then request you to sign and date the document containing the RMA number as acknowledgement of our proposed intervention.

The document can be used as a Purchase Order if your company policy allows it.


8-50

For technical assistance, contact the following:

8.6.1.1 International


Customer Support & Services


2002 Neuchâtel 2

SWITZERLAND

Tel: +41-32-722-5555

Fax: +41-32-722-5578 e-mail: [email protected]

8.6.2 Sales

For sales assistance, contact the following:

8.6.2.1 International


Sales & Marketing


2002 Neuchâtel 2

SWITZERLAND

Tel: +41-32-722-5555

Fax: +41-32-722-5556 e-mail: [email protected]



8-51




8-52

Chapter

9. Specifications

Including:

 Communication

 Input Specification

 Tracking & Holdover

 Performance Measurement (PM)

 Outputs

 Alarms

 Power Supply

 Mechanical

 General

Specifications


9-1


Specifications


9-2

Specifications


Local communication

Serial connectors

Labels & location

Baud rate

Parity bit

Stop bits

Flow control















2x RS-232C on 9 way D-type connector, male

“LOCAL COMM.” on the front panel of the POWER-B card

“LOCAL COMM.” on the rear side of the shelf, on the

Management connectors tile

19200 kbs

None

1

None

TL1

Language

Remote communication



Remote connector

Label & location





1x Ethernet (TCP/IP), RJ-45 connector, 100 Base-T

“LAN COMM.” on the Management tile or Remote panel

Language

Protocol





TL1

Raw data or Telnet

Communication ports



Up to 25

Simultaneous sessions



Up to 5 per each port and 32 max.on all ports

Table 9-1 Communication Specifications


9-3

Specifications

E1 inputs

Connector

Label

Ports

Configuration

E1

Supported Code

Supported Frame

Synchronization Status

Messaging (SSM)

Level

Impedance

Input failure criteria

Frequency inputs

Connector

Label

Ports

Configuration

Frequency

Wave

Level

Return Loss

Impedance

Input failure criteria

GPS

Connector

Label

















BNC 75 Ω female

E1 1 to 4

Up to 4, providing 4x E1 inputs 1:1 protected when all

INput Cards (INC) are installed

Up to 2 INput Cards (INC), providing 1:1 protection

ITU-T G.703-9

HDB3 and AMI (user selectable)

PCM30, PCM30C, PCM31 (SSM disabled), PCM31C

Fully supported



















 nominal to -15dB in Terminated mode nominal to -35dB in Bridged mode

75 Ω (terminating mode)

1000 Ω (bridging mode)

Loss Of Signal (LOS) -15dB in Terminated mode or

-35dB in Bridged mode

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

Out Of Frame (OOF) according to G.706 and according to user-defined threshold (10E-4, 10E-3,

10E-2)

CRC-4 according to G.706 and according to userdefined threshold (10E-4, 10E-3, 10E-2)

BiPolar Violation (BPV) if code is AMI or Code

Violation (CV) if code is HDB3 according to G.706 and according to user-defined threshold (10E-4, 10E-

3, 10E-2)

SSM failed (when the SSM code is unknown after

10s)

MTIE/TDEV and YM Performance Threshold



























BNC 50 Ω female

FREQ. 1 to 4

Up to 8, providing 8x FREQ. inputs 1:1 protected

Up to 4 INput Cards (INC), providing 2 groups in 1:1 protection when all INput Cards (INC) are installed

2.048, 5 or 10 MHz, ± 50 ppm (automatic detection)

Sinusoidal or Square min 0.4 Vrms (Sinus) max 2 Vrms (Sinus) max 5 Vpp (Square)

≥ 15dB

75 Ω ± 10%

Loss Of Signal (LOS)

Out Of Limit (OOL) when f/f > 50ppm







BNC 50 Ω female

GPS 1 & GPS 2


9-4

Ports

Configuration

Antenna

Table 9-2 Input Specifications

Specifications







Maximum 2, providing 1x GPS inputs 1:1 protected when both GPS cards are installed

Up to 2 GPS Cards, providing 1:1 protection

Active L1 antenna, 1575.42 MHz

9.3 Tracking & Holdover

Tracking & Holdover

Type

Configuration

Best performance

Holdover









Tracking and Holdover Card (THC) incorporating

Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS)

Up to 2 THC cards for 1:1 protection

Exceeds G.811 reference with embedded GPS (or external Cesium) source

THC with Rubidium (Rb) - SSU Type II

Freerun

Input selection

Pull-In / Hold-In

Jitter tolerance

Wander tolerance

Wander Generation

Wander transient

Jitter generation

Transient response

Phase discontinuity

Filtering Bandwidth



THC with Double Oven Controlled Quartz (OCXO) -

SSU types I, III, IV or V

Stability:

Frequency accuracy for:



SSU type II (Rb): +/- 1.6E-8



SSU types I and V : Not Applicable









Priority table

SSM value

Performance mask

Manual selection

The system accepts references according to:



SSU type I (OCXO) : +/- 1E-8





SSU type II (Rb): +/- 1.6E-8

SSU types III (OCXO) : +/- 4.6E-6





















Exceeds ITU-T G.812 9.2 (EN 300 462-4-1 7.1)

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 9.1 (EN 300 462-4-1 7.2)

MTIE and TDEV limit:

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 8.1 (EN 300 462-4-1 6.1)

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 10 (EN 300 462-4-1 6.8)

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 8.3.1 (EN 300 462-4-1 6.8) – max. 0.05 UI

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 11.1.1 and EN 300 462-4-1

Exceeds ITU-T G.812 11.4 (EN 300 462-4-1)

SSU type II and III : 1mHz

SSU type I : 3mHz

Table 9-3 Tracking Holdover Specifications


9-5

Specifications

9.4 Performance Measurement (PM)

PM

Resolution

Sampling rate

Interval of measurement and calculation

Type







1 ns

1 s (1Hz)

3 hours to complete a PM set

PM default threshold

MTIE

TDEV

Ym

PM storage capacity



















MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error)

TDEV (Time DEViation)

Ym (Factional Deviation)

MTIE and TDEV:

ITU-T G.812 9.1 related to SSU type I

YM: 5ppm

Algorithm according to ITU-T G.810 Appendix II.5

Algorithm according to ITU-T G.810 Appendix II.3

Algorithm according to Telcordia GR-1244 3-43

24 hours of PM, 8 PM sets + the on-going set

Table 9-4 Performance Measurement (PM) Specifications

9.5 Outputs

E1

2.048MHz

Connector

Label





CEI 1.0/2.3, SUB-D 25 pins or BNC Remote panel

OUT 1..10 and 11..20 E1

Ports

Configuration





Up to 200, providing 200x E1 outputs 1:1 protected when all OUtput Cards (OUC) are installed.

Up to 20 OUtput Cards (OUC), providing 10 groups in

1:1 protection

ITU-T G.703-9

E1



Level

Impedance





Nominal

75 Ω (ASYMM.) or 120 Ω (SYM.)

Time Slot 16 structure



CCS or CAS (user selectable)

Supported Code



AMI and HDB3 (user selectable)

Output failure criteria



Failed, when the amplifier is detected as defective



Shorted, when the output line impedance is too low

Connector

Label

Ports







CEI 1.0/2.3, SUB-D 25 pins or BNC on Remote panel

OUT 1..10 and 11..20 f

Up to 200, providing 200x outputs 1:1 protected when all Output Cards (OUC) are installed.

Configuration

2.048MHz





Up to 20 OUtput Cards (OUC), providing 10 groups in

1:1 protection

ITU-T G.703-13

Nominal

Level



Impedance



75 Ω (ASYM.) or 120 Ω (SYM.)

Output failure criteria



Failed, when the amplifier is detected as defective



Shorted, when the output line impedance is too low

PPS outputs


9-6

Connector


PPS

Level

Impedance

Synchronization

Specifications















BNC 50 Ω female

PPS 1 & PPS 2, located on the Management tile

Width : 20 µs

Rise time : <30ns

5V

50 Ω

To UTC (Universal Time Coordinate) when at least one GPS cards is locked on GPS satellites

Table 9-5 Output Specifications

9.5.1 NTP

TCC-NTP

Connector

Label

Ports

Configuration

NTP

SNTP

Precision

Management

Encryption

TCP/IP Configuration

Table 9-6 NTP Specifications

1x Ethernet (TCP/IP), RJ-45 connector, 10 or 100

Base-T on NTP connector tiles

NTP PORT

Up to 10

Up to 10 TCC-NTP cards

RFC 1305 / Version 3

RFC 4330 / Version 4

+/- 25us when locked to GPS

 HTTP

 TL1 via common 5548C management system

64 bits RSA™ MD5 encryption

DHCP / Fixed IP

9.5.2 PTP

TCC-PTP

Connector

Label

Ports

Configuration

PTP

Precision

Management

TCP/IP Configuration

Table 9-7 PTP Specifications

SFP cage that can hosts both electrical and optical transceiver.

PTP PORT

1 on front panel

Up to 6 (E60) or 20 (E200) TCC-PTP cards

IEEE 1588 v2

+/- 50ns when locked to GPS

 SVP

 TL1 via common 5548C management system

DHCP / Fixed IP


9-7

Specifications

9.6 Alarms

9.6.1 General

Alarms

Representation

Alarm levels

















On the front side of the shelf, on every single card’s front panel

Visible and audible, receivable form a third part device in local with 10 input relays

Alarm levels (MN, MJ, CR) transmittable remotely with 2x 3 relays NO (Normally Opened) and NC

(Normally Closed)

CRITICAL

MAJOR

MINOR

Non Alarm condition

254 items in a FIFO sequence

Alarm & Events log capacity

Table 9-8 General Alarms Specifications

Input Alarm Relays

Connector

Label & Location

Alarms Severity













SUB-D 25p. male with 10x pairs of pins IN and GND

“EXT. ALARM INPUTS”, located on the rear side on the Management connector tile.

Port #1 to #3 : CR – Critical

Port #4 to #6 : MJ – Major

Port #7 to #9 : MN – Minor

Port #10 : Non-alarm condition

Table 9-9 Input Alarms Specifications


9-8

Specifications

Output Alarm Relays

Connector

Label & Location

DC

Voltage

Current

AC

Voltage

Power

Current





2 SUB-D 9p female connectors providing 2 groups splitted in 3 rows of pins for CR (Critical), MJ (Major) and MN (Minor) alarm level status. Each row is splitted in 3 pins, such as NO (Normally Opened), C

(Common), NC (Normally Closed).

“ALARM OUT GROUP 1” and “ALARM OUT GROUP

2”, located on the rear side on the Management connector tile.





Maximum 60 VDC

Maximum 1 A







Maximum 125 VDC

Maximum 60 VA

Maximum 1 A

Table 9-10 Output Alarms Relays Specifications

Power Supplies

Connectors


Input Voltage

Power Consumption

Fuse types







Redundant connectors “POWER A” and “POWER B”.

Each contains one “+” and one “-“ connectors and two Grounding (GND) studs

POWER A located on the rear right of the shelf and

POWER B on the rear left of the shelf

-40 to -60 VDC (-48 VDC nominal)

Fully loaded with THC Rubidium



Warm-up: max. 214W



Steady-state: max. 178W

Fully loaded with THC Quartz





Warm-up: max. 176W

Steady-state: max. 166W

2x T 6.3A L 250V 5x20mm size located on the front panel of the POWER A and POWER B Cards

Table 9-11 Power Supply Specifications


9-9

Specifications

9.8 Mechanical

Mechanical

Mounting

Size

H x W x D

Weight















ETSI or 19’’ rack mounting

Vertical rack size: 26.6 cm (10.5 inches) 6U

Depth rack size: 27.0 cm (10.6 inches) (output connectors included)

Width rack size: 53.3 cm (21 inches) ETSI or 48.26 cm (19.0 inches) 19”

SSU: 14.5 kg (31.75 lbs) fully loaded with THC

Rubidium type cards embedded

Remote Panel: 1.75 Kg (3.85 lbs) + 10x flat cables

Management Panel: 1.6 Kg (3.52 lbs)

Table 9-12 Mechanical Specifications

9.9 General

General

Architecture

Main OSA 5548C SSU-E200 fully loaded :



4x INC cards





2x GPS cards

2x THC cards









2x SGC cards

20x OUC cards

2x MAC cards*

2x POWER cards



ITU-T G.811 : G.811 PRC

Long term frequency accuracy

Input reference

Output signals













E1

2.048, 5, 10 MHz

GPS

E1

2.048 MHz

PPS

ITU-T G.703

Synchronization Status



Messages (SSM)

Expansion shelves



Up to 4 expansion shelves* providing 200 more 1:1 outputs each one, for a total of 1000 1:1 protected outputs

*: Contact Oscilloquartz for availability


9-10

Specifications

Environmental

Environment







Storage: as specified in ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.1

Transportation: as specified in ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.2

Operation: as specified in ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.2

-5° to +45°C

Operating Temperature



Range

Storage Temperature



-20° to +50°C

Humidity



5 to 95% non condensing.

Norms and certificates

EMC & ESD

Safety

Compliance







Emission : EN 55022 ClassB

Immunity : EN 55024

Conformance to EN60950-1

Built to comply with:



CE





ITU-T G.703, G.811, G.812, G.704, G.781

ETSI EN 300 462-6, -4

Table 9-13 General Specifications


9-11


Specifications


9-12

Ordering Information

Shelf Spares & Replacement Parts

The following tables contain the articles and drawing numbers for each component.

Card Spares & Replacements

Description

Article number

Drawing number

Power A card

Power B card

Power fuse (batch of 10)

Input Card - INC (4 inputs per card)

GPS – GPS card

Tracking and Holdover Card - THC Rubidium

Tracking and Holdover Card - THC OCXO

Signal Generator Card - SGC (no expansion shelf possible)

Signal Generator Card - SGC only for 5548C r1.41 and higher

Output Card - OUC (20 Freq/E1 outputs per card)

MAnagement Card - MAC

TCC-NTP card

TCC-NTP card with front access / no tile set needed

TCC-PTP card

Blank Panels for unused INC, GPS, SGC, OUC, NTP, PTP,

MAC – batch of 20

Blank Panels for unused THC – batch of 10

A014122

942.085.710

A014123

942.085.711

A014164

967.316.631

A014455

942.085.081

A014154

942.085.090

A014460

942.082.300.20

A014462

942.082.301.20

A014458

942.085.991.20

A015232

942.085.993

A014435

942.085.172

A014118

942.085.529

A015490

942.085.047

A015911

942.085.048

A016433

942.085.049

A014153

982.080.304.51

A014155

982.080.312.51


1


Tile Spares & Replacements

Description

Article number

Drawing number

Power Tile panel A

Power Tile panel B

Input Tile panel

Management Tile panel

20x MHz/E1 output Tile with 20x CEI 1.0/2.3 asymmetrical

20x MHz/E1 output Tile with dual 20 pins flat cable connectors

(IDC) for Remote BNC panel

NTP Output Tile

Blank Output tile

Remote Panels

A014124

942.089.530.10

A014125

942.089.530.11

A014448

942.089.300

A014594

942.089.280.20

A014438

942.089.290

A014635

942.089.294.10

A015509

942.089.266

A014166

982.080.312.51

Description

Article number

Drawing number

Remote BNC panel for 60 outputs; ETSI mounting

Remote BNC panel for 60 outputs; 19'' mounting

A014724

982.060.610

A014856

982.060.620

90 cm - Flat cable for Remote BNC panel (10 outputs per cable)

A014548

957.752.002.91

300 cm - Flat cable for Remote BNC panel (10 outputs per cable)

A014549

957.752.002.305

100 cm - RJ-45 cable for Remote panel NTP connection

Remote input panel for ETSI mounting with 50cm cable length

20x MHz/E1 output Tile with 20x BNC 75 ohms

20x MHz/E1 output Tile with 20x CEI 1.0/2.3 asymetrical

20x MHz/E1 output Tile with 10x SUB-D 9 symetrical

(2 outputs per SUB-D)

Blank panel for Remote Output Tile

A015513

A014771

A014726

A014920

A014921

A014730

957.520.801.10

942.060.630

942.060.870

942.060.871

942.060.872

982.060.616


2


Fuse Parts & Replacement

The values and specifications for each card’s fuse can be found in the following table.

Card type

POWER A & POWER B fuse – batch of 10 pcs

Accessories

Card article nbr. Fuse specification Fuse article nbr.

PWR A: A014122

PWR B: A014123

T 6.3A / 250V

A014164

Description

Article number

Drawing number

Printed user's manual

Element Manager on CD-ROM

Cable RS-232 3meters

TCC-PTP Accessories

A014632

A014633

A012740

990.500.033

S10.EM0.A81

957.520.901

Description

Article number

Drawing number

Duplex optical LC connector

Copper SFP transceiver

Gigabit Ethernet Optical SFP

Transceiver

Gigabit Ethernet copper SFP

Transceiver

A016712

951.208.201

A016713

951.208.202


3




4

Glossary

Glossary

µ:

1 PPS:

Micro, used to express 0.000001

1 Pulse Per Second signal

100 Base-T: Ethernet Local Area Network.100 BaseT Ethernet has a

ACO:

AID: transmission speed of 100 Mbps

Alarm Cut-Off

Access IDentifier. The AID in a TL1 message uniquely identifies the entity to be acted upon by the input message to the OSA 5548C SSU.

AIS:

AMI:

ANSI:

Alarm Indication Signal - a code sent to downstream sites to indicate an upstream failure (used to prevent unnecessary downstream alarms).

Alternate Mark Inversion – code type belonging to DS1 signal

American National Standards Institute. American standards body that defines the

ATAG:

AWG:

B8ZS:

Bit (b):

Bit/s:

BITS: characteristics and guidelines for telecommunications networks

Autonomous Correlation TAG

American Wire Gauge

Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution - Code type belonging to DS1 signal

BInary digiT

Bit per Second

Building Integrated Timing Supply, also called SSU, TSG or SASE

BPV: Bipolar Violation - Two consecutives bits of the same polarity

Bytes (B): Sequence of 8 bits

BDFB:

CAN:

Battery Distribution Fuse Bay

Controller Area Network – Communication bus technology used for internal

CC:

CE:

Cm: communication in the OSA 5548C SSU

Composite Clock – 64/8 kHz signal

European Union regulatory community symbol

CentiMeters (1 inch = 2.54 cm)

COMM: Communication

CR: Critical Alarm, the higher severity level of alarm

CTAG:

D4: dB: dBm:

DDS:

DS1:

DUS:

EMC:

EMI:

EMP:

Correlation TAG

Also called SF (Super Frame) - A frame type belonging to the DS1 signal

Abbreviation for decibel dB referenced to one milliwatt

Direct Digital Synthesis

Digital Service level 1 -1.544 Mbit/s signal, also called T1

Don’t Use for Synchronization

Electro Magnetic Compatibility

Electro Magnetic Interference

Electro Magnetic Pulse - The electromagnetic radiation from a nuclear explosion.

The resulting electric and magnetic fields may couple with electrical/electronic systems to produce damaging current and voltage surges.

EQPT: EQuiPmenT

ESD: ElectroStatic Discharge

ESF: Extended Super Frame - A frame type belonging to the DS1 signal


I

Glossary

ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institutes

EXT: EXTernal

FAT: Equipement test protocol to ensure that contractual requirements are met

FCC:

FDL:

Federal Communications Commission

Facilities Data Link

FTP:

G:

GND:

GPS:

GR:

GUI:

HDB3:

Hz:

IEEE:

IN:

INC:

File Transfer Protocol

Giga, used to express 1 000 000 000

GrouND termination point on equipment

Global Positioning System

Generic Requirements

Graphical User Interface

High Density Bipolar Order 3 Encoding

Hertz – 1 Hertz equal 1 cycle per second

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

INput

INput Card

IP:

ISO:

ITU:

ITU-T:

Jitter:

Internet Protocol or In Progress in TL1 autonomous answer

International Standards Organization

International Telecommunications Union

International Telecommunications Union, Telecommunications service sector k: kg:

LAN:

LED:

LOF:

LOS:

M: m:

MAC:

MADDS:

MIB:

MJ:

Short-term non-cumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal form their ideal positions in time, expressed in seconds or in UI (unit interval)

Kilo, used to express 1000

Kilo Gramms (1 lbs = 0.45 kg)

Local Area Network

Light Emitting Diode

Loss Of Frame

Loss Of Signal

Mega, used to express 1 000 000

Milli, used to express 0.001 or meter

MAnagement Card

Manual & Automatic Direct Digital Synthesis

Management Information Base

Major Alarm, the medium severity level of alarm

Mm: MilliMeters

MN: Minor Alarm, the lower secverity level of alarm

MTIE: Maximum Time Interval Error

NA or N/A: Non Available or Non Applicable

NE:

NEBS:

Network Element

Network Equipment Building Systems

NG: Next Generation


II

Glossary

NVRAM:

OCXO:

OOL:

OSA:

Non-Volatile Random Access Memory

Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator

Out Of Limit alarm

Oscilloquartz SA

OUC: OUtput Card

OUT: OUTput

PLL:

PM:

Phase Locked Loop

Performances Measurement

PPM:

PPS:

PRC:

PRS:

PWR:

Parts Per Million

Pulse Per Second

Primary Reference Clock

Primary Reference Source

PoWeR

QOS:

RAM:

RAN:

Quality Of Service

Random Access Memory

Return Authorization Number, also called RMA – Number required to return material for factory repair

Rb: Rubidium

RES: REServed

RFC:

RJ-45:

Request For Comment

Registered Jack 45 - 8 pin-connector for data transmission

RS-232:

RS-422:

SASE:

SDH:

SEC:

SGC:

SID:

Interface for communicating serially between computer and terminals

Specification for electrical parameters of an interface only. RS422 is compatible with

V11 and X21.

Stand-alone Synchronisation Equipment

Synchronization Digital Hierarchy

Synchronous Equipment Clock

Signal Generator Card

Source IDentifier

SNMP:

SONET:

SSM:

SSU:

Simple Network Management Protocol

Synchronous Optical NETwork

Synchronization Status Message

Synchronization Supply Unit, also called SASE, BITS or TSG

STU:

T1:

Synchronization Traceability Unknown

An abbreviated form of 1544 kbit/s, also called DS1

TCC-NTP Time Code Card-Network Time Protocol or TCC-NTP card

TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet protocol

TDEV:

THC:

TID:

TS0:

TIE:

Time DEViation - Square root of TVAR, expressed in nano seconds.

Tracking & Holdover Card

Target Identifier

Time Slot 0

Time Interval Error - Variation in time delay of a given timing signal with respect to an ideal timing signals over a particular time period. Time interval error over an observation time S (seconds).

Tip & Ring: Two wires required for a connection (positive & negative)

TL1:

TNC:

SSU:

Transaction Language 1

Transit Node traCeable

Timing Signal Generator, also called BITS, SSU or SASE


III

TVAR:

UL:

UTC:

WAN:

Wander:

WTR:

XO:

Ym:

Glossary

Measure of the expected time variation of signal as a function of integration time.

See also TDEV.

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc

Universal Time Coordinated

Wide Area Network

Long-term non-cumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal form their ideal positions in time, expressed in seconds or in UI (unit interval).

Wait-To-Restore time function

Crystal (X-tal) Oscillator

Fractional Frequency Deviation - normalised instantaneous offset from a reference, in function of time.


IV

Document History

Document History

Project N° :

Document Type :

5548C

User Manual

Author :

Last Up-date : 25.10.2012

DATE REVISION

--

A

22.04.2008

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

12.06.2008

26.11.2008

09.04.2009

18.09.2009

03.07.2010

09.09.2010

16.11.2010

25.10.2011

29.11.2011

25.10.2012

CORRECTIONS

- Add connection description for remote panel SUB-D

- Extract GPS Antenna installation information

- Extract TL1 commands and alarm lists

- Correction to mounting rack depth size

- Modify power supply labels

- Update output section descriptions

- Update address for OSA USA

- Update TCC-NTP card description

- Change procedure for Critical Alarm Testing in the

Commissioning chapter

- Add weights for Management and Remote panels

- Update EMC normes

- Update NTP card descriptions and ordering numbers

- Add and update all aspects of the TCC- NTP card

- Add ordering number for new release SGC card

- Add TCC-NTP card with NTP output on the front panel

- Add Ethernet speed management setting

- Add note for PPS offset in GPS module

- Delete address for OSA USA

- Update serial connection with Terminal Emulator procedure

- Add TCC-PTP card

- Update TCC-PTP drawing and descriptions

- Upgrade drawings for Adobe compatibility

- Add a warning note for output terminations

- Update step 5 in Grounding & Power Connection procedure


V


Document History


VI

FRONT VIEW DRAWING

Front & Rear View Drawings


VII

REAR VIEW DRAWING

A121 A122 A123 A124 A125 A126

Front & Rear View Drawings

A127

A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 A106 A107


VIII

OSA5548C-200 rev-k4

USER MANUAL for OSA SSU-E200

What's new in this edition

Page Table of Contents

List of Figures Page

List of Tables Page

List of Procedures Page

1. Introduction

1.1 About this Manual

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

DO NOT DISCARD, READ BEFORE OPERATING

1.4 Warranty

1.5 Certification

2. Product Overview

2.1 Introduction

A: Input Lines (IL)

C: INput Cards (INC)

B: GPS Inputs

D: GPS cards (GPS)

D: GNSS cards (GPS/GLONASS)

E: Tracking & Holdover Cards (THC)

F: Signal Generator Cards (SGC)

G: OUtput Section

H: Expansion Shelves*

I: Power Supply

J: MAnagament Cards (MAC)

2.5 System Components & Operation

5548C

Input Group 1 Input Group 2

GPS A

GPS B

2.6 Communication

2.7 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM)

2.8 Alarms

3. Pre-Installation Considerations

3.1 Overview

3.3 ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) Prevention

3.5 GPS Antenna Mounting

3.7 Required Tools & Material

4. Equipment Installation

4.1 Overview

4.2 Unpacking

Remote Output Panel

Remote IN, PWR and MGMT Panel

Remote Output Panel

4.4 Grounding & Power Connection

Please refer to chapter 5 for Turn Up Procedures

4.5 Connections

Input Group 1 Input Group 2

GPS A

GPS B

4.6 Alarms

4.7 Cabling Communication Ports

4.8 Installation Check List

5. Turn-up Procedure

5.1 Overview

5.2 Power-up

5.3 Card Start-up Sequences

6. Operating & Provisioning

6.1 Overview

6.2 Communication

ED-EQPT-OL : [TID] :

:

SQUELCH=OFF,TAG=”my tag” ;

Top menu

Shortcut menu

UID: OSCILLOQUARTZ

PID: OSA

Logout the 5548C

6.4 General Parameters and Information

6.5 Input Line (IL) Properties & INput Card (INC)

Configurations

6.8 Line Switching, Tracking & Holdover (THC), Signal

Filtering and Processing

6.9 Signal Generation & Output Properties

NTP SERVER 1

NTP SERVER 2

NTP SERVER 1

NTP SERVER 2

Clock Quality Configuration